User’s Manual

ACH550-UH HVAC Drives (1…550 HP)

2 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

ACH550 Drive Manuals BACnet is a registered trademark of ASHRAE.

CANopen is a registered trademark of CAN in Automation
GENERAL MANUALS e.V.
ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet
ACH550-UH HVAC User's Manual (1…550 HP) International.
• Safety DeviceNet is a registered trademark of Open DeviceNet
Vendor Association.
• Installation
DRIVECOM is a registered trademark of DRIVECOM User
• Start-Up Organization.
• Embedded Fieldbus Interbus is a registered trademark of Interbus Club.
• Fieldbus Adapter LonWorks is a registered trademark of Echelon Corp.
• Diagnostics Metasys is a registered trademark of Johnson Controls Inc.
• Maintenance Modbus and Modbus Plus are registered trademarks of
• Technical Data Schneider Automation Inc.
ACH550-PC/PD Packaged Drive with Disconnect Profibus is a registered trademark of Profibus Trade Org.
Supplement for ACH550-UH HVAC User’s Manual Profibus-DP is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
• Safety
• Installation
• Start-Up
• Maintenance
• Technical Data
E-Bypass Configurations (BC, BD, VC or VD) for
ACH550 Drives (1…400 HP)
• Safety
• Installation
• Start-Up
• Technical Data
OPTION MANUALS
(Fieldbus Adapters, I/O Extension Modules etc., manuals
delivered with optional equipment)

Relay Output Extension Module (typical title)

• Installation
• Programming
• Fault tracing
• Technical data

© 2004, 2005, 2006 ABB Inc. All Rights Reserved.

ACH550-UH User’s Manual 3

Safety

Warning! The ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive should ONLY be installed by

a qualified electrician.
Warning! Even when the motor is stopped, dangerous voltage is present at the
Power Circuit terminals U1, V1, W1 and U2, V2, W2 and, where present, UDC+,
UDC-, BRK+ and BRK-.
Warning! Dangerous voltage is present when input power is connected. After
disconnecting the supply, wait at least 5 minutes (to let the intermediate circuit
capacitors discharge) before removing the cover.
Warning! Even when power is removed from the input terminals of the
ACH550, there may be dangerous voltage (from external sources) on the
terminals of the relay outputs R01…R03.
Warning! When the control terminals of two or more drive units are connected
in parallel, the auxiliary voltage for these control connections must be taken
from a single source which can either be one of the units or an external
supply.
Warning! The ACH550 will start up automatically after an input voltage
interruption if the external run command is on.
Warning! The heat sink may reach a high temperature. See "Technical Data" on
page 261.
Warning! If the drive will be used in a floating network, remove screws at EM1
and EM3 (Frame size R1…R4), or F1 and F2 (Frame size R5 or R6). See
diagrams on page 17 and page 18 respectively. Also see "Unsymmetrically
Grounded Networks" and "Floating Networks" on page 269.
Warning! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while
power is applied to the drive’s input terminals.

Note! For more technical information, contact the factory or your local ABB sales
representative.

Safety
4 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Use of Warnings and Notes

There are two types of safety instructions throughout this manual:
• Notes draw attention to a particular condition or fact, or give information on a
subject.
• Warnings caution you about conditions which can result in serious injury or death
and/or damage to the equipment. They also tell you how to avoid the danger. The
warning symbols are used as follows:
Dangerous voltage warning warns of high voltage which can cause physical
injury and/or damage to the equipment.
General warning warns about conditions, other than those caused by
electricity, which can result in physical injury and/or damage to the equipment

Safety
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 5

Table of Contents

Safety
Use of Warnings and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Table of Contents

Installation
Installation Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Preparing for Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Installing the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Start-Up
HVAC Control Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Application Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Parameter Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Embedded Fieldbus
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Mechanical and Electrical Installation – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Communication Set-up – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Activate Drive Control Functions – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Feedback from the Drive – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Diagnostics – EFB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Modbus Protocol Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
ABB Control Profiles Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
N2 Protocol Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
FLN Protocol Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
BACnet Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
BACnet Object Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Fieldbus Adapter
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Mechanical and Electrical Installation – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Communication Set-up – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Activate Drive Control Functions – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Feedback from the Drive – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Diagnostics – FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
ABB Drives Profile Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Generic Profile Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Table of Contents
6 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Diagnostics
Diagnostic Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Correcting Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Correcting Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Maintenance
Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Drive Module Fan Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Enclosure Fan Replacement – UL Type 12 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Enclosure Air Filter Replacement – UL Type 12 Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Control Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Technical Data
Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Input Power Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
Motor Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Control Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Dimensions and Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Degrees of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Ambient Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Applicable Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Liability Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Index

Table of Contents
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 7

Installation

Study these installation instructions carefully before proceeding. Failure to observe

the warnings and instructions may cause a malfunction or personal hazard.

Warning! Before you begin read "Safety" on page 3.

Installation Flow Chart

The installation of the ACH550 adjustable speed AC drive follows the outline below.
The steps must be carried out in the order shown. At the right of each step are
references to the detailed information needed for the correct installation of the unit.
Task See
PREPARE for installation "Preparing for Installation" on page 8.

PREPARE the Mounting Location "Prepare the Mounting Location" on page 11.

REMOVE the front cover "Remove Front Cover" on page 13.

MOUNT the drive "Mount the Drive" on page 14.

INSTALL wiring "Wiring Overview" on page 15 and

"Install the Wiring" on page 19.

CHECK installation "Check Installation" on page 23.

RE-INSTALL the cover "Re-install Cover" on page 23.

APPLY power "Apply Power" on page 25.

START-UP "Start-Up" on page 26.

Installation
8 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Preparing for Installation

Lifting the Drive

R1…R6
Lift the drive only by the metal chassis.

IP2040

R7…R8

Warning! Handle and ship floor mounted enclosures

only in the upright position. These units are not
designed to be laid on their backs.

1. Use a pallet truck to move the transport package/

enclosure to the installation site.
PC00005

2. Remove the cabinet side panels for access to the

cabinet/pallet mounting bolts. (6 torx screws hold each
cabinet side panel in place. Leave the side panels off
until later.) 2

3. Remove the 4 bolts that secure the cabinet to the

shipping pallet.

R70010

Warning! Use the lifting lugs/bars at the top of the

unit to lift R7/R8 drives. 30o

4. Use a hoist to lift the drive. (Do not place drive in final
position until mounting site is prepared.

Unpack the Drive

1. Unpack the drive.
2. Check for any damage and notify the shipper
immediately if damaged components are found.
3. Check the contents against the order and the shipping PC00003
label to verify that all parts have been received.

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 9

Drive Identification
Drive Labels
To determine the type of drive you are installing, refer to either:
• Serial number label attached on upper part of SW:
V.2.06B ACH550-UH-059A-2
the chokeplate between the mounting holes.
2030700001

• Type code label attached on the heat sink – on S/N 2030700001

the right side of the enclosure.
Input 3 PH 48…63 Hz 1 PH 4…63 Hz ABB Inc.
Voltage (U1) 200…240 Vac 200…240 Vac Made in USA of foreign parts
Current (I1n) 59.4 A 59.4 A
kAIC
Output 3 PH 0…500 Hz 3 PH 0…500 Hz
Voltage (U2) 0…U1 Vac 0…U1 Vac
Current (I2n) 59.4 A 28 A Org. Firmware: V.2.06B
Mfg. Date: 01-December-2005

Power (Pn) 20 HP 10 HP

S/N 2030700001

ACH550-UH-059A-2

Type Code
Use the following chart to interpret the type code found on either label.
ACH550-UH-08A8-4+...

AC, HVAC Drive – 550 product series

Construction (region specific)

01 = Setup and parts specific to IEC installation and compliance
UH = Setup and parts specific to US installation and NEMA compliance

Output current rating

See Ratings chart for details

Voltage rating
2 = 208…240 VAC
4 = 380…480 VAC
6 = 500…600 VAC

Enclosure protection class

No specification = UL type 1 / NEMA 1 / IP 21
+B055 = UL type 12 / NEMA 12 / IP 54

Fieldbus Adapters
+K451 = DeviceNet Adapter
+K452 = LonWorks Adapter
+K454 = Profibus Adapter
I/O Options
+L502 = Pulse Encoder Interface
+L511 = Relay Output Extension
+L512 = 115/230 V Digital Input Interface

Ratings and Frame Size

Tables in the "Ratings" section on page 261 lists technical specifications, and identifies
the drive’s frame size. To read the Ratings table, you need the “Output current rating”
entry from the type code (see above). Also, when using the Ratings tables, note that
there are different tables for each drive “Voltage rating”.

Installation
10 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Motor Compatibility
The motor, drive, and supply power must be compatible:
Motor
Verify Reference
Specification
Motor type 3-phase induction motor –
Nominal current Motor value is within this • Type code label on drive, entry for Output I2N,
range: 0.15…1.5 * I2N or
(I2N = normal use current) • Type code on drive and rating table in
"Technical Data" on page 261.
Nominal frequency 10…500 Hz –
Voltage range Motor is compatible with 208…240 V (for ACH550-xx-xxxx-2) or
the ACH550 voltage range. 380…480 V (for ACH550-xx-xxxx-4)
500…600 V (for ACH550-xx-xxxx-6)
Insulation 500…600 V drives: Either For ACH550-xx-xxxx-6
the motor complies with
NEMA MG1 Part 31, or a
du/dt filter is used between
the motor and drive.

Tools Required
To install the ACH550 you need the following:
• Screwdrivers (as appropriate for the mounting hardware used)
• Wire stripper
• Tape measure
• Drill
• Frame sizes R5…R8 with UL type 12 enclosure: Punch for conduit mounting
holes
• Frame sizes R7/R8: pallet truck and hoist
• For installations involving frame size R6…R8: The appropriate crimping tool for
power cable lugs. See "Power Terminal Considerations – R6 Frame Size".
• Mounting hardware: screws or nuts and bolts, four each. The type of hardware
depends on the mounting surface and the frame size:
Frame Size Mounting Hardware Note
R1…R4 M5 #10
R5 M6 1/4 in
R6 M8 5/16 in
R7…R8 M10 7/16 Secures free standing cabinets if required.

• For installations involving frame size R7…R8: Hoist.

Suitable Environment and Enclosure

Confirm that the site meets the environmental requirements. To prevent damage
prior to installation, store and transport the drive according to the environmental

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 11

requirements specified for storage and transportation. See "Ambient Conditions" on

page 290.
Confirm that the enclosure is appropriate, based on the site contamination level:
• UL type 1 enclosure. The site must be free of airborne dust, corrosive gases or
liquids, and conductive contaminants such as condensation, carbon dust, and
metallic particles.
• UL type 12 enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from airborne dust and
light sprays or splashing water from all directions.

Suitable Mounting Location

Confirm that the mounting location meets the following constraints:
• R1…R6: The drive must be mounted vertically on a smooth, solid surface, and in
a suitable environment as defined above.
• The drive must be located in a suitable environment as defined above.
• The minimum space requirements for the drive are the outside dimensions (see
"Outside Dimensions – R1…R6" on page 287 or “Outside Dimensions – R7…R8”
on page 288), plus air flow space around the unit (see "Cooling" on page 282).
• The distance between the motor and the drive is limited by the maximum motor
cable length. See either "Motor Connection Specifications" on page 273, or
"EN 61800-3 Compliant Motor Cables" on page 276.
• The mounting site must support the drive’s weight. See "Weight" on page 286.

Installing the Drive

Warning! Before installing the ACH550, ensure the input power supply to the
drive is off.

Warning! Metal shavings or debris in the enclosure can damage electrical

equipment and create a hazardous condition. Where parts, such as conduit
plates require cutting or drilling, first remove the part. If that is not practical,
cover nearby electrical components to protect them from all shavings or
debris.

Prepare the Mounting Location

The ACH550 should only be mounted where all of the
requirements defined in "Preparing for Installation" on
page 8 are met.
1. Mark the position of the mounting holes. 1

X0002

Installation
12 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Note! Frame sizes R3 and R4 have four holes along the top. Use only two. If
possible, use the two outside holes (to allow room to remove the fan for
maintenance).

Note! ACH400 drives can be replaced using the original mounting holes. For R1 and
R2 frame sizes, the mounting holes are identical. For R3 and R4 frame sizes, the
inside mounting holes on the top of ACH550 drives match ACH400 mounts.

Note! Frame sizes R7 and R8 have

mounting holes inside the enclosure base.
See “Mounting Dimensions” on page 285.

Where it is not possible to use either PC00023

mounting hole at the back of the base, use

an L-bracket at the top of the enclosure to
Fastening points when installed
secure the cabinet to a wall or to the back of back against a wall (Top view)
another enclosure. Bolt the L-bracket to the
enclosure using the lifting lug bolt hole on
the top of the enclosure.
Fastening points when installed
back against back
2. Drill holes of appropriate size in the
mounting location.

Fastening the cabinet at the top

using L-brackets (side view)
L-bracket
M12 bolt (1/2 to 9/16 in)

Cabinet top

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 13

Remove Front Cover

3
R1…R6, UL type 1
1. Remove the control panel, if attached.
2
2. Loosen the captive screw at the top.
3. Pull near the top to remove the cover.

IP2000
R1…R6, UL type 12
1. If hood is present: Remove screws (2) holding
the hood in place. 1
2
2. If hood is present: Slide hood up and off of the
cover.
3. Loosen the captive screws around the edge of
the cover.
4. Remove the cover.

4
FM

R7…R8, Cabinet Door

1. To open the cabinet door, loosen the quarter-
turn screws that hold the cabinet door closed. 1
R7…R8, Side Panels
The side panels were removed to take the
cabinet off the pallet. Installation access is
easier if these panels are kept off throughout
the installation.

R70020

Installation
14 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Mount the Drive 1

R1…R6, UL type 1
1. Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws
or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.

Note! Lift the ACH550 by its metal chassis.

2
2. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning
sticker in the appropriate language over the
existing warning on the top of the module.
R1…R6, UL type 12 IP2002

For the UL type 12 enclosures, rubber plugs are required in the holes provided for
access to the drive mounting slots.
1. As required for access, remove the rubber plugs. 2
Push plugs out from the back of the drive.
2. R5 & R6: Align the sheet metal hood (not shown)
in front of the drive’s top mounting holes. (Attach
as part of next step.) 1, 3
3. Position the ACH550 onto the mounting screws
or bolts and securely tighten in all four corners.

Note! Lift the ACH550 by its metal chassis.

4. Re-install the rubber plugs.

FM
5. Non-English speaking locations: Add a warning
sticker in the appropriate language over the existing warning on the top of the
module.
R7…R8
1. Use a hoist to move the cabinet into position.
30o

Note! If the cabinet location does not provide access to

the cabinet sides, be sure to re-mount side panels before
positioning cabinet.

2. Install and tighten mounting bolts.

PC00003

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 15

Wiring Overview
Conduit Kit
Wiring R1…R6 drives with the UL type 1 Enclosure requires a conduit kit with the
following items:
• conduit box
• screws
• cover
The kit is included with UL type 1 Enclosures.
Wiring Requirements

Warning! Ensure the motor is compatible for use with the ACH550. The
ACH550 must be installed by a competent person in accordance with the
considerations defined in "Preparing for Installation" on page 8. If in doubt,
contact your local ABB sales or service office.

As you install the wiring, observe the following:

• There are two sets of wiring instructions – one set for each enclosure type (UL
type 1 and UL type 12). Be sure to select the appropriate procedure.
• For the power connection points on the drive see the "Connection Diagrams"
section below.
• Use separate, metal conduit runs to keep these three classes of wiring apart:
– Input power wiring.
– Motor wiring.
– Control/communications wiring.
• When installing input power and motor wiring, refer to the following, as
appropriate:
Terminal Description Specifications and Notes
U1, V1, W1* 3-phase power supply input "Input Power Connections" on page 265.
PE Protective Ground "Ground Connections" on page 269.
U2, V2, W2 Power output to motor "Motor Connections" on page 273.
* The ACH550 -xx-xxxx-2 (208…240V series) can be used with a single phase supply, if output
current is derated by 50%. For single phase supply voltage connect power at U1 and W1.

• To locate input power and motor connection terminals, see "Connection

Diagrams" starting on page 17. For specifications on power terminals, see
"Drive’s Power Connection Terminals" on page 271.
• For frame sizes R1…R4 in unsymmetrically grounded networks, see
"Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks" on page 269.
• For floating (or impedance grounded) networks, see "Floating Networks" on page
270.

Installation
16 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

• For frame size R6, see "Power Terminal Considerations – R6 Frame Size" on
page 271 to install the appropriate cable lugs.
• For details on control connections, refer to the following sections:
– "Control Connections" on page 279.
– "Application Macros" starting on page 44.
– "Parameter Descriptions" on page 60.
– "Embedded Fieldbus" on page 153.
– "Fieldbus Adapter" on page 223.
• For electro-magnetic compliance (EMC), follow local codes and the requirements
in "Motor Cable Requirements for CE & C-Tick Compliance" on page 275. For
example:
– Properly ground the wire screen cable shields.
– Keep individual un-screened wires between the cable clamps and the screw
terminals as short as possible.
– Route control cables away from power cables.

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 17

Connection Diagrams
The following diagrams show:
• The terminal layout for frame size R3, which, in general, applies to frame sizes
R1…R6, except for the R5/R6 power and ground terminals.
• The R5/R6 power and ground terminals.
• The terminal layout for R7/R8.
R1…R4 (Diagram shows the R3 frame.)
J1 – DIP Switches for Analog Inputs
The switch is one of two types:
Illustration of available switch
positions; not default settings
AI1: (in Voltage Position)
ON

AI2: (in Current Position)

ON

Original Alternate
Panel Connector

X1 – Analog Inputs and Outputs

(and 10 V Ref. Voltage Output)
Power LED (Green)
Fault LED (Red)
X1 – Digital Inputs
(and 24 V Aux. Voltage Output)

X1 – Relay Outputs

Illustration of available switch

positions; not default settings
J2 – DIP Switches Optional Module 1
for RS485 Termination
X1 – Communications
J2 J2
(RS485)

ON
ON Optional Module 2
off position on position

Power Input Power Output to Motor

(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)
Frame Sizes
R5/R6 differ.
See next page. EM3
EM1
GND
PE

X0003

Terminals Not Used

Warning! For floating, impedance grounded, or unsymmetrically grounded

networks, disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing: screw EM1 (drive is
shipped with EM3 already removed). See "Floating Networks" on page 270.

Installation
18 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame sizes
R5 and R6
R5 R6

F2

F1

F2

PE GND
X0011
GND

Power Input Power Output to Motor

(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2) F1

Terminals Not Used

Terminals Not Used

X0013
PE GND
Power Input Power Output to Motor
(U1, V1, W1) (U2, V2, W2)

Warning! For floating, impedance grounded, or unsymmetrically grounded

networks, disconnect the internal RFI filter by removing screws: F1 and F2.
See "Floating Networks" on page 270.

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 19

The following diagram shows the power and ground terminal layout for frame size
R7 (R8 is similar).
R7
Motor Ground Lug ACH550 Control Wires
Terminals Bar (X1)
Input Power
Terminals

Terminal Strip
Only on
ACH550-UH

Install the Wiring

Checking Motor and Motor Cable Insulation

Warning! Check the motor and motor cable insulation before connecting the
drive to input power. For this test, make sure that motor cables are NOT
connected to the drive.

1. Complete motor cable connections to the motor, but NOT to the drive output
terminals (U2, V2, W2).
2. At the drive end of the motor cable, measure the insulation
resistance between each motor cable phase and Protective M
Earth (PE): Apply a voltage of 1 kV DC and verify that ohm
resistance is greater than 1 Mohm.
PE

Installation
20 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

R1…R6, Wiring UL type 1 Enclosure

1. Open the appropriate knockouts in the
conduit box. (See "Conduit Kit" above.)
2. Install thin-wall conduit clamps (not supplied).

2 X0007

3. Install conduit box.

4. Connect conduit runs for input power, motor 3
and control cables to the box.

X0005

5. Route input power and motor wiring through

7
separate conduits.
6. Strip wires.
7
7. Connect power, motor, and ground wires to
the drive terminals. See "Wiring 5
Requirements" on page 15.
4 IP2004

Note! For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable size is 25 mm2 (4 AWG).
For R6 frame size, refer to "Power Terminal Considerations – R6 Frame Size" on
page 271.

8. Route the control cables through the conduit

(not the same conduit as either input power or
motor wiring). 10

9. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the 12

copper screen into a pig-tail.
10. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for digital
and analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only
at drive end.)
11. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485 8
cables at X1-28 or X1-32. (Ground only at
drive end.)
12. Strip and connect the individual control wires
to the drive terminals. See "Wiring
Requirements" on page 15. IP2005

13. Install the conduit box cover (1 screw).

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 21

R1…R6, Wiring UL type 12 Enclosure

1. Step depends on Frame Size: R1…R4
• Frame Sizes R1…R4: Remove and discard the
cable seals where conduit will be installed. (The
cable seals are cone-shaped, rubber seals on
1 IP5013
the bottom of the drive.)
• Frame Sizes R4 and R5: Use punch to create R5, R6 1
holes for conduit connections as needed.

IP5023
2. For each conduit run (input power, motor and
control wiring must be separate), install water tight
conduit connectors (not supplied).
2

IP5006

3. Route the power wiring through conduit.

6
4. Route the motor wiring through conduit (not the
same conduit as input power wiring run).
5. Strip the wires.
6. Connect the power, motor, and ground wires to the 3
4
drive terminals. See "Wiring Requirements" on page
15, and "Connection Diagrams" on page 17. IP5007

Note! For R5 frame size, the minimum power cable size is 25 mm2 (4 AWG).
For R6 frame size, refer to "Power Terminal Considerations – R6 Frame Size" on
page 271.

7. Route the control cables through the conduit (not

the same conduit as either input power or motor
wiring runs).
8. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist the 9…11
copper screen into a pig-tail.
9. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for digital and
analog I/O cables at X1-1. (Ground only at drive
end.)
10. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for RS485
cables at X1-28 or X1-32. (Ground only at drive
end.)
11. Strip and connect the individual control wires to the
drive terminals. See "Wiring Requirements" on page 7
15. IP5008

12. Install the conduit box cover (1 screw).

Installation
22 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

R7…R8, Wiring (Both Enclosure Types)

The figures show connections in the R7 cabinet, the R8 cabinet is similar.
1. Remove the conduit connection plate from the top of the left bay.
2. Route the input power, motor and control cables to the top of the cabinet. Each cable
type (input power, motor, and control) must be in separate conduit.
3. Use punch to create holes for conduit connections as needed.
4. UL type 12 Enclosure: For each conduit Gnd
run (input power, motor and control wiring
must be separate), install water tight Input Power
Cable
conduit connectors (not supplied).
5. Connect input power and motor cables to
the bus terminals. See "Wiring Terminal Strip
Requirements" on page 15, and Only on
ACH550-UH
"Connection Diagrams" on page 17.

BP0054

6. Connect grounds to ground bar. Gnd

7. Strip the control cable sheathing and twist Motor
the copper screen into a pig-tail. Cable
8. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for
digital and analog I/O cables at X1-1.
(Ground only at drive end.)
9. Connect the ground screen pig-tail for
RS485 cables at X1-28 or X1-32. (Ground
only at drive end.)
10. Strip and connect the individual control
wires to the drive terminals. See "Wiring BP0054
Requirements" on page 15.

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 23

Check Installation
Before applying power, perform the following checks.
Check
Installation environment conforms to the drive’s specifications for ambient conditions.
The drive is mounted securely.
Space around the drive meets the drive’s specifications for cooling.
The motor and driven equipment are ready for start.
For floating networks (R1…R6): The internal RFI filter is disconnected (screws EM1 & EM3 or
F1 & F2).
The drive is properly grounded.
The input power voltage matches the drive nominal input voltage range.
The input power connections at U1, V1, and W1 are connected and tightened as specified.
The input power branch circuit protection is installed.
The motor connections at U2, V2, and W2 are connected and tightened as specified.
The input power, motor and control wiring are routed through separate conduit runs.
NO power factor compensation capacitors are in the motor cable.
The control connections are connected and tightened as specified.
NO tools or foreign objects (such as drill shavings) are inside the drive.
NO alternate power source for the motor (such as a bypass connection) is connected – no
voltage is applied to the output of the drive.

Re-install Cover
1
R1…R6, UL type 1
1. Align the cover and slide it on.
2
2. Tighten the captive screw.
3. Re-install the control panel.

IP2009

Installation
24 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

R1…R6, UL type 12
1. Align the cover and slide it on.
4
2. Tighten the captive screws around the edge of 3
the cover.
3. R1…R4: Slide the hood down over the top of
the cover.
4. R1…R4: Install the two screws that attach the
hood.
5
5. Re-install the control panel.
6

Note! The control panel window must be closed

to comply with UL type 12.
1

2 FM
6. Optional: Add a lock (not supplied) to secure
the control panel window.
R7…R8, Covers
1. If side panels were removed and not remounted,
mount them now. Each panel requires 6 torx 1
screws.
2. Re-mount all high voltage shields.
3. Close all internal swing-out panels and secure in
place with the quarter-turn screws.
4. Close the cabinet door and secure in place with
the quarter-turn screws.
R70020

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 25

Apply Power
Always re-install the covers before turning power on.

Warning! The ACH550 will start up automatically at power up, if the external
run command is on.

1. Apply input power.

When power is applied to the ACH550, the green LED comes on.

Note! Before increasing motor speed, check that the motor is running in the desired
direction.To change rotation direction, switch motor leads as shown below.

Drive
U1 V1 W1 GND U2 V2 W2

L1

Input L2 Motor

L3
GND
To change rotation direction,
switch motor leads

Drive
U1 V1 W1 GND U2 V2 W2

L1

Input L2 Motor

L3 FM

GND

Installation
26 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Start-Up
The ACH550 has default parameter settings that are sufficient for many situations.
However, review the following situations. Perform the associated procedures as
appropriate.
Spin Motor
When first installed and started the control panel displays a welcome screen with the
following options.
• Press Exit to commission the drive as described in section “Start-Up by Changing
the Parameters Individually” on page 29.
• Press Enter to move to the following options:
– Select “Commission Drive” to commission the drive as described in section
“Start-Up by Using the Start-Up Assistant” on page 29.
– Select “Spin Motor” to operate the motor prior to commissioning. This option
operates the motor without any commissioning, except entry of the motor data
as described below. Spin Motor is useful, for example, to operate ventilation
fans prior to commissioning.

Note! When using Spin Motor, the motor speed is limited to the range 1/3…2/3 of
maximum speed. Also, no interlocks are activated. Finally, once the drive is
commissioned, the welcome screen and this option no longer appear.

Motor Data
The motor data on the ratings plate may differ from the defaults in the ACH550. The
drive provides more precise control and better thermal protection if you enter the
rating plate data.
1. Gather the following from the motor ratings plate:
• Voltage
• Nominal motor current
• Nominal frequency
• Nominal speed
• Nominal power
2. Edit parameters 9905…9909 to the correct values.
• Assistant Control Panel: The Start-up Assistant walks you through this data entry
(see page 34).
• Basic Control Panel: Refer to "Parameters Mode" on page 32, for parameter
editing instructions.

Installation
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 27

Macros

Note! Selecting the appropriate macro should be part of the original system design,
since the control wiring installed depends on the macro used.

1. Review the macro descriptions in "Application Macros" on page 44. Use the macro
that best fits system needs.
2. Edit parameter 9902 to select the appropriate macro. Use either of the following:
• Use the Start-up Assistant, which displays the macro selection immediately after
motor parameter setup.
• Refer to "Parameters Mode" on page 32, for parameter editing instructions.
Tuning – Parameters
The system can benefit from one or more of the ACH550 special features, and/or
fine tuning.
1. Review the parameter descriptions in "Parameter Descriptions" starting on page 60.
Enable options and fine tune parameter values as appropriate for the system.
2. Edit parameters as appropriate.
Fault and Alarm Adjustments
The ACH550 can detect a wide variety of potential system problems. For example,
initial system operation may generate faults or alarms that indicate set-up problems.
1. Faults and alarms are reported on the control panel with a number. Note the number
reported.
2. Review the description provided for the reported fault/alarm:
• Use the fault and alarm listings on pages 244 and 250 respectively, or
• Press the help key (Assistant Control Panel only) while fault or alarm is displayed.
3. Adjust the system or parameters as appropriate.

Installation
28 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Start-Up

HVAC Control Panel Features

The ACH550 HVAC control panel (ACS-CP-B) features:

Status LED
(Green when normal,
if flashing or red,
see Diagnostics.)

UP
SOFT
SOFT KEY 2
KEY 1

DOWN

AUTO HELP (always available)

OFF HAND X0201

• Language selection for the display

• Drive connection that can be made or detached at any time
• Start-up assistant to facilitate drive commissioning
• Copy function for moving parameters to other ACH550 drives
• Backup function for saving parameter sets
• Context sensitive help
• Real-time clock

General Display Features

Soft Key Functions
The soft key functions are defined by text displayed just above each key.
Display Contrast
To adjust display contrast, simultaneously press and or , as
appropriate.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 29

Start-Up
Start-Up can be performed in two ways:
• Using the Start-Up Assistant.
• Changing the parameters individually.

Start-Up by Using the Start-Up Assistant

To start the Start-Up Assistant, follow these steps:
Select MENU to enter the main menu

Select ASSISTANTS with the Up/Down

buttons and select ENTER.
2

Scroll to COMMISSION DRIVE with the

Up/Down buttons.
3

Change the values suggested by the

assistant to your preferences and then
4 press SAVE after every change.

The Start-Up Assistant will guide you through the start-up.

Start-Up by Changing the Parameters Individually

To change the parameters, follow these steps:
Select MENU to enter the main menu.

Select the Parameters mode with the UP/

DOWN buttons and select ENTER to
select the Parameters mode.
2

Select the appropriate parameter group

with the UP/DOWN buttons and select
SEL
3

Start-Up
30 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Select the appropriate parameter in a

group with the UP/DOWN buttons.Select
4 EDIT to change the parameter value.

Press the UP/DOWN buttons to change

the parameter value.
5

Select SAVE to store the modified value or

select CANCEL to leave the set mode.
6 Any modifications not saved are
cancelled.

Select EXIT to return to the listing of

parameter groups, and again to return to
7 the main menu.

To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters, see

"Parameters Mode" in this section.
For detailed hardware description, see the "Technical Data" section.

Note! The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter.

Note! To view the default parameter value, press the UP/DOWN buttons
simultaneously.

Note! The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups
99 Start-up data, 10 Start/Stop/Dir, 11 Reference Select, 20 Limits, 21 Start/Stop, 22
Accel/Decel, 26 Motor Control and 30 Fault Functions.

Note! To restore the default factory settings, select the application macro HVAC
default.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 31

Modes
The HVAC control panel has several different modes for configuring, operating and
diagnosing the drive. The modes are:
• Standard display mode – Shows drive status information and operates the
drive.
• Parameters mode – Edits parameter values individually.
• Start-up assistant mode – Guides the start-up and configuration.
• Changed parameters mode – Shows changed parameters.
• Fault logger mode – Shows the drive fault history.
• Drive parameter backup mode – Stores or uploads the parameters.
• Clock set mode – Sets the time and date for the drive.
• I/O settings mode – Checks and edits the I/O settings.
• Alarm mode – Reporting mode triggered by drive alarms.

Standard Display Mode

Use the standard display mode to read information on the drive’s status and to
operate the drive. To reach the standard display mode, press EXIT until the LCD
display shows status information as described below.
Status Information
Top. The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.
• HAND – Indicates that the drive control is local, that is, from the control panel.
• AUTO – Indicates that the drive control is remote, such as the basic I/O (X1) or
fieldbus.
• – Indicates the drive and motor rotation status as follows:
Control panel display Significance
Rotating arrow (clockwise or • Drive is running and at setpoint
counterclockwise) • Shaft direction is forward or reverse
Rotating dotted arrow blinking Drive is running but not at setpoint
Stationary dotted arrow Start command is present, but motor is not
running. E.g. start enable is missing.

• Upper right – shows the active reference.

Middle. Using parameter group 34, the middle of the LCD
display can be configured to display:
• One to three parameter values – The default display shows
parameters 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ) in percentages, 0104
(CURRENT) in amperes and 0120 (AI1) in milliamperes.
– Use parameters 3401, 3408, and 3415 to select the parameters (from Group
01) to display. Entering “parameter” 0100 results in no parameter displayed.
For example, if 3401 = 0100 and 3415 = 0100, then only the parameter

Start-Up
32 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

specified by 3408 appears in the Control Panel display.

– You can also scale each parameter in the display, for example, to convert the
motor speed to a display of conveyor speed. Parameters 3402…3405 scale
the parameter specified by 3401, parameters 3409…3412 scale the parameter
specified by 3408, etc.
• A bar meter rather than one of the parameter values.
– Enable bar graph displays using parameters 3404, 3411
and 3418.
Bottom. The bottom of the LCD display shows:
• Lower corners – show the functions currently assigned to the two soft keys.
• Lower middle – displays the current time (if configured to show the time).
Operating the Drive
AUTO/HAND – The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in the auto control
(AUTO) mode, and is controlled from the Control terminal block X1.
To switch to hand control (HAND) and control the drive using the control panel, press
and hold the or button.
• Pressing the HAND button switches the drive to hand control while keeping the
drive running.
• Pressing the OFF button switches to hand control and stops the drive.
To switch back to auto control (AUTO), press and hold the button.
Hand/Auto/Off – To start the drive press the HAND or AUTO buttons, to stop the
drive press the OFF button.
Reference – To modify the reference (only possible if the display in the upper right
corner is in reverse video) press the UP or DOWN buttons (the reference changes
immediately).
The reference can be modified in the local control mode, and can be parameterized
(using Group 11 reference select) to also allow modification in the remote control
mode.

Note! The Start/Stop, Shaft direction and Reference functions are only valid in local
control (LOC) mode.

Parameters Mode
To change the parameters, follow these steps:
Select MENU to enter the main menu.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 33

Select the Parameters mode with the UP/

DOWN buttons, and select ENTER to
select the Parameters mode.
2

Select the appropriate parameter group

with the UP/DOWN buttons and select
SEL
3

Select the appropriate parameter in a

group with the UP/DOWN buttons. Select
EDIT to change the parameter.
4

Press the UP/DOWN buttons to change

the parameter value.
5

Select SAVE to store the modified value

or select CANCEL to leave the set mode.
• Any modifications not saved are
6
cancelled.
• Each individual parameter setting is
valid immediately after pressing SAVE.
Select EXIT to return to the listing of
parameter groups, and again to return to
7 the main menu.

To complete the control connections by manually entering the parameters, see

"Parameters Mode" in the this section.
For detailed hardware description, see the Appendix.

Note! The current parameter value appears below the highlighted parameter.

Note! To view the default parameter value, press the UP/DOWN buttons
simultaneously.

Note! The most typical and necessary parameters to change are parameter groups
99 Start-up data, 10 Start/Stop/Dir, 11 Reference Select, 20 Limits, 21 Start/Stop, 22
Accel/Decel, 26 Motor Control and 30 Fault Functions.

Start-Up
34 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Note! To restore the default factory settings, select the application macro HVAC
default.

Start-Up Assistant Mode

To start the Start-Up Assistant, follow these steps:
Select MENU to enter the main menu

Select ASSISTANTS with the Up/Down

buttons and select ENTER.
2

Scroll to COMMISSION DRIVE with the

Up/Down buttons and select SEL.
3

Change the values suggested by the

assistant to your preferences and then
press SAVE after every change.
4

The Start-Up Assistant will guide you through the start-up.

The Start-Up Assistant guides you through the basic programming of a new drive.
(You should familiarize yourself with basic control panel operation and follow the
steps outlined above.) At the first start, the drive automatically suggests entering the
first task, Language Select.The assistant also checks the values entered to prevent
entries that are out of range.
The Start-Up Assistant is divided into tasks. You may activate the tasks one after the
other, as the Start-Up Assistant suggests, or independently.

Note! If you want to set the parameters independently, use the Parameters mode.

The order of tasks presented by the Start-up Assistant depends on your entries. The
following task list is typical.
Task name Description
Spin the motor • Prompts for control panel display language selection.
• Prompts for motor data.
• Guides user through rotation check.
Commission drive Prompts for motor data.
Application Prompts for application macro selection.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 35

Task name Description

References 1 & 2 • Prompts for the source of speed references 1 and 2.
• Prompts for reference limits.
• Prompts for frequency (or speed) limits.
Start/Stop Control • Prompts for the source for start and stop commands.
• Prompts for start and stop mode definition.
• Prompts for acceleration and deceleration times.
Protections • Prompts for current and torque limits.
• Prompts for the use of Run enable and Start enable signals.
• Prompts for the use of emergency stop.
• Prompts for Fault function selection.
• Prompts for Auto reset functions selection.
Constant Speeds • Prompts for the use of constant speeds.
• Prompts for constant speed values.
PID Control • Prompts for PID settings.
• Prompts for the source of process reference.
• Prompts for reference limits.
• Prompts for source, limits and units for the process actual value.
• Defines the use of Sleep function.
Low Noise Setup • Prompts for switching frequency.
• Prompts for definition of Flux optimization.
• Prompts for the use of Critical speeds.
Panel Display Prompts for display variable and unit settings.
Timed Functions Prompts for the use of Timed functions.
Output • Prompts for the signals indicated through the relay outputs.
• Prompts for signals indicated through the analog outputs AO1 and AO2.
Sets the minimum, maximum, scaling and inversion values.

Changed Parameters Mode

To view (and edit) a listing of all parameters that have been changed from macro
default values, follow these steps:
Select MENU to enter the menu.

Select CHANGED PAR with the UP/

DOWN buttons and select ENTER.

A list of changed parameters is displayed.

Select EXIT to exit the parameters mode.
3

Start-Up
36 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Fault Logger Mode

Use the Fault Logger Mode to see drive fault history, fault state details and help for
the faults.
1. Select FAULT LOGGER in the Main Menu.
2. Press ENTER to see the latest faults (up to 10 faults, maximum).
3. Press DETAIL to see details for the selected fault.
• Details are available for the three latest faults.
4. Press DIAG to see the help description for the fault. See "Diagnostics" section.

Note! If a power off occurs, only the three latest faults will remain (with details only in
the first fault).

Drive Parameter Backup Mode

Use the parameter backup mode to export parameters from one drive to another.
The parameters are uploaded from a drive to the control panel and downloaded from
the control panel to another drive. Two options are available:
Par Backup Mode
The Assistant Control Panel can store a full set of drive parameters.
The Par Backup mode has these functions:
• Upload to Panel – Copies all parameters from the drive to the Control Panel.
This includes user sets of parameters (if defined) and internal parameters such as
those created by the Motor Id Run. The Control Panel memory is non-volatile and
does not depend on the panel’s battery. To upload parameters to control panel,
follow these steps:
Select MENU to enter the main
menu.
1

Select PAR BACKUP with the UP/

DOWN buttons and select ENTER.
2

Scroll to Upload to Panel and select

SEL.
3

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 37

The text “Copying parameters” and a

progress diagram is displayed.
4 Select ABORT if you want to stop
the process.

The text “Parameter upload

successful” is displayed and the
control panel returns to the PAR
BACKUP menu. Select EXIT to
return to the main menu. Now you
5 can disconnect the panel.

• Download Full Set – Restores the full parameter set from the Control Panel to
the drive. Use this option to restore a drive, or to configure identical drives. This
download does not include user sets of parameters.
Control
Upload Panel
Download
to panel all

X0202
IP2100 IP2100

To download all parameters to drive, follow these steps:

Select MENU to enter the menu.

Select PAR BACKUP with the UP/

DOWN buttons.
2

Scroll to Download to drive all and

select SEL.
3

The text “restoring parameters” is

displayed. Select ABORT if you want
4 to stop the process.

Start-Up
38 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

After the download stops, the

message “Parameter download
successful” is displayed and the
control panel goes back to PAR
BACKUP menu. Select EXIT to return
5 to the main menu.

Note! Download Full Set writes all parameters to the drive, including motor
parameters. Only use this function to restore a drive, or to transfer parameters to
systems that are identical to the original system.

• Download Application – Copies a partial parameter set from the Control Panel
to a drive. The partial set does not include internal motor parameters, parameters
9905…9909, 1605, 1607, 5201, nor any Group 51 and 53 parameters. Use this
option to transfer parameters to systems that use similar configurations – the
drive and motor sizes do not need to be the same.
Control
Panel
Upload Download
to panel application

X0202

IP2100 IP2101

To download application to drive, follow these steps:

Select MENU to enter the menu.

Select PAR BACKUP with the UP/

DOWN buttons.
2

Scroll to DOWNLOAD APPLICATION

and select SEL.
3

The text “Downloading parameters

(partial)” is displayed. Select ABORT
4 if you want to stop the process.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 39

The text “Parameter download

successful” is displayed and the
control panel returns to PAR BACKUP
menu. Select EXIT to return to the
main menu.
5

• Download User Set 1 - Copies USER S1 parameters (user sets are saved using
parameter 9902 APPLIC MACRO) from the Control Panel to the drive.
• Download User Set 2 - Copies USER S2 parameters from the Control Panel to the
drive.
Handling Inexact Downloads
In some situations, an exact copy of the download is not appropriate for the target
drive. Some examples:
• A download to an old drive specifies parameters/values that are not available on
the old drive.
• A download (from an old drive) to a new drive does not have definitions for the
new parameters – parameters that did not originally exist.
• A download can include an illegal value for the target drive, e.g. a backup from a
small drive can have a switching frequency of 12 kHz whereas a big drive can
only handle 8k Hz.
As a default, the control panel handles these situations by:
• Discarding parameters/values not available on
the target drive. LOC DIFFERENCES ----
VALUES UNDER MIN 3
• Using parameter default values when the VALUES OVER MAX 2
download provides no values or invalid values. INVALID VALUES 1
• Providing a Differences List – A listing of the EXTRA PARS 5
type and number of items that the target cannot MISSING VALUES 7
accept exactly as specified. READY SEL
You can either accept the default edits by pressing
READY, or view and edit each item as follows:
1. Highlight an item type in the Differences List (left screen below) and press SEL to
see the details for the selected type (right screen below).
LOC DIFFERENCES ---- LOC INVALID VAL
VALUES UNDER MIN 3 9902 APLIC MACRO
VALUES OVER MAX 2 2606*SWITCHING FREQ
INVALID VALUES 1 12 kHz
8 kHz
EXTRA PARS 5 3401*DISP 1 SEL
MISSING VALUES 7
READY SEL EXIT EDIT

Start-Up
40 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

In the above-right “details” screen:

• The first item that requires editing is automatically highlighted and includes
details: In general, the first item listed in the details is the value defined by the
backup file. The second item listed is the “default edit.”
• For tracking purposes, an asterisk initially appears by each item. As edits are
made, the asterisks disappear.
2. In the illustrated example, the backup specifies a switching frequency of 12 kHz, but
the target drive is limited to 8 kHz.
3. Press EDIT to edit the parameter. The display is the target drive’s standard edit
screen for the selected parameter.
4. Highlight the desired value for the target drive.
5. Press SAVE to save setting.
6. Press EXIT to step back to the differences view and continue for each remaining
exception.
7. When your editing is complete, press READY in the Differences List and then select
“Yes, save parameters.”
Download Failures
In some situations, the drive may be unable to accept a download. In those cases,
the control panel display is: “Parameter download failed” plus one of the following
causes:
• Set not found – You are attempting to download a data set that was not defined in
the backup. The remedy is to manually define the set, or upload the set from a
drive that has the desired set definitions.
• Par lock – The remedy is to unlock the parameter set (parameter 1602).
• Incompat drive/model – The remedy is to perform backups only between drives of
the same type (ACS/industrial or ACH/HVAC) and the same model (all ACH550).
• Too many differences – The remedy is to manually define a new set, or upload the
set from a drive that more closely resembles the target drive.

Note! If upload or download of parameters is aborted, the partial parameter set is not
implemented.

Clock Set Mode

The clock set mode is used for setting the time and date for the internal clock of the
ACH550. In order to use the timer functions of the ACH550, the internal clock has to
be set first. Date is used to determine weekdays and is visible in Fault logs.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 41

To set the clock, follow these steps:

Select MENU to enter the main menu.

Scroll to Clock Set with the UP/DOWN

buttons and select ENTER to enter the
Clock Set mode.
2

Scroll to Clock Visibility with the UP/

DOWN buttons and select SEL to change
the visibility of the clock.
3

Scroll to Show Clock with the UP/DOWN

buttons and select SEL to make the clock
visible.
4

Scroll to Set Time with the UP/DOWN

buttons and select SEL.
5

Change the hours and minutes with the

UP/DOWN buttons and select OK to save
the values. The active value is displayed
6 in inverted color.

Scroll to Time Format with the UP/DOWN

buttons and select SEL.
7

The different formats are displayed.

Select a format with the UP/DOWN
buttons and select SEL to confirm the
8 selection.

Scroll to Set Date with the UP/DOWN

buttons and select SEL.
9

Start-Up
42 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Change the days, months and year with

the UP/DOWN buttons and select OK to
save the values. The active value is
10 displayed in inverted color.

Scroll to Date Format with the UP/DOWN

buttons and select SEL.
11

The Date formats are displayed. Select a

date format with the UP/DOWN buttons
and select OK to confirm the selection.
12

Select EXIT twice to return to the main

menu.
13

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 43

I/O Settings Mode

To view and edit the I/O settings, follow these steps:
Select MENU to enter the main menu.

Scroll to I/O Settings with the UP/DOWN

buttons and select ENTER.
2

Scroll to the I/O setting you want to view

with the UP/DOWN buttons and select
SEL.
3

Select the setting you want to view with

the UP/DOWN buttons and select OK.
4

You can change the value with the UP/

DOWN buttons and save it by selecting
SAVE.
5
If you do not want to change the setting,
select CANCEL.

Select EXIT to return to the main menu.

Start-Up
44 ACH550 User’s Manual

Application Macros

Overview
Macros change a group of parameters to new, predefined values designed for
specific applications. Use macros to minimize the need for manual editing of
parameters. Selecting a macro sets all other parameters to their default values,
except:
• Group 99: Start-up Data parameters
• The PARAMETER LOCK 1602
• The PARAM SAVE 1607
• The COMM FAULT FUNC 3018 and COMM FAULT TIME 3019
• The COMM PROT SEL 9802
• Groups 50…53 serial communication parameters
• Group 29: Maintenance triggers
After selecting a macro, additional parameter changes can be made manually using
the control panel.
Application macros are enabled by setting the value for parameter 9902 APPLIC
MACRO. By default, HVAC default (value 1) is the enabled macro.

General Considerations
The following considerations apply for all macros:
• When using a direct speed reference in AUTO mode, connect the speed
reference to analog input 1 (AI1), and provide the START command using digital
input 1 (DI1). In HAND/OFF mode, the control panel provides the speed
reference and START command.
• When using process PID, connect the feedback signal to analog input 2 (AI2). As
a default, the control panel sets the Setpoint, but analog input 1 can be used as
an alternate source. You can set up process PID using parameters (Group 40) or
using the PID control assistant (recommended).

Application / Macro Listing

This section describes the following macros:
9902 9902
Macro Macro
Value Value
1 HVAC default 8 Internal timer
2 Supply fan 9 Internal timer with constant speeds
3 Return fan 10 Floating point
4 Cooling tower fan 11 Dual setpoint PID
5 Condenser 12 Dual setpoint PID with constant speeds
6 Booster pump 13 E-bypass
7 Pump alternation 14 Hand Control

Start-Up
ACH550 User’s Manual 45

Selecting an Application Macro

To select a macro, follow these steps:
Select MENU to enter the main menu.

Select ASSISTANTS with the Up/Down

buttons and select ENTER.
2

Scroll to APPLICATION and select

ENTER.
3

Select a macro with the Up/Down buttons

and select SAVE.
4

Restoring Defaults
To restore the factory default settings, select the application macro HVAC Default.

Control Wiring
Each macro has specific requirements for control wiring. For general details about
the ACH550 control wiring terminals, see “Control Terminal Descriptions” on
page 280. Specific wiring requirements are included with each macro description.

Start-Up
46 ACH550 User’s Manual

HVAC Default
This macro provides the factory default parameter settings for the ACH550-UH.
Factory defaults can be restored at any time by setting parameter 9902 to 1. The
diagram below shows typical wiring using this macro. When using direct speed
reference in AUTO mode or process PID, see "General Considerations" on page 44.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
+
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
ON

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2
9 AGND Analog output circuit common

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Not configured
15 DI3 Constant (Preset) speed 1 (P 1202)
16 DI4 Safety interlock: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Not configured
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Ready =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
None (Default macro)

Start-Up
ACH550 User’s Manual 47

Supply Fan
This macro configures for supply fan applications where the supply fan brings fresh
air in according to signals received from a transducer. When using direct speed
reference in AUTO mode or process PID, see "General Considerations" on page 44.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
+
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA ON
AI1: 0(4)…20 mA

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Constant (Preset) speed 1 (P 12021)
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Safety interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 2 (SUPPLYFAN) 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 4001 GAIN 0.7
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10.0 s
1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5) 4101 GAIN 1.0
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 15.0 s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
2203 DECELER TIME 1 15.0 s

Start-Up
48 ACH550 User’s Manual

Return Fan
This macro configures for return fan applications where the return fan removes air
according to signals received from a transducer. When using direct speed reference
in AUTO mode or process PID, see "General Considerations" on page 44.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
+
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA ON
AI1: 0(4)…20 mA

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Constant (Preset) speed 1 (P 12021)
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Safety interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 3 (RETURNFAN) 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 4001 GAIN 0.7
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10.0 s
1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5) 4101 GAIN 1.0
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 15.0 s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
2203 DECELER TIME 1 15.0 s

Start-Up
ACH550 User’s Manual 49

Cooling Tower Fan

This macro configures for cooling tower fan applications where the fan speed is
controlled according to the signals received from a transducer. When using direct
speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID, see "General Considerations" on
page 44.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA ON
AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
mA

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Constant (Preset) speed 1 (P 12021)
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Safety interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 4 (CLNGTWRFAN) 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 4101 GAIN 1.0
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5)

Start-Up
50 ACH550 User’s Manual

Condenser
This macro configures for condenser and liquid cooler applications where fan speed
is controlled according to signals received from a transducer. When using direct
speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID, see "General Considerations" on
page 44.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA ON
AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
mA

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Constant (Preset) speed 1 (P 12021)
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Safety interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 5 (CONDENSER) 2203 DECELER TIME 1 10.0 s
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 4005 ERROR VALUE INV 1 (YES)
1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5) 4101 GAIN 1.0
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 10.0 s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s

Start-Up
ACH550 User’s Manual 51

Booster Pump
This macro configures for booster pump applications where the pump speed is
controlled according to a signal received from a transducer. When using direct speed
reference in AUTO mode or process PID, see "General Considerations" on page 44.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
ON

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2
9 AGND

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Constant (Preset) speed 1 (P 12021)
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Safety interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 6 (BOOSTERPUMP) 2203 DECELER TIME 1 5.0 s
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 4001 GAIN 1.0
1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5) 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 5.0 s

Start-Up
52 ACH550 User’s Manual

Pump Alternation
This macro configures for pump alternation applications, usually used in booster
stations. To adjust/maintain pressure in the network, the speed of the one pump
changes according to a signal received from a pressure transducer. When the
variable speed pump reaches a maximum speed limit, auxiliary pumps start as
needed. When using process PID, see "General Considerations" on page 44. To use
more than one (the default) Auxiliary pump, see parameter group 81.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
ON

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2
9 AGND Analog output circuit common

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Not configured
16 DI4 PFA interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 PFA interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: PFA (starts lag pump)
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 7 (PUMPALTERN) 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5)
1105 REF1 MAX 62Hz/1860rpm 2208 EM DEC TIME 62HZ
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 0 (NOT SEL) 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 5.0 s
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 31 (PFA) 2203 DECELER TIME 1 5.0 s
1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX 62HZ 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN 0.0% 4101 GAIN 1.0
1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX 100.0% 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 8123 PFA ENABLE 1 (ACTIVE)
1608 START ENABLE 1 0 (NOT SEL)

Start-Up
ACH550 User’s Manual 53

Internal Timer
This macro configures for applications where a built-in timer starts and stops the
motor. When the variable speed pump reaches a maximum speed limit, auxiliary
pumps start as needed. When using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or
process PID, see "General Considerations" on page 44.
Momentarily activating digital input 3 (DI3) provides a boost function which operates
the motor. See group 36, Timer Functions, for more information on setting up timers.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
ON

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2
9 AGND Analog output circuit common

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Timer enable: Activate to start/stop drive from timer
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Timer override: Activate to start drive
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Safety interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 8 (INT TIMER) 1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5)
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 11 (TIMER1) 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 11 (TIMER1) 3601 TIMERS ENABLE 1 (DI1)
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 0 (NOT SEL) 3622 BOOST SEL 3 (DI3)
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 3626 TIMER 1 SRC 23 (B+P3+P2+P1)
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2)

Start-Up
54 ACH550 User’s Manual

Internal Timer with Constant Speeds / PRV

This macro configures for applications such as a timed powered roof ventilator
(PRV) which alternates between two constant speeds (constant speed 1 and 2)
based on a built-in timer.
Momentarily activating digital input 3 (DI3) provides a boost function which operates
the motor. See group 36, Timer Functions, for more information on setting up timers.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
5 AI2 Not configured
6 AGND Analog input circuit common
J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA ON
AI1: 0(4)…20 mA

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Timer enable: Activate to start/stop drive from timer
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Timer override: Activate to start drive
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Safety interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 9 (INT TIMER CS) 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN -200.0%
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 (NOT SEL) 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 200.0%
1103 REF1 SEL 0 (KEYPAD) 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 4 (%)
1106 REF3 SEL 2 (AI2) 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN -200.0%
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 15 (TIMER1) 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 200.0%
1301 MINIMUM AI1 0.0% 3622 BOOST SEL 3 (DI3)
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 4001 GAIN 1.0
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5) 4101 GAIN 1.0
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ) 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 0105 (TORQUE) 4110 SETPOINT SEL 1 (AI1)

Start-Up
ACH550 User’s Manual 55

Floating Point
This application macro is for applications where speed reference needs to be
controlled through digital inputs (DI5 & DI6). By activating digital input 5, the speed
reference increases, by activating digital input 6, the speed reference decreases. If
both digital inputs are active or inactive, the reference does not change.

Note! When constant speed 1 is activated using digital input 3 (DI3), the reference
speed is the value of parameter 1202. The value remains as the reference speed
when digital input 3 is deactivated.

X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)

2 AI1 Not configured
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
5 AI2 Not configured
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
ON

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2
9 AGND Analog output circuit common

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Constant (Preset) speed 1 (P 1202)1
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Reference up: Activate to increase reference
18 DI6 Reference down: Activate to decrease reference

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 10 (FLOATINGPNT) 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN -200.0%
1103 REF1 SEL 7 (DI5U, 6D) 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX 200.0%
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT 4 (%)
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN -200.0%
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ) 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX 200.0%
3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 0105 (TORQUE)

Start-Up
56 ACH550 User’s Manual

Dual Setpoint with PID

This macro configures for dual setpoint PID applications, where activating digital
input 3 (DI3) changes the process PID controller’s setpoint to another value. When
using direct speed reference in AUTO mode or process PID, see "General
Considerations" on page 44. Set process PID setpoints (internal to the drive) using
parameters 4011 (SET1) and 4111 (SET2).
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA ON
AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
mA

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Common for DI return signals.
12 DCOM Auxiliary voltage output common
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run permissive: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Setpoint selection: Activate to select Set2
16 DI4 Safety interlock 1: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1608)
17 DI5 Safety interlock 2: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1609)
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 11 (DUAL SETPNT) 4010 SETPOINT SEL 19 (INTERNAL)
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 0 (NOT SEL) 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 50.0%
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 3 (DI3)
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 4110 SETPOINT SEL 19 (INTERNAL)
1609 START ENABLE 2 5 (DI5) 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT 100.0%
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)

Start-Up
ACH550 User’s Manual 57

Dual Setpoint with PID and Constant Speeds

This macro configures for applications with 2 constant speeds, active PID and PID
alternating between two setpoints using digital inputs. Set PID setpoints (internal to
the drive) using parameters 4011 (SET1) and 4111 (SET2). The digital input DI3
selects the setpoints.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA ON
AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
mA

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Presets/PID selection: Activate to select PID
15 DI3 Setpoint selection: Activate to select Set2
16 DI4 Preset speed 1
17 DI5 Preset speed 2
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 12 (DUAL SPNTCS) 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 2 (DI2) 4001 GAIN 0.7
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 11 (DI5, 6) 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 10.0 s
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 4010 SETPOINT SEL 19 (INTERNAL)
1608 START ENABLE 1 0 (NOT SEL) 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT 50.0%
2108 START INHIBIT 1 (ON) 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET 3 (DI3)
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 10.0 s 4101 GAIN 0.7
2203 DECELER TIME 1 10.0 s 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 10.0 s
3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0 (DISABLE) 4110 SETPOINT SEL 19 (INTERNAL)
3107 AR AI<MIN 0 (DISABLE) 4111 INTERNAL SETPNT 100.0%

Start-Up
58 ACH550 User’s Manual

E-bypass
This macro configures for an Electronic Bypass device which can bypass the drive
and connect the motor direct on-line. When using direct speed reference in AUTO
mode or process PID, see "General Considerations" on page 44.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 External reference 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
+
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
+ 5 AI2 PID feedback: 0(2)…10 V or 0(4)…20 mA
6 AGND Analog input circuit common J1 Jumper Settings
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA AI1: 0(4)…20 mA
ON

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2
9 AGND

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Start/Stop: Activate to start drive
14 DI2 Run enable: Deactivate to stop drive (P 1601)
15 DI3 Not configured
16 DI4 Not configured
17 DI5 Not configured
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 13 (E-BYPASS) 1608 START ENABLE 1 0 (NOT SEL)
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 0 (NOT SEL) 2108 START INHIBIT 1 (ON)
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ)
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2)

Start-Up
ACH550 User’s Manual 59

Hand Control
This macro configures for drive control using only the control panel with no
automated control. Typically, this is a temporary configuration used prior to control
wiring.
X1 1 SCR Signal cable shield (screen)
2 AI1 Not configured
3 AGND Analog input circuit common
4 10V Reference voltage 10 VDC
5 AI2 Not configured
6 AGND Analog input circuit common
mA 7 AO1 Output frequency: 0(4)…20 mA J1 Jumper Settings
ON
AI1: 0(4)…20 mA

ON ON
mA 8 AO2 Output current: 0(4)…20 mA
9 AGND Analog output circuit common AI2: 0(4)…20 mA 1 2

10 24V Auxiliary voltage output +24 VDC

11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common
12 DCOM Digital input common for all
13 DI1 Not configured
14 DI2 Not configured
15 DI3 Not configured
16 DI4 Not configured
17 DI5 Not configured
18 DI6 Not configured

19 RO1C Relay output 1 (P 1401)

20 RO1A Default operation: Started =>19 connected to 21
21 RO1B
22 RO2C Relay output 2 (P 1402)
23 RO2A Default operation: Running =>22 connected to 24
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3 (P 1403)
26 RO3A Default operation: Fault (-1) =>25 connected to 27
27 RO3B (Fault => 25 connected to 26)

Parameters Changed Relative to HVAC Default

Parameter Value Parameter Value
9902 APPLIC MACRO 14 (HAND CONTROL) 3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100 (NOT SEL)
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0 (NOT SEL) 3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN (-)
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0 (NOT SEL) 3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX (-)
1106 REF3 SEL 2 (AI2) 3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM (-)
1201 CONST SPEED SEL 0 (NOT SEL) 3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT (-)
1301 MINIMUM AI1 0.0% 3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN (-)
1304 MINIMUM AI2 0.0% 3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX (-)
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 7 (STARTED) 4001 GAIN 1.0
1504 MINIMUM AO1 0.0mA 4002 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0.0mA 4010 SETPOINT SEL 1 (AI1)
1601 RUN ENABLE 2 (DI2) 4101 GAIN 1.0
1608 START ENABLE 1 0 (NOT SEL) 4102 INTEGRATION TIME 60.0 s
2108 START INHIBIT 1 (ON) 4110 SETPOINT SEL 1 (AI1)
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 0103 (OUTPUT FREQ) 4210 SETPOINT SEL 1 (AI1)

Start-Up
60 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Parameter Descriptions
Parameter data is specific to ACH550 firmware version 1.51.

Group 99: Start-up Data

This group defines special Start-up data required to:
• Set up the drive.
• Enter motor information

Note! Parameters checked under the heading “S” can be modified only when the
drive is stopped.

Group 99: Start-up Data

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
9901 LANGUAGE 0…13 1 0
Selects the display language.
0 = ENGLISH 1 = ENGLISH (AM) 2 = DEUTSCH 3 = ITALIANO 4 = ESPAÑOL
5 = PORTUGUES 6 = NEDERLANDS 7 = FRANCAIS 8 = DANSK 9 = SUOMI
10 = SVENSKA 11 = RUSSKI 12 = POLSKI 13 = TÜRKCE

9902 APPLIC MACRO 1…14 1 1

Selects an application macro. Application macros automatically edit parameters to configure the ACH550 for a
particular application. See "Application Macros" for application macro descriptions.
1 = HVAC DEFAULT
2 = SUPPLY FAN
3 = RETURN FAN
4 = COOLING TOWER FAN
5 = CONDENSER
6 = BOOSTER PUMP
7 = PUMP ALTERNATION
8 = INTERNAL TIMER
9 = INTERNAL TIMER WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS
10 = FLOATING POINT
11 = DUAL SETPOINT PID
12 = DUAL SETPOINT PID WITH CONSTANT SPEEDS
13 = E -BYPASS
14 = HAND CONTROL
9904 MOTOR CTRL MOD 1, 3 1 3
Selects the motor control mode.
1 = VECTOR: sPEED – sensorless vector control mode.
• Reference 1 is speed reference in rpm.
• Reference 2 is speed reference in % (100% is absolute maximum speed, equal to the value of parameter 2002
MAXIMUM SPEED, or 2001 MINIMUM SPEED if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater than the maximum
speed).
3 = SCALAR: FREQ – scalar control mode.
• Reference 1 is frequency reference in Hz.
• Reference 2 is frequency reference in % (100% is absolute maximum frequency, equal to the value of parameter
2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY, or 2007 MINIMUM FREQUENCY if the absolute value of the minimum speed is greater
than the maximum speed).

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 61

Group 99: Start-up Data

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT 115…345 V (200 V, US) 1V 230 V
230…690 V (400 V, US) 1V 460 V
288…862 V (600 V, US) 1V 575 V
Defines the nominal motor voltage. Output voltage
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
• Sets the maximum drive output voltage supplied to the motor. P 9905
• The ACH550 cannot supply the motor with a voltage greater than the
mains voltage.
Output
frequency
P 9907
9906 MOTOR NOM CURR 0.15*I2N…1.5*I2N 0.1 A 1.5*I2N
Defines the nominal motor current.
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
• Range allowed: (0.2…2.0) · IN (where IN is drive current).
9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ 10.0…500 Hz 0.1 Hz 60 Hz (US)
Defines the nominal motor frequency.
• Range: 10…500 Hz (typically 50 or 60 Hz)
• Sets the frequency at which output voltage equals the MOTOR NOM VOLT.
• Field weakening point = Norm freq * Supply Volt / Mot Nom Volt
9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED 50…30000 rpm 1 rpm Size dependent
Defines the nominal motor speed.
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
9909 MOTOR NOM POWER 0.15…1.5*PN 0.1 Hp 0.2 HP (US)
Defines the nominal motor power.
• Must equal the value on the motor rating plate.
9910 MOTOR ID RUN 0, 1 1 0
This parameter controls a self-calibration process called the To perform a Motor Id Run:
Motor ID Run. During this process, the drive operates the 1. De-couple load from motor (or otherwise reduce
motor and makes measurements in order to identify motor load to near zero).
characteristics and create a model used for internal 2. Verify that motor operation is safe:
calculations. An ID Run is especially effective when: • The run automatically operates the motor in the
• Operation point is near zero speed. forward direction – confirm that forward rotation is
• Operation requires a torque range above the motor safe.
nominal torque, over a wide speed range, and without any • The run automatically operates the motor at
measured speed feedback (i.e. without a pulse encoder). 50…80% of nominal speed – confirm that operation
First Start. If no Motor ID Run is performed, the drive at these speeds is safe.
estimates motor characteristics when the drive is first run. 3. Check following parameters (if changed from factory
This “First Start” occurs automatically* at the next run settings):
command after any motor parameter is changed. In order to • 2001 MINIMUM SPEED < 0
estimate characteristics and create a motor model, the First • 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED > 80% of motor rated speed.
Start magnetizes the motor for 10 to 15 seconds at zero • 2003 MAX CURRENT > 130% of I2N value.
speed. • The maximum torque (parameters 2014, 2017 and/
* Activating the “First Start” does require that: or 2018) > 50%.
• 9904 = 1 (VECTOR: SPEED), or 9904 = 3 (SCALAR: SPEED) 4. At the Control Panel, select:
and • Select Parameters
• 2101 = 3 (SCALAR FLYSTART) or 5 (FLYSTART + TORQ • Select Group 99
BOOST).
• Select Parameter 9910
Note: If you change motor parameters after running a Motor
ID Run, repeat the Motor ID Run.
0 = NO ID RUN – Motor ID Run process is not running.
1 = ID RUN – Enables a Motor ID Run at the next start
command. After run completion, this value automatically
changes to 0.

Start-Up
62 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 01: Operating Data

This group contains drive operating data, including actual signals. The drive sets the
values for actual signals, based on measurements or calculations. You cannot set
these values.
Group 01: Operating Data
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0102 SPEED 0…30000 rpm 1 rpm -
The calculated speed of the motor (rpm).
0103 OUTPUT FREQ 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz -
The frequency (Hz) applied to the motor. (Also shown by default in OUTPUT display.)
0104 CURRENT 0.0…1.5*I2N 0.1 A -
The motor current, as measured by the ACH550. (Also shown by default in OUTPUT display.)
0105 TORQUE -200%…200% 0.1% -
Output torque. Calculated value of torque on motor shaft in % of motor nominal torque.
0106 POWER -1.5…1.5*PN 0.1 kW -
The measured motor power in kW.
0107 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0 V…2.5*VdN 1V -
The DC bus voltage in VDC, as measured by the ACH550.
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0 V…2.0*VdN 1V -
The voltage applied to the motor.
0110 DRIVE TEMP 0 °C…150 °C 0.1 °C -
The temperature of the drive power transistors in Centigrade.
0111 EXTERNAL REF 1 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / -
0…500 Hz 0.1 Hz
External reference, REF1, in rpm or Hz – units determined by parameter 9904.
0112 EXTERNAL REF 2 0%…100% 0.1% -
(torque: 0%…600%)
External reference, REF2, in %.
0113 CTRL LOCATION 0…2 1 -
Active control location. Alternatives are:
0 = HAND
1 = EXT1
2 = EXT2
0114 RUN TIME (R) 0…9999 h 1h 0h
The drive’s accumulated running time in hours (h).
• Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode.
0115 KWH COUNTER (R) 0…9999 kWh 1 kWh -
The drive’s accumulated power consumption in kilowatt hours.
• Can be reset by pressing UP and DOWN buttons simultaneously when in parameter set mode.
0116 APPL BLK OUTPUT 0…100% 0.1% -
(torque: 0…600%)
Application block output signal. Value is from either:
• PFA control, if PFA Control is active, or
• Parameter 0112 EXTERNAL REF 2.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 63

Group 01: Operating Data

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0118 DI1-3 STATUS 000…111 1 -
(0…7 decimal)
Status of the three digital inputs.
• Status is displayed as a binary number.
• 1 indicates that the input is activated.
• 0 indicates that the input is deactivated.
DI 1 DI 2 DI 3
0119 DI4-6 STATUS 000…111 1 -
(0…7 decimal)
Status of the three digital inputs.
• See parameter 0118 DI1-3 STATUS.
0120 AI1 0…100% 0.1% -
Relative value of analog input 1 in %.
0121 AI2 0…100% 0.1% -
The relative value of analog input 2 in %.
0122 RO1-3 STATUS 0…111 1 -
(0…7 decimal)
Status of the three relay outputs.
• 1 indicates that the relay is energized.
• 0 indicates that the relay is de-energized.

RELAY 1 STATUS
RELAY 2 STATUS
RELAY 3 STATUS

0123 RO4-6 STATUS 0…111 1 -

(0…7decimal)
Status of the three relay outputs. See parameter 0122.
0124 AO1 0…20 mA 0.1 mA -
The analog output 1 value in milliamperes.
0125 AO2 0…20 mA 0.1 mA -
The analog output 2 value in milliamperes.
0126 PID 1 OUTPPUT -1000…1000% 0.1% -
The PID Controller 1 output value in %.
0127 PID 2 OUTPUT -100…100% 0.1% -
The PID Controller 2 output value in %.
0128 PID 1 SETPNT - - -

The PID 1 controller setpoint signal.

• Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006/4106 & 4007/4107.
0129 PID 2 SETPNT - - -
The PID 2 controller setpoint signal.
• Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 & 4207.
0130 PID 1 FBK - - -
The PID 1 controller feedback signal.
• Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006/4106 & 4007/4107.

Start-Up
64 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 01: Operating Data

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0131 PID 2 FBK - - -
The PID 2 controller feedback signal.
• Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 & 4207.
0132 PID 1 DEVIATION - - -
The difference between the PID 1 controller reference value and actual value.
• Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4006/4106 & 4007/4107.
0133 PID 2 DEVIATION - - -
The difference between the PID 2 controller reference value and actual value.
• Units and scale defined by PID parameters 4206 & 4207.
0134 COMM RO WORD 0…65535 1 0
Free data location that can be written from serial link.
• Used for relay output control.
• See parameter 1401.
0135 COMM VALUE 1 -32768…+32767 1 0
Free data location that can be written from serial link.
0136 COMM VALUE 2 -32768…+32767 1 0
Free data location that can be written from serial link.
0137 PROCESS VAR 1 - 1
Process variable 1
• Defined by parameters in Group 34: Panel Display / Process Variables.
0138 PROCESS VAR 2 - 1
Process variable 2
• Defined by parameters in Group 34: Panel Display / Process Variables.
0139 PROCESS VAR 3 - 1
Process variable 3
• Defined by parameters in Group 34: Panel Display / Process Variables.
0140 RUN TIME 0…499.99 kh 0.01 kh 0 kh
The drive’s accumulated running time in thousands of hours (kh).
0141 MWH COUNTER 0…9999 MWh 1 MWh -
The drive’s accumulated power consumption in megawatt hours. Can not be reset.
0142 REVOLUTION CNTR 0…9999 1 0
The motor’s accumulated revolutions in millions of revolutions.
0143 DRIVE ON TIME (HI) 0…65535 days 1 day 0
The drive’s accumulated power on time in days.
0144 DRIVE ON TIME (LO) 0…43200hh:mm:ss 2s 0
The drive’s accumulated power on time in 2 second ticks (30 ticks = 60 seconds).
0145 MOTOR TEMP -10...200 °C/ 1 0
0...5000 Ohm /
0…1
Motor temperature in degrees centigrade / PTC resistance in Ohms.
• Applies only if motor temperature sensor is set up. See parameter 3501.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 65

Group 01: Operating Data

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0146 MECH ANGLE 0…32767 1 (~0.01° ) 0
Defines the motor shaft’s angular position to about 0.01° (32,768 divisions for 360°). The position is defined as 0 at
power up.
During operation the zero position can be set by:
• A Z-pulse input, if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = 1 (ENABLE)
• Parameter 5011 POSITION RESET, if parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = 2 (DISABLE)
• Any status change of parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE
0147 MECH REVS -32767…32767 1 0
A signed integer that counts full revolutions of the motor shaft. The value:
• Increments when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 32767 to 0
• Decrements when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE changes from 0 to 32767
0148 Z PLS DETECTED 0, 1 1 0
When a Z-pulse defines the zero position, the shaft must pass through the zero position to trigger a Z-pulse. Until
then, the shaft position is unknown (the drive uses the shaft position at power up as zero). This parameter signals
when parameter 0146 MECH ANGLE is valid. This parameter starts at zero on power-up and changes to 1 only if:
• Parameter 5010 Z PLS ENABLE = ENABLE and
• An encoder Z-pulse has been detected.
0150 CB TEMP -20.0...150.0°C 1 -
The temperature of the drive control board in degrees C.
Note! Some ACH550 drives have a control board that does not support this feature.
These drives always show a fixed value of 25.0 degree C.

Start-Up
66 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 03: Actual Signals

This group monitors fieldbus communications.
Group 03: Actual Signals
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0301 FB CMD WORD 1 - - -
Read-only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 1.
• The fieldbus command is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus controller. The command
consists of two Command Words. Bit-coded instructions in the Command Words switch the drive between states.
• To control the drive, using the Command Words, an external location (EXT1 or EXT2) must be active and set to
COMM. (See parameters 1001 and 1002.)
• The control panel displays the word in hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays as 0001. All zeros and
a 1 in BIt 15 displays as 8000

Bit # 0301, FB CMD WORD 1 0302, FB CMD WORD 2

0 STOP FBLOCAL_CTL
1 START FBLOCAL_REF
2 REVERSE START_DISABLE1
3 LOCAL START_DISABLE2
4 RESET Reserved
5 EXT2 Reserved
6 RUN_DISABLE Reserved
7 STPMODE_R Reserved
8 STPMODE_EM Reserved
9 STPMODE_C Reserved
10 RAMP_2 Reserved
11 RAMP_OUT_0 REF_CONST
12 RAMP_HOLD REF_AVE
13 RAMP_IN_0 LINK_ON
14 RREQ_LOCALLOC REQ_STARTINH
15 TORQLIM2 OFF_INTERLOCK

0302 FB CMD WORD 2 - - -

Read-only copy of the Fieldbus Command Word 2.
• See parameter 0301.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 67

Group 03: Actual Signals

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0303 FB STS WORD 1 - 1 - hex
Read-only copy of the Status Word 1.
• The drive sends status information to the fieldbus controller. The status consists of two Status Words.
Bit # 0303, STS CMD WORD 1 0304, FB STS WORD 2
0 READY ALARM
1 ENABLED REQ_MAINT
2 STARTED DIRLOCK
3 RUNNING LOCALLOCK
4 ZERO_SPEED CTL_MODE
5 ACCELERATE Reserved
6 DECELERATE Reserved
7 AT_SETPOINT Reserved
8 LIMIT Reserved
9 SUPERVISION Reserved
10 REV_REF REQ_CTL
11 REV_ACT REQ_REF1
12 PANEL_LOCAL REQ_REF2
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL REQ_REF2EXT
14 EXT2_ACT ACK_STARTINH
15 FAULT ACK_OFF_ILCK

0304 FB STS WORD 2 - 1 - hex

Read-only copy of the Status Word 2.
• See parameter 0303.

Start-Up
68 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 03: Actual Signals

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0305 FAULT WORD 1 - 1 0000 hex
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 1.
• When a fault is active, the corresponding bit for the active fault is set in the Fault Words.
• Each fault has a dedicated bit allocated within Fault Words.
• See "Fault Listing" in section "Diagnostics" for a description of the faults.
• The control panel displays the word in hex. For example, all zeros and a 1 in Bit 0 displays a 0001. All zeros and a
1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.
Bit # 0305,FAULT WORD 1 0306, FAULT WORD 2 0307, FAULT WORD 3
0 OVERCURRENT UNDERLOAD EFB 1
1 DC OVERVOLT THERM FAIL EFB 2
2 DEV OVERTEMP OPEX LINK EFB 3
3 SHORT CIRC OPEX PWR Incompatible software type
4 Reserved CURR MEAS Reserved
5 DC UNDERVOLT SUPPLY PHASE Reserved
6 AI1 LOSS ENCODER ERROR Reserved
7 AI2 LOSS OVERSPEED Reserved
8 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved Reserved
9 PANEL LOSS DRIVE ID Reserved
10 ID RUN FAIL CONFIG FILE System Error
11 MOTOR STALL SERIAL 1 ERR System Error
12 Reserved EFB CON FILE System Error
13 EXT FLT 1 FORCE TRIP System Error
14 EXT FLT 2 MOTOR PHASE Hardware Error
15 EARTH FAULT OUTPUT WIRING Param. Setting Fault

0306 FAULT WORD 2 - 1 0000 hex

Read-only copy of the Fault Word 2.
• See parameter 0305.
0307 FAULT WORD 3 - 1 0000 hex
Read-only copy of the Fault Word 3.
• See parameter 0305.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 69

Group 03: Actual Signals

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0308 ALARM WORD 1 - 1 0000 hex
Read-only copy of the ALARM WORD 1.
• When a fault is active, the Bit # 0308, ALARM WORD 1 0309, ALARM WORD 2
corresponding bit for the active fault
is set in the Fault Words. 0 OVERCURRENT Reserved
• Each fault has a dedicated bit 1 OVERVOLTAGE PID SLEEP
allocated within Fault Words.
2 UNDERVOLTAGE ID RUN
• Bits remain set until the whole alarm
word is reset. (Reset by writing zero 3 DIRLOCK Reserved
to the word). 4 I/O COMM START ENABLE 1 MISSING
• The control panel displays the word
in hex. For example, all zeros and a 5 AI1 LOSS START ENABLE 2 MISSING
1 in Bit 0 displays a 0001. All zeros 6 AI2 LOSS EMERGENCY STOP
and a 1 in Bit 15 displays as 8000.
7 PANEL LOSS ENCODER ERROR
8 DEVICE OVERTEMP FIRST START
9 MOT OVERTEMP Reserved
10 UNDERLOAD Reserved
11 MOTOR STALL Reserved
12 AUTORESET Reserved
13 PFA AUTOCHANGE Reserved
14 PFC INTERLOCK Reserved
15 Reserved Reserved

0309 ALARM WORD 2 - 1 0000 hex

Read-only copy of the ALARM WORD 3.
• See parameter 0308.

Start-Up
70 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 04: Fault History

This group stores a recent history of the faults reported by the drive.
Group 04: Fault History
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0401 LAST FAULT Fault code text 1 0
0 = Clear the fault history (on panel = NO RECORD).
n = Fault code of the last recorded fault.
0402 FAULT TIME 1 Date dd.mm.yy / 1 0
power-on days
The day on which the last fault occurred. Either as:
• A date – if real time clock is operating.
• The number of days after power on – if real time clock is not used, or was not set.
0403 FAULT TIME 2 Time hh:mm:ss 2s 0
The time at which the last fault occurred. Either as:
• Real time, in format hh:mm:ss – if real time clock is operating.
• The time since power on (less the whole days reported in 0402), in format hh:mm:ss – if real time clock is not
used, or was not set.
0404 SPEED AT FLT - 1 rpm 0
The motor speed (rpm) at the time the last fault occurred.
0405 FREQ AT FLT - 0.1 Hz 0.0
The frequency (Hz) at the time the last fault occurred.
0406 VOLTAGE AT FLT - 0.1 V 0.0
The DC bus voltage (V) at the time the last fault occurred.
0407 CURRENT AT FLT - 0.1 A 0.0
The motor current (A) at the time the last fault occurred.
0408 TORQUE AT FLT - 0.1% 0.0
The motor torque (%) at the time the last fault occurred.
0409 STATUS AT FLT - 1 0000 hex
The drive status (hex code word) at the time the last fault occurred.
0410 DI 1-3 AT FLT 000…111 1 000 bin
(0…7 decimal)
The status of digital inputs 1…3 at the time the last fault occurred.
0411 DI 4-6 AT FLT 000…111 1 000 bin
(0…7 decimal)
The status of digital inputs 4…6 at the time the last fault occurred.
0412 PREVIOUS FAULT 1 Fault code text 1 0
Fault code of the second last fault. Read-only.
0413 PREVIOUS FAULT 2 Fault code text 1 0
Fault code of the third last fault. Read-only.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 71

Group 10: Start/Stop/Dir

This group:
• Defines external sources (EXT1, and EXT2) for commands that enable start, stop
and direction changes.
• Locks direction or enables direction control. To select between the two external
locations use the next group, parameter 1102.
Group 10: AcStart/Stop/Dir
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1001 EXT1 COMMANDS 0…14 1 1
Defines external control location 1 (EXT1) – the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.
0 = NOT SEL – No external start, stop and direction command source.
1 = DI1 – Two-wire Start/Stop.
• Start/Stop is through digital input DI1 (DI1 activated = Start; DI1 de-activated = Stop).
• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (request) is the same as 1003 = 1 (fwd).
2 = DI1, 2 – Two-wire Start/Stop, Direction.
• Start/Stop is through digital input DI1 (DI1 activated = Start; DI1 de-activated = Stop).
• Direction control (requires parameter 1003 = 3 (request)) is through digital input DI2 (DI2 activated = Reverse;
de-activated = Forward).
3 = DI1P, 2P – Three-wire Start/Stop.
• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons (the P stands for “pulse”).
• Start is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI1. In order to start the drive, the digital
input DI2 must be activated prior the pulse in DI1.
• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input DI2.
• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FWD).
4 = DI1P, 2P, 3 – Three-wire Start/Stop, Direction.
• Start/Stop commands are through momentary push-buttons, as described for DI1P, 2P.
• Direction control (requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)) is through digital input DI3
(DI3 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).
5 = DI1P, 2P, 3P – Start Forward, Start Reverse, and Stop.
• Start and Direction commands are given simultaneously with two separate momentary push-buttons (the P
stands for “pulse”).
• Start Forward command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI1. In order to start
the drive, the digital input DI3 must be activated during the pulse in DI1.
• Start Reverse command is through a normally open push-button connected to digital input DI2. In order to start
the drive, the digital input DI3 must be activated prior the pulse in DI2.
• Connect multiple Start push-buttons in parallel.
• Stop is through a normally closed push-button connected to digital input DI3.
• Connect multiple Stop push-buttons in series.
• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
6 = DI6 – Two-wire Start/Stop.
• Start/Stop is through digital input DI6 (DI6 activated = Start; DI6 de-activated = Stop).
• Parameter 1003 defines the direction. Selecting 1003 = 3 (REQUEST) is the same as 1003 = 1 (FWD).
7 = DI6, 5 – Two-wire Start/Stop/Direction.
• Start/Stop is through digital input DI6 (DI6 activated = Start; DI6 de-activated = Stop).
• Direction control (requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST)) is through digital input DI5.
(DI5 activated = Reverse; de-activated = Forward).
8 = KEYPAD – Control Panel.
• Start/Stop and Direction commands are through the control panel when EXT1 is active.
• Direction control requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).
9 = DI1F, 2R – Start/Stop/Direction commands through DI1 and DI2 combinations.
• Start forward = DI1 activated and DI2 de-activated.
• Start reverse = DI1 de-activated and DI2 activated.
• Stop = both DI1 and DI2 activated, or both de-activated.
• Requires parameter 1003 = 3 (REQUEST).

Start-Up
72 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 10: AcStart/Stop/Dir

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
10 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start/stop and direction commands.
• Bits 0,1, 2 of Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the start/stop and direction commands.
• See Fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
11 = TIMER 1. – Assigns Start/Stop control to Timer 1 (Timer activated = START; Timer de-activated = STOP). See
Group 36, Timer Functions.
12…14 = TIMER 2… 4 – Assigns Start/Stop control to Timer 2…4. See Timer Function 1 above.
1002 EXT2 COMMANDS 0…14 1 1
Defines external control location 2 (EXT2) – the configuration of start, stop and direction commands.
• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS above.
1003 DIRECTION 1…3 1 1
Defines the control of motor rotation direction.
1 = FORWARD – Rotation is fixed in the forward direction.
2 = REVERSE – Rotation is fixed in the reverse direction.
3 = REQUEST – Rotation direction can be changed on command.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 73

Group 11: Reference Select

This group defines:
• How the drive selects between command sources.
• Characteristics and sources for REF1 and REF2.
Panel REF1
REF1 P1101
Panel REF 2 P1106 REF1 PANEL
PID 1 OUT 0…17 P1107 Hand/Auto
REF2 Selection
REF 2 19 P1108
HAND
Panel REF 1 AUTO
DI P1103 P1102
P1104
AI P1105 EXT 1
EXT2
EXT 2
Panel Ref 2
P1106 G12 P1106
DI Const 0…17 P1107
Speed
AI P1108
EXT2 19

Group 11: Reference Select

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1101 KEYPAD REF SEL 1…2 1 1
Selects the reference controlled in local control mode.
1 = REF1 (Hz/rpm) – Reference type depends on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.
• Speed reference (rpm) if 9904 = 1 (VECTOR: SPEED).
• Frequency reference (Hz) if 9904 = 3 (SCALAR; FREQ).
2 = REF2 (%)
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL -6…12 1 0
Defines the source for selecting between the two external control locations EXT1 or EXT2. Thus, defines the source
for Start/Stop/Direction commands and reference signals.
0 = EXT1 – Selects external control location 1 (EXT1).
• See parameter 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS for EXT1’s Start/Stop/Dir definitions.
• See parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT for EXT1’s reference definitions.
1 = DI1 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = EXT2; DI1 de-activated = EXT1).
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input. See DI1 above.
7 = EXT2 – Selects external control location 2 (EXT2).
• See parameter 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS for EXT2’s Start/Stop/Dir definitions.
• See parameter 1106 REF2 SELECT for EXT2’s reference definitions.
8 = COMM – Assigns control of the drive via external control location EXT1 or EXT2 based on the fieldbus control
word.
• Bit 5 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) defines the active external control location (EXT1 or EXT2).
• See Fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
9 = TIMER 1 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timer (Timer activated = EXT2; Timer de-
activated = EXT1). See Group 36, Timer Functions.
10…12 = TIMER 2… 4 – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the Timer. See Timer 1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of DI1 (DI1 activated = EXT1; DI1 de-activated =
EXT2).
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Assigns control to EXT1 or EXT2 based on the state of the selected digital input. See
DI1(INV) above.

Start-Up
74 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 11: Reference Select

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1103 REF1 SELECT 0…17 1 1
Selects the signal source for external reference REF1.
0 = KEYPAD – Defines the control panel as the reference source.
1 = AI1 – Defines analog input 1 (AI1) as the reference source.
2 = AI2 – Defines analog input 2 (AI2) as the reference source.
3 = AI1/JOYST – Defines analog input 1 (AI1), configured for joystick operation, as the reference source.
• The minimum input signal runs the drive at the maximum reference in the reverse direction. Define the minimum
using parameter 1104.
• The maximum input signal runs the drive at maximum EXT REF 1 MAX
reference in the forward direction. Define the maximum
using parameter 1105.
• Requires parameter 1003=3 (request). EXT REF 1 MIN
Warning! Because the low end of the reference range
commands full reverse operation, do not use 0 V as
the lower end of the reference range. Doing so means - EXT REF 1 MIN
that if the control signal is lost (which is a 0 V input) 10 V /
the result is full reverse operation. Instead, use the 20 mA
following set-up so that loss of the analog input - EXT REF 1 MAX
triggers a fault, stopping the drive: 2 V / 4 mA
• Set parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 (1304 MINIMUM AI2) at 0 V / 0 mA
20% (2 V or 4 mA). EXT REF 1 MIN
-2 % +2 %
• Set parameter 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT to a value 5% or
higher. - EXT REF 1 MIN
• Set parameter 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION to 1 (FAULT). Hysteresis 4 % of Full Scale
4 = AI2/JOYST – Defines analog input 2 (AI2), configured for joystick operation, as the reference source.
• See above (AI1/JOYST) description.
5 = DI3U,4D(R) – Defines digital inputs as the speed reference source (motor potentiometer control).
• Digital input DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”).
• Digital input DI4 decreases the speed (the D stands for “down”).
• A Stop command resets the reference to zero (the R stands for “reset”).
• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate of change.
6 = DI3U,4D – Same as above (DI3U,4D(R)), except:
• A Stop command does not reset the reference to zero. The reference is stored.
• When the drive restarts, the motor ramps up (at the selected acceleration rate) to the stored reference.
7 = DI5U,6D – Same as above (DI3U,4D), except that DI5 and DI6 are the digital inputs used.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as the reference source.
9 = COMM+AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog Input
Reference Correction below.
10 = COMM*AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog Input
Reference Correction below.
11 = DI3U, 4D(RNC) – Same as DI3U,4D(R) above, except that:
• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to REM) does not copy the reference.
12 = DI3U,4D(NC) – Same as DI3U,4D above, except that:
• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to REM) does not copy the reference.
13 = DI5U,6D(NC) – Same as DI3U,4D above, except that:
• Changing the control source (EXT1 to EXT2, EXT2 to EXT1, LOC to REM) does not copy the reference.
14 = AI1+AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.
15 = AI1*AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.
16 = AI1-AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.
17 = AI1/AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 75

Group 11: Reference Select

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
Analog Input Reference Correction
Parameter values 9, 10, and 14…17 use the formula in the following table.
Value AI reference is calculated as following:
Setting
C+B C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)
C*B C value * (B value / 50% of reference value)
C-B (C value + 50% of reference value) - B value
C/B (C value * 50% of reference value) / B value
Where:
• C = Main Reference value
( = COMM for values 9, 10 and 120
= AI1 for values 14…17). 17 (/)
• B = Correcting reference 100
( = AI1 for values 9, 10 and
= AI2 for values 14…17). 80
Example:
The figure shows the reference source curves for 60 9, 14 (+)
value settings 9, 10, and 14…17, where:
• C = 25%. 40 10, 15 (*)
• P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0.
• P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0.
• B varies along the horizontal axis. 20
16 (-)
0
0 100% B

1104 REF1 MIN 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz

0…30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm
Sets the minimum for external reference 1.
• The minimum analog input signal (as a percent of the full signal in volts or amps) corresponds to REF1 MIN in Hz/
rpm.
• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal.
• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max. settings) provide scale and offset adjustment for the
reference.
1105 REF1 MAX 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 60.0 Hz (US)
0…30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 rpm (US)
Sets the maximum for external reference 1.
• The maximum analog input signal (as a percent of full the signal in volts or amps) corresponds to REF1 MAX in Hz/
rpm.
• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal.

Ext ref Ext ref

P 1104
P 1105 (MIN)
(MAX)

Analog P 1105
P 1104 (MAX)
(MIN) input signal Analog
P 1301 P 1302 P 1301 P 1302 input signal
or 1304 or 1305 or 1304 or 1305

Start-Up
76 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 11: Reference Select

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1106 REF2 SELECT 0…19 1 19
Selects the signal source for external reference REF2.
0…17 – Same as for parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT.
19 = PID1OUT – The reference is taken from the PID1 output. See Groups 40 and 41.
If PFA is used
19 = PID1 REF2 LIMIT
SELECT MAX (1107, 1108) PFA

1…17 MIN (1107, 1108)

1107 REF2 MIN 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%

(torque: 0…600%)
Sets the minimum for external reference 2.
• The minimum analog input signal (in volts or amps) corresponds to REF2 MIN in %.
• Parameter 1301 MINIMUM AI1 or 1304 MINIMUM AI2 sets the minimum analog input signal.
• This parameter sets the minimum frequency reference.
• The value is a percentage of the:
– maximum frequency or speed
– maximum process reference
– nominal torque
1108 REF2 MAX 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
(torque: 0…600%)
Sets the maximum for external reference 2.
• The maximum analog input signal (in volts or amps) corresponds to REF2 MAX in %.
• Parameter 1302 MAXIMUM AI1 or 1305 MAXIMUM AI2 sets the maximum analog input signal.
• This parameter sets the maximum frequency reference.
• The value is a percentage of the:
– maximum frequency or speed
– maximum process reference
– nominal torque

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 77

Group 12: Constant Speeds

This group defines a set of constant speeds. In general:
• You can program up to 7 constant speeds, ranging from 0…500 Hz or 0…30000
rpm.
• Values must be positive (No negative speed values for constant speeds).
• Constant speed selections are ignored if:
– the torque control is active, or
– the process PID reference is followed, or
– the drive is in local control mode, or
– PFA (Pump and Fan Alternation) is active

Note! Parameter 1208 CONST SPEED 7 acts also as a so-called fault speed which
may be activated if the control signal is lost. For example, see parameters 3001
AI<MIN FUNCTION, 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR and 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.

Group 12: Constant Speeds

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1201 CONST SPEED SEL -14 …19 1 3
Defines the digital inputs used to select Constant Speeds. See general comments in the introduction.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the constant speed function.
1 = DI1 – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1.
• Digital input activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI2…DI6. See above.
7 = DI1,2 – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1 and DI2.
• Uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 Function
0 0 No constant speed
1 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
0 1 Constant speed 2 (1203)
1 1 Constant speed 3 (1204)
• Can be set up as a so-called fault speed, which is activated if the control signal is lost. Refer to parameter 3001
AI<MIN function and parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERR.
8 = DI2,3 – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI2 and DI3.
• See above (DI1,2) for code.
9 = DI3,4 – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI3 and DI4.
• See above (DI1,2) for code.
10 = DI4,5 – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI4 and DI5.
• See above (DI1,2) for code.
11 = DI5,6 – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI5 and DI6.
• See above (DI1,2) for code.

Start-Up
78 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 12: Constant Speeds

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
12 = DI1,2,3 – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI1, DI2 and DI3.
• Uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 DI3 Function
0 0 0 No constant speed
1 0 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
0 1 0 Constant speed 2 (1203)
1 1 0 Constant speed 3 (1204)
0 0 1 Constant speed 4 (1205)
1 0 1 Constant speed 5 (1206)
0 1 1 Constant speed 6 (1207)
1 1 1 Constant speed 7 (1208)

13 = DI3,4,5 – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI3, DI4 and DI5.
• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.
14 = DI4,5,6 – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI5, DI6 and DI7.
• See above (DI1,2,3) for code.
15…18 = TIMER 1…4 – Specifies the timer used to select a Constant Speed as the reference. The reference
selection depends on the state of the selected timer, and the value of 1209 TIMED MODE SEL. See table. To enable
and set timers, see Group 36, Timer Functions.
1201 = 15 16 17 18 Reference
Timer: 1 2 3 4 1209 = 1 1209 = 2
Timer 0 External reference Constant Speed 1
State 1 Constant Speed 1 Constant Speed 2

15…18 = TIMER FUNCTION 1…4 – Selects Constant speed 1 when Timer Function is active. See Group 36, Timer
Functions.
19 = TIMER 1 & 2 – Selects a constant depending on the state of Timers 1 & 2. See parameter 1209.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input DI1.
• Inverse operation: Digital input de-activated = Constant Speed 1 activated.
-2…- 6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Selects Constant Speed 1 with digital input. See above.
-7 = DI1,2(INV) – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI1 and DI2.
• Inverse operation uses two digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 Function
1 1 No constant speed
0 1 Constant speed 1 (1202)
1 0 Constant speed 2 (1203)
0 0 Constant speed 3 (1204)
-8 = DI2,3(INV) – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using Di2 and DI3.
• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.
-9 = DI3,4(INV) – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI3 and DI4.
• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.
-10 = DI4,5(INV) – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI4 and DI5.
• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.
-11 = DI5,6(INV) – Selects one of three Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI5 and DI6.
• See above (DI1,2(INV)) for code.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 79

Group 12: Constant Speeds

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
-12 = DI1,2,3(INV) – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…7) using DI1, DI2 and DI3.
• Inverse operation uses three digital inputs, as defined below (0 = DI de-activated, 1 = DI activated):
DI1 DI2 DI3 Function
1 1 1 No constant speed
0 1 1 Constant speed 1 (1202)
1 0 1 Constant speed 2 (1203)
0 0 1 Constant speed 3 (1204)
1 1 0 Constant speed 4 (1205)
0 1 0 Constant speed 5 (1206)
1 0 0 Constant speed 6 (1207)
0 0 0 Constant speed 7 (1208)
-13 = DI3,4,5(INV) – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI3, DI4 and DI5.
• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.
-14 = DI4,5,6(INV) – Selects one of seven Constant Speeds (1…3) using DI4, DI5 and DI6.
• See above (DI1,2,3(INV)) for code.
1202 CONST SPEED 1 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 360 (US)/
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 6.0 (US)
Sets value for Constant Speed 1.
• The range and units depend on parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE.
• Range: 0…30000 rpm when 9904 = 1 (VECTOR: SPEED).
• Range: 0…500 Hz when 9904 = 3 (SCALAR: FREQ).
1203 CONST SPEED 2 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 360 (US)/
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 12.0 (US)
Sets a value for a Constant Speed. (See CONST SPEED 1 above.)
1204 CONST SPEED 3 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 720 (US)/
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 18.0 (US)
1205 CONST SPEED 3 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 1080 (US)/
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 18.0 (US)
Sets a value for a Constant Speed. (See CONST SPEED 1 above.)
1206 CONST SPEED 3 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 1440 (US)/
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 24.0 (US)
Sets a value for a Constant Speed. (See CONST SPEED 1 above.)
1207 CONST SPEED 3 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 1800 (US)/
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 30.0 (US)
Sets a value for a Constant Speed. (See CONST SPEED 1 above.)
1208 CONST SPEED 3 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 2880 (US)/
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 48.0 (US)
Sets a value for a Constant Speed. (See CONST SPEED 1 above.)

Start-Up
80 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 12: Constant Speeds

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1209 TIMED MODE SEL 1…2 1 2
Defines timer activated, constant speed mode. Timer can be used to change between external reference and a
maximum of three constant speeds, or to change between a maximum of 4 selectable speeds, i.e. constant speeds
1,2,3 and 4.
1 = EXT/CS1/2/3 – Selects an external speed when no timer is active, selects Constant speed 1 when Timer 1 is
active, Selects Constant speed 2 when Timer 2 is active and selects Constant speed 3 when both Timers 1 and 2
are active.
TIMER1 TIMER2 Function
0 0 External reference
1 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
0 1 Constant speed 2 (1203)
1 1 Constant speed 3 (1204)
2 = CS1/2/3/4 – Selects Constant speed 1 when no timer is active, selects Constant speed 2 when Timer 1 is active,
selects Constant speed 3 when Timer 2 is active, selects Constant speed 4 when both timers are active.
TIMER1 TIMER2 Function
0 0 Constant speed 1 (1202)
1 0 Constant speed 2 (1203)
0 1 Constant speed 3 (1204)
1 1 Constant speed 4 (1205)

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 81

Group 13: Analog Inputs

This group defines the limits and the filtering for analog inputs.
Group 13: Analog Inputs
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1301 MINIMUM AI1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 20.0%
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
• Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range. See example below.
• The minimum analog input signal corresponds to 1104 REF1 MIN or 1107 REF2 MIN.
• MINIMUM AI cannot be greater than MAXIMUM AI.
• These parameters (reference and analog min. and max. settings) provide scale and offset adjustment for the
reference.
• See figure at parameter 1104.
Example. To set the minimum analog input value to 4 mA:
• Configure the analog input for 0…20 mA current signal.
• Calculate the minimum (4 mA) as a percent of full range (20 mA) = 4 mA / 20 mA * 100% = 20%
1302 MAXIMUM AI1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
• Define value as a percent of the full analog signal range.
• The maximum analog input signal corresponds to 1105 REF1 MAX or 1108 REF2 MAX.
• See figure at parameter 1104.
1303 FILTER AI1 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 1 (AI1). % Unfiltered signal
• The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time
specified. 100

63 Filtered signal

Time constant
1304 MINIMUM AI2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 20.0%
Defines the minimum value of the analog input.
• See MINIMUM AI1 above.
1305 MAXIMUM AI2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 100.0%
Defines the maximum value of the analog input.
• See MAXIMUM AI1 above.
1306 FILTER AI2 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Defines the filter time constant for analog input 2 (AI2).
• See FILTER AI1 above.

Start-Up
82 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 14: Relay Outputs

This group defines the condition that activates each of the relay outputs.
Group 14: Relay Outputs
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 0…45 1 1
Defines the event or condition that activates relay 1 – what relay output 1 means.
0 = NOT SEL – Relay is not used and is de-energized.
1 = READY – Energize relay when drive is ready to function. Requires:
• Run enable signal present.
• No faults exist.
• Supply voltage is within range.
• Emergency Stop command is not on.
2 = RUN – Energize relay when the drive is running.
3 = FAULT (-1) – Energize relay when power is applied. De-energizes when a fault occurs.
4 = FAULT – Energize relay when a fault is active.
5 = ALARM – Energize relay when an alarm is active.
6 = REVERSED – Energize relay when motor rotates in reverse direction.
7 = STARTED – Energize relay when drive receives a start command (even if Run Enable signal is not present). De-
energized relay when drive receives a stop command or a fault occurs.
8 = SUPRV1 OVER – Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) exceeds the limit (3203).
• See "Group 32: Supervision" starting on page 112.
9 = suprv1 under – Energize relay when first supervised parameter (3201) drops below the limit (3202).
• See "Group 32: Supervision" starting on page 112.
10 = suprv2 over – Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) exceeds the limit (3206).
• See "Group 32: Supervision" starting on page 112.
11 = suprv2 under – Energize relay when second supervised parameter (3204) drops below the limit (3205).
• See "Group 32: Supervision" starting on page 112.
12 = suprv3 over – Energize relay when third supervised parameter (3207) exceeds the limit (3209).
• See "Group 32: Supervision" starting on page 112.
13 = suprv3 under – Energize relay when third supervised parameter (3207) drops below the limit (3208).
• See "Group 32: Supervision" starting on page 112.
14 = AT SET POINT – Energize relay when the output frequency is equal to the reference frequency.
15 = FAULT (RST) – Energize relay when the drive is in a fault condition and will reset after the programmed auto-
reset delay.
• See parameter 3103 delay time.
16 = FLT/ALARM – Energize relay when fault or alarm occurs.
17 = EXT CTRL – Energize relay when external control is selected.
18 = REF 2 SEL – Energize relay when EXT2 is selected.
19 = CONST FREQ – Energize relay when a constant speed is selected.
20 = REF LOSS – Energize relay when reference or active control place is lost.
21 = OVERCURRENT – Energize relay when an overcurrent alarm or fault occurs.
22 = OVERVOLTAGE – Energize relay when an overvoltage alarm or fault occurs.
23 = DRIVE TEMP – Energize relay when a drive overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.
24 = UNDERVOLTAGE – Energize relay when an undervoltage alarm or fault occurs.
25 = AI1 LOSS – Energize relay when AI1 signal is lost.
26 = AI2 LOSS – Energize relay when AI2 signal is lost.
27 = MOTOR TEMP – Energize relay when a motor overtemperature alarm or fault occurs.
28 = STALL – Energize relay when a stall alarm or fault exists.
29 = UNDERLOAD – Energize relay when an underload alarm or fault occurs.
30 = PID SLEEP – Energize relay when the PID sleep function is active.
31 = PFA – Use relay to start/stop motor in PFA control (See Group 81: PFA Control).
• Use this option only when PFA control is used.
• Selection activated / deactivated when drive is not running.
32 = AUTOCHANGE – Energize relay when PFA autochange operation is performed.
• Use this option only when PFA control is used.
33 = FLUX READY – Energize relay when the motor is magnetized and able to supply nominal torque (motor has
reached nominal magnetizing).
34 = USER S2 – Energize relay when User Parameter Set 2 is active.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 83

Group 14: Relay Outputs

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
35 = COMM – Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication.
• Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energizes relay 1…relay 6 according to the following:
Par. 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1
0 000000 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 000001 0 0 0 0 0 1
2 000010 0 0 0 0 1 0
3 000011 0 0 0 0 1 1
4 000100 0 0 0 1 0 0
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 1 1 1 1 1 1

• 0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.

36 = COMM(-1) – Energize relay based on input from fieldbus communication.
• Fieldbus writes binary code in parameter 0134 that can energizes relay 1…relay 6 according to the following:
Par. 0134 Binary RO6 RO5 RO4 RO3 RO2 RO1
0 000000 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 000001 1 1 1 1 1 0
2 000010 1 1 1 1 0 1
3 000011 1 1 1 1 0 0
4 000100 1 1 1 0 1 1
5…62 … … … … … … …
63 111111 0 0 0 0 0 0
• 0 = De-energize relay, 1 = Energize relay.
37 = TIMER 1 – Energize relay when timer 1 is activated. See Group 36, Timer Functions.
38…40 = TIMER 2…4 – Energize relay when Timer 2…4 is active. See Timer 1 above.
41 = M.TRIG FAN – Energize relay when cooling fan counter is triggered. See group 29, Maintenance Trig.
42 = M.TRIG REV – Energize relay when revolutions counter is triggered. See group 29, Maintenance Trig.
43 = M. TRIG RUN – Energize relay when run time counter is triggered. See group 29, Maintenance Trig.
44 = M.TRIG MWH – Energize relay when power consumption counter is triggered. See group 29, Maintenance Trig.
45 = OVERRIDE – Energize relay when override is activated.
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 0…45 1 2
Defines the event or condition that activates relay 2 – what relay output 2 means.
• See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 0…45 1 3
Defines the event or condition that activates relay 3 – what relay output 3 means.
• See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1404 RO 1 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 1.
• On / off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to Control event
PFA.

Relay status

1404 ON DELAY 1405 OFF DELAY

1405 RO 1 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s

Defines the switch-off delay for relay 1.
• On / off delays are ignored when relay output 1401 is set to PFA.
1406 RO 2 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 2.
• See RO 1 ON DELAY.

Start-Up
84 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 14: Relay Outputs

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1407 RO 2 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 2.
• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1408 RO 3 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 3.
• See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1409 RO 3 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Switch-off delay for relay 3.
• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1410… RELAY OUTPUT 4…6 0…45 1 0
1412 Defines the event or condition that activates relay 4…6 – what relay output 4…6 means.
• See 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1.
1413 RO 4 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 4.
• See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1414 RO 4 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 4.
• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1415 RO 5 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 5.
• See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1416 RO 5 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 5.
• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.
1417 RO 6 ON DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-on delay for relay 6.
• See RO 1 ON DELAY.
1418 RO 6 OFF DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the switch-off delay for relay 6.
• See RO 1 OFF DELAY.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 85

Group 15: Analog Outputs

This group defines the drive’s analog (current signal) outputs. The drive’s analog
outputs can be:
• Any parameter of the Operating Data group (Group 01).
• Limited to programmable minimum and maximum values of output current.
• Scaled (and/or inverted) by defining the minimum and maximum values of the
source parameter (or content). Defining an maximum value (parameter 1503 or
1509) that is less than the content minimum value (parameter 1502 or 1508)
results in an inverted output.
• Filtered
Group 15: Analog Outputs
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 99…199 1 103
Defines the content for analog output AO1.
99 = EXCITE PTC – Provides a current source for sensor type PTC.
Output = 1.6 mA. See Group 35. AO (mA)
P 1505 /
100 = EXCITE PT100 – Provides a current source for sensor type P 1511
Pt100. Output = 9.1 mA. See Group 35.
101…145 – Output corresponds to a parameter in the Operating
Data group (Group 01).
• Parameter defined by value (value 102 = parameter 0102) P 1504 /
146…199 – Not assigned. P 1510 AO CONTENT

P 1502 / 1508
P 1503 / 1509

AO (mA)
P 1505 /
P 1511

P 1504 /
P 1510
AO CONTENT

P 1502 / 1508
P 1503 / 1509
1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Depends on selection - 0.0 Hz
Sets the minimum content value.
• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501.
• Minimum value refers to the minimum content value that will be converted to an analog output.
• These parameters (content and current min. and max. settings) provide scale and offset adjustment for the
output. See figure.
1503 AO1 CONTENT MAX Depends on selection - 60.0 Hz
Sets the maximum content value
• Content is the parameter selected by parameter 1501.
• Maximum value refers to the maximum content value that will be converted to an analog output.
1504 MINIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 4.0 mA
Sets the minimum output current.
1505 MAXIMUM AO1 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 20.0 mA
Sets the maximum output current.

Start-Up
86 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 15: Analog Outputs

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1506 FILTER AO1 0…10 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Defines the filter time constant for AO1.
• The filtered signal reaches 63% of a step change within the time specified.
• See figure in parameter 1303.
1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 99…199 1 104
Defines the content for analog output AO2. See AO1 CONTENT above.
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Depends on selection - 0.0 A
Sets the minimum content value. See AO1CONTENT MIN above.
1509 AO2 CONTENT MAX Depends on selection - 4.6 A
Sets the maximum content value. See AO1 CONTENT MAX above.
1510 MINIMUM AO2 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 4.0 mA
Sets the minimum output current. See MINIMUM AO1 above.
1511 MAXIMUM AO2 0.0…20.0 mA 0.1 mA 20.0 mA
Sets the maximum output current. See MAXIMUM AO1 above.
1512 FILTER AO2 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.1 s
Defines the filter time constant for AO2. See FILTER AO1 above.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 87

Group 16: System Controls

This group defines a variety of system level locks, resets and enables.
Group 16: System Controls
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1601 RUN ENABLE -6…7 1 0
Selects the source of the run enable signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external run enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the run enable signal.
• This digital input must be activated for run enable.
• If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable
signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the run enable signal.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the run enable signal.
• Bit 6 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) activates the run disable signal.
• See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the run enable signal.
• This digital input must be de-activated for run enable.
• If this digital input activates, the drive will coast to stop and not start until the run enable signal resumes.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the run enable signal.
• See DI1(INV) above.
1602 PARAMETER LOCK 0…2 1 1
Determines if the control panel can change parameter values.
• This lock does not limit parameter changes made by macros.
• This lock does not limit parameter changes written by fieldbus inputs.
• This parameter value can be changed only if the correct pass code is entered. See parameter 1603, PASS CODE.
0 = LOCKED – You cannot use the control panel to change parameter values.
• The lock can be opened by entering the valid pass code to parameter 1603.
1 = OPEN – You can use the control panel to change parameter values.
2 = NOT SAVED – You can use the control panel to change parameter values, but they are not stored in permanent
memory.
• Set parameter 1607 PARAM SAVE to 1 (SAVE) to store changed parameter values to memory.
1603 PASS CODE 0…65535 1 0
Entering the correct pass code allows you to change the parameter lock.
• See parameter 1602 above.
• The code 358 allows you to change the value of the parameter 1602 once.
• This entry reverts back to 0 automatically.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL -6…8 1 0
Selects the source for the fault reset signal. The signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault no
longer exists.
0 = KEYPAD – Defines the control panel as the only fault reset source.
• Fault reset is always possible with control panel.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.
• Activating the digital input resets the drive.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.
• See DI1 above.
7 = START/STOP – Defines the Stop command as a fault reset source.
• Do not use this option when fielbus communication provides the start, stop and direction commands.
8 = COMM – Defines the fieldbus as a fault reset source.
• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
• The bit 4 of the Command Word 1 (parameter 0301) resets the drive.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a fault reset source.
• De-activating the digital input resets the drive.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as a fault reset source.
• See DI1(INV) above.

Start-Up
88 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 16: System Controls

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1605 USER PAR SET CHG -6…6 1 0
Defines control for changing the user parameter set.
• See parameter 9902 (APPLIC MACRO).
• The drive must be stopped to change User Parameter Sets.
• During a change, the drive will not start.
Note: Always save the User Parameter Set after changing any parameter settings, or performing a motor
identification.
• Whenever the power is cycled, or parameter 9902 (APPLIC MACRO) is changed, the drive loads the last settings
saved. Any unsaved changes to a user parameter set are lost.
Note: The value of this parameter (1605) is not included in the User Parameter Sets, and does not change if User
Parameter Sets change.
Note: You can use a relay output to supervise the selection of User Parameter Set 2.
• See parameter 1401.
0 = NOT SEL – Defines the control panel (using parameter 9902) as the only control for changing User Parameter
Sets.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the falling edge of the digital input.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the rising edge of the digital input.
• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as a control for changing User Parameter Sets.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 1 on the rising edge of the digital input.
• The drive loads User Parameter Set 2 on the falling edge of the digital input.
• The User Parameter Set changes only when the drive is stopped.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as a control for changing User Parameter
Sets.
• See DI1(INV) above.
1606 LOCAL LOCK -6…8 1 0
Defines control for the use of the HAND mode. The HAND mode allows drive control from the control panel.
• When LOCAL LOCK is active, the control panel cannot change to HAND mode.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the lock. The control panel can select HAND and control the drive.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• Activating the digital input locks out local control.
• De-activating the digital input enable the HAND selection.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting the local lock.
• See DI1 above.
7 = ON – Sets the lock. The control panel cannot select HAND, and cannot control the drive.
8 = COMM – Defines bit 14 of the Command Word 1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
• The Command Word is 0301.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for setting the local lock.
• De-activating the digital input locks out local control.
• Activating the digital input enable the HAND selection.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for setting the local lock.
• See DI1(INV) above.
1607 PARAM. SAVE 0, 1 1 0
Saves all altered parameters to permanent memory.
• Parameters altered through a fieldbus are not automatically saved to permanent memory. To save, you must use
this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 2 (NOT SAVED), parameters altered from the control panel are not saved. To save, you
must use this parameter.
• If 1602 PARAMETER LOCK = 1 (OPEN), parameters altered from the control panel are stored immediately to
permanent memory.
0 = DONE – Value changes automatically when all parameters are saved.
1 = SAVE – Saves altered parameters to permanent memory.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 89

Group 16: System Controls

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1608 START ENABLE 1 -6…7 1 4
Selects the source of the start enable 1 signal.
Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal.
– This digital input must be activated for start enable 1 signal.
– If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2021 on
panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 1 signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 1 signal.
– See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 1 signal.
– Bit 2 of the Command word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 1 signal.
– See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
(-1) = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 1 signal.
(-2)…(-6) = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 1 signal.
– See DI1(INV) above.
Drive Started
START/STOP
COMMAND
(Par Group 10)
START ENABLE
SIGNAL
(Params.
1608 & 1609)

Relay Energized
Relay STARTED
De-energized RELAY STATUS
(Par Group 14)
Damper Open
Damper Damper
Closed Closed DAMPER
STATUS
Damper Damper
Opening Closing
Time Time

RUN ENABLE SIGNAL

from the damper end
switch when the
damper is fully opened.
(Parameter1601)

MOTOR STATUS
Acceleration Deceleration
Time Time
(Par 2202) (Par 2203)

Start-Up
90 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 16: System Controls

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
1609 START ENABLE 2 -6…7 1 0
Selects the source of the start enable 2 signal.
Note: Start enable functionality differs from the run enable functionality.
0 = NOT SEL – Allows the drive to start without an external start enable signal.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal. This digital input must be activated for start enable 2
signal. If the voltage drops and de-activates this digital input, the drive will coast to stop and show alarm 2022 on
panel display. The drive will not start until start enable 2 signal resumes.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 2 signal. See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Assigns the fieldbus Command Word as the source for the start enable 2 signal. Bit 3 of the Command
word 2 (parameter 0302) activates the start disable 2 signal. See fieldbus user’s manual for detailed instructions.
(-1) = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the start enable 2 signal.
(-2)…(-6) = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the start enable 2 signal.
• See DI1(INV) above.
1610 DISPLAY ALARMS 0, 1 1 0
Controls the visibility of the following alarms:
• 2001, Overcurrent alarm
• 2002, Overvoltage alarm
• 2003, Undervoltage alarm
• 2009, Device overtemperature alarm
0 = NO – The above alarms are suppressed.
1 = YES – All of the above alarms are enabled.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 91

Group 17: Override

This group defines the source for the override activation signal, the override speed/
frequency and pass code and how the override is enabled and disabled.
When override DI is activated, the drive stops and then accelerates to the preset
speed or frequency. When the DI is deactivated the drive stops and reboots. If the
start command, run enable and start enables are active in the AUTO mode the drive
starts automatically and continues normally after override mode. In the HAND mode
the drive returns to OFF mode.
When override is active:
• Drive runs at preset speed
• Drive ignores all keypad commands
• Drive ignores all commands from communication links
• Drive ignores all digital inputs except override activation/deactivation, RUN
ENABLE and START ENABLE
• Drive displays alarm message “2020 OVERRIDE MODE”
The following faults are ignored:
3 DEVICE OVERTEMP
5 OVERLOAD
6 DC UNDERVOLT
7 AI1 LOSS
8 AI2 LOSS
9 MOTOR TEMP
10 PANEL LOSS
12 MOTOR STALL
14 EXTERNAL FLT 1
15 EXTERNAL FLT 2
17 UNDERLOAD
18 THERM FAIL
21 CURR MEAS
22 SUPPLY PHASE
24 OVERSPEED
28 SERIAL 1 ERR
29 EFB CONFIG FILE
30 FORCE TRIP
31 EFB 1
32 EFB 2
33 EFB 3
34 MOTOR PHASE
1001 PAR PFC REFNEG

Start-Up
92 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

1002 PAR PFC IOCONF

1003 PAR AI SCALE
1004 PAR AO SCALE
1006 PAR EXTROMISSING
1007 PAR FBUSMISSING
1008 PAR PFCWOSCALAR

Commissioning the Override Mode:

1. Enter the parameters in all groups as needed, except group 17.
2. Select the digital input that will activate override mode P1701.
3. Enter the frequency or speed reference for override mode, P1702 and P1703,
according to the motor control mode P9904.
4. Enter the pass code P1704 (358).
5. Enable the override mode P1705.
Changing the Override Parameters:
1. If override mode is already enabled, disable it:
• Enter the pass code P1704.
• Disable the override mode P1705.
2. If needed, load the override parameter set P9902.
3. Change the parameters as needed, except group 17.
4. Change the parameters in group 17 as needed:
• Digital input for override mode P1701.
• Frequency or speed reference, P1702 or P1703.
5. Enter the pass code P1704.
6. Enable the override mode P1705. The drive replaces the override parameter set with
new values of all parameters.
Group 17: Override
Code Description Range Resolution DefaultS
1701 OVERRIDE SEL -6…6 1 0
Selects the source of the override activation signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Override activation signal not selected.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the override activation signal.
• This digital input must be activated for override activation signal.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the override activation signal.
• See DI1 above.
(-1) = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the override activation signal.
(-2)…(-6) = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the override activation signal.
• See DI1(INV) above.
1702 OVERRIDE FREQ -500…500 Hz 0.1 0.0
Defines a preset frequency for the override.
Note! Set this value if motor control mode (Par. 9904) is SCALAR: FREQ (3).

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 93

Group 17: Override

Code Description Range Resolution DefaultS
1703 OVERRIDE SPEED -30.000…30.000 rpm 1 0
Defines a preset speed for the override.
Note! Set this value if motor control mode (Par.9904) is VECTOR: SPEED (1).
1704 OVERR PASS CODE 0…65535 1 0
Entering the correct override pass code unlocks parameter 1705 for one change.
• Enter the pass code always before changing the value of the parameter 1705.
• See parameter 1705 below.
• The pass code is 358.
• The entry reverts back to zero automatically.
1705 OVERRIDE ENABLE 0…1 1 0
Selects whether the override is enabled or disabled.
0 = OFF – Override disabled.
1 = ON – Override enabled.
• When enabled, the drive stores the values of all parameters into an override parameter set (see parameter
9902) and the parameters in Group 17 will be write protected (except parameter 1704). To change the
other parameters in the Group 17, override has to be disabled.

Start-Up
94 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 20: Limits

This group defines minimum and maximum limits to follow in driving the motor –
speed, frequency, current, torque, etc.
Group 20: Limits
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2001 MINIMUM SPEED -30000…30000 rpm 1 rpm 0 rpm
Defines the minimum speed (rpm) allowed. Speed
• A positive (or zero) minimum speed value defines two ranges, 2001 value is< 0
one positive and one negative. P 2002
• A negative minimum speed value defines one speed range.
• See figure. Speed range allowed
0 Time

P 2001

Speed 2001 value is > 0

P 2002
Speed range allowed
P 2001
0 Time
-(P 2001)
Speed range allowed
-(P 2002)

2002 MAXIMUM SPEED 0…30000 rpm 1 rpm 1800 (US)

Defines the maximum speed (rpm) allowed.
2003 MAX CURRENT 0.0… 1.3 * I2N 0.1 A 1.3 * I2N
Defines the maximum output current (A) supplied by the drive to the motor.
2006 UNDERVOLT CTRL 0…2 1 1
Sets the DC undervoltage controller on or off. When on:
• If the DC bus voltage drops due to loss of input power, the undervoltage controller decreases the motor speed in
order to keep the DC bus voltage above the lower limit.
• When the motor speed decreases, the inertia of the load causes regeneration back into the drive, keeping the DC
bus charged, and preventing an undervoltage trip.
• The DC undervoltage controller increases power loss ride-through on systems with a high inertia, such as a
centrifuge or a fan.
0 = DISABLE – Disables controller.
1 = ENABLE (TIME) – Enables controller with 500 ms time limit for operation.
2 = ENABLE – Enables controlled without maximum time limit for operation.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 95

Group 20: Limits

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2007 MINIMUM FREQ -500.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
Defines the minimum limit for the drive output frequency. Freq
• A positive or zero minimum speed frequency defines two 2007 value is< 0
ranges, one positive and one negative. P 2008
• A negative minimum speed frequency defines one speed
range. See figure. Frequency range allowed
0 Time
Note! Keep MINIMUM FREQ ≤ MAXIMUM FREQ.

P 2007

Freq 2007 value is > 0

P 2008
Frequency range allowed
P 2007
0 Time
-(P 2007)
Frequency range allowed
-(P 2008)

2008 MAXIMUM FREQ 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 60.0 Hz (US)

Defines the maximum limit for the drive output frequency.
2013 MIN TORQUE SEL -6…7 1 0
Defines control of the selection between two minimum torque limits (2015 MIN TORQUE 1 and 2016 MIN TORQUE 2).
0 = MIN TORQUE 1 – Selects 2015 MIN TORQUE 1 as the minimum limit used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
The Command Word is a parameter 0301.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the minimum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 1 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MIN TORQUE 2 value.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the minimum limit
used.
• See DI1(INV) above.
2014 MAX TORQUE SEL -6…7 1 0
Defines control of the selection between two maximum torque limits (2017 MAX TORQUE 1 and 2018 MAX TORQUE 2).
0 = MAX TORQUE 1 – Selects 2017 MAX TORQUE 1 as the maximum limit used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.
De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Defines bit 15 of the Command Word 1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
• The Command Word is supplied through fieldbus communication.
• The Command Word is a parameter 0301.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input di1 as the control for selecting the maximum limit used.
• Activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 1 value.
• De-activating the digital input selects MAX TORQUE 2 value.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for selecting the maximum limit
used.
• See DI1(INV) above.

Start-Up
96 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 20: Limits

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2015 MIN TORQUE 1 -600.0%…0.0% 0.1% -300.0%
Sets the first minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
2016 MIN TORQUE 2 -600.0%…0.0% 0.1% -300.0%
Sets the second minimum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
2017 MAX TORQUE 1 0.0%…600.0% 0.1% 300.0%
Sets the first maximum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.
2018 MAX TORQUE 2 0.0%…600.0% 0.1% 300.0%
Sets the second maximum limit for torque (%). Value is a percent of the motor nominal torque.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 97

21: Start/Stop
This group defines how the motor starts and stops. The ACH550 supports several start and stop
modes.
Group 21: Start/Stop
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2101 START FUNCTION 1…5 1 1
Selects the motor start method.
1 = AUTO – Selects the automatic start mode.
• VECTOR control modes: Optimal start in most cases. The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency
to start a rotating motor.
• SCALAR: FREQ mode: Immediate start from zero frequency.
2 = DC MAGN – Selects the DC Magnetizing start mode.
Note! The DC Magnetizing start mode cannot start a rotating motor.
Note! The drive starts when the set pre-magnetizing time (param. 2103) has passed, even if motor magnetization is
not complete.
• VECTOR control modes: Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME
using DC current. The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time. This selection guarantees
the highest possible break-away torque.
• SCALAR SPEED mode: Magnetizes the motor within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME
using DC current. The normal control is released exactly after the magnetizing time.
3 = SCALAR FLYSTART – Selects the flying start mode.
• VECTOR control modes: Not applicable.
• SCALAR control mode: The drive automatically selects the correct output frequency to start a rotating motor –
useful if the motor is already rotating and if the drive will start smoothly at the current frequency.
4 = TORQ BOOST – Selects the automatic torque boost mode (SCALAR SPEED mode only).
• May be necessary in drives with high starting torque.
• Torque boost is only applied at start, ending when output frequency exceeds 20 Hz or when output frequency is
equal to reference.
• In the beginning the motor magnetizes within the time determined by the parameter 2103 DC MAGN TIME using
DC current.
• See parameter 2110 TORQ BOOST CURR.
5 = FLYSTART + TORQ BOOST – Selects both the flying start and the torque boost mode (SCALAR SPEED mode only).
• Flying start routine is performed first and the motor is magnetized. If the speed is found to be zero, the torque
boost is done.
2102 STOP FUNCTION 1, 2 1 1
Selects the motor stop method.
1 = COAST – Selects cutting off the motor power as the stop method. The motor coasts to stop.
2 = RAMP – Selects using a deceleration ramp
• Deceleration ramp is defined by 2203 DECELER TIME 1 or 2206 DECELER TIME 2 (whichever is active).
2103 DC MAGN TIME 0.00…10.00 s 0.01 s 0.30 s
Defines the pre-magnetizing time for the DC Magnetizing start mode.
• Use parameter 2101 to select the start mode.
• After the start command, the drive pre-magnetizes the motor for the time defined here, and then starts the motor.
• Set the pre-magnetizing time just long enough to allow full motor magnetization. Too long a time heats the motor
excessively.

Start-Up
98 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 21: Start/Stop

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2104 DC CURR CTL 0…2 - 0
Selects whether DC current is used for braking. Motor
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the DC current operation. Speed DC Hold
1 = DC HOLD – Enables the DC Hold function. See diagram.
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 1 (VECTOR SPEED)
• Stops generating sinusoidal current and injects DC into the motor when T
both the reference and the motor speed drop below the value of
parameter 2105. Ref
• When the reference rises above the level of parameter 2105 the drive
resumes normal operation.
2 = DC BRAKING – Enables the DC Injection Braking after modulation has DC Hold
T
stopped. Speed
• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION is 1 (COAST), braking is applied after
start is removed.
• If parameter 2102 STOP FUNCTION IS 2 (RAMP), braking is applied after ramp.
2105 DC HOLD SPEED 0…360 1 rpm 5 rpm
Sets the speed for DC Hold. Requires that parameter 2104 DC CURR CTL = 1 (DC HOLD).
2106 DC CURR REF 0…100% 1% 30%
Defines the DC current control reference as a percentage of parameter 9906 (MOTOR NOM CURR).
2107 DC BRAKE TIME 0…250 s 0.1 s 0s
Defines the DC brake time after modulation has stopped, if parameter 2104 is 2 (DC BRAKING).
2108 START INHIBIT 0, 1 1 0
Sets the Start inhibit function on or off. The Start inhibit function ignores a pending start command in any of the
following situations (a new start command is required):
• A fault is reset.
• Run Enable (parameter 1601) activates while start command is active.
• Mode changes from local to remote.
• Mode changes from remote to local.
• Control switches from EXT1 to EXT2.
• Control switches from EXT2 to EXT1.
0 = OFF – Disables the Start inhibit function.
1 = ON – Enables the Start inhibit function.
2109 EM STOP SEL -6…6 1 0
Defines control of the Emergency stop command. When activated:
• Emergency stop decelerates the motor using the emergency stop ramp (parameter 2208 EM DEC TIME).
• Requires an external stop command and removal of the emergency stop command before drive can restart.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Emergency stop function through digital inputs.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• Activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
• De-activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• De-activating the digital input issues an Emergency stop command.
• Activating the digital input removes the Emergency stop command.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for Emergency stop command.
• See DI1(INV) above.
2110 TORQ BOOST CURR 15…300% 1 100%
Sets the maximum supplied current during torque boost.
• See parameter 2101 START FUNCTION.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 99

Group 22: Accel/Decel

This group defines ramps that control the rate of acceleration and deceleration. You define these ramps
as a pair, one for acceleration and one for deceleration. You can define two pairs of ramps and use a
digital input to select one or the other pair.
Group 22: Accel/Decel
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2201 ACC/DEC 1/2 SEL -6…7 1 0
Defines control for selection of acceleration/deceleration ramps.
• Ramps are defined in pairs, one each for acceleration and deceleration.
• See below for the ramp definition parameters.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables selection, the first ramp pair is used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2.
• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• See DI1 above.
7 = COMM – Defines serial communication as the control for ramp pair selection.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• De-activating the digital input selects ramp pair 2
• Activating the digital input selects ramp pair 1.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for ramp pair selection.
• See DI1(INV) above.
2202 ACCELER TIME 1 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s
Sets the acceleration time for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 1. See A in figure.
• Actual acceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE.
• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY.
2203 DECELER TIME 1 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 1.
• Actual deceleration time also depends on 2204 RAMP SHAPE.
• See 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY.
2204 RAMP SHAPE 1 0...1000.0 s 0.1 s 0.0
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 1. See B in
MAX Linear
figure. FREQ
• Shape is defined as a ramp, unless additional time is specified here to reach
the maximum frequency. A longer time provides a softer transition at each end
of the slope. The shape becomes an s-curve.
• Rule of thumb: 1/5 is a suitable relation between the ramp shape time and the
B (=0)
acceleration ramp time.
0.0 = LINEAR – Specifies linear acceleration/deceleration ramps for ramp pair 1. T
0.1…1000.0 = S-CURVE – Specifies s-curve acceleration/deceleration ramps for
ramp pair 1.
MAX S-curve
FREQ

B
T
A
A = 2202 ACCELERATION TIME
B = 2204 RAMP SHAPE
2205 ACCELER TIME 2 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
Sets the acceleration time (s) for zero to maximum frequency for ramp pair 2. See 2002 ACCELER TIME 1.
2206 DECELER TIME 2 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for ramp pair 2. See 2003 DECELER TIME 1.

Start-Up
100 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 22: Accel/Decel

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2207 RAMP SHAPE 2 0…1000.0 s 0.1 s 0.0
Selects the shape of the acceleration/deceleration ramp for ramp pair 2. See 2004 RAMP SHAPE 1.
2208 EM DEC TIME 0.0…1800 s 0.1 s 1.0 s
Sets the deceleration time for maximum frequency to zero for an emergency.
• See parameter 2109 EM STOP SEL.
• Ramp is linear.
2209 RAMP INPUT 0 -6…6 1 0
Defines control for forcing the ramp input to 0.
0 = NOT SEL –
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0.
• Activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0. Ramp output will ramp to 0 according to the currently used
ramp time, after which it will stay at 0.
• De-activating the digital input: ramp resumes normal operation.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for forcing the ramp input to 0.
• De-activating the digital input forces ramp input to 0.
• Activating the digital input: ramp resumes normal operation.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for forcing the ramp function
generator input to 0.
• See DI1(INV) above.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 101

Group 23: Speed Control

This group defines variables used for speed control operation.

Group 23: Speed Control

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2301 PROP GAIN 0.00…200.00 0.01 3.00
Sets the relative gain for the speed controller.
Gain = Kp = 1
• Larger values may cause speed oscillation.
TI = Integration time = 0
• The figure shows the speed controller output
TD= Derivation time = 0
after an error step (error remains constant). %
Note! You can use parameter 2305, AUTOTUNE Error Value
RUN, to automatically set proportional gain.
Controller Output
Controller
output = e = Error value
Kp * e
t

2302 INTEGRATION TIME 0.00…600.00 s 0.01 s 2.50

Sets the integration time for the speed Controller Output
controller. %
• The integration time defines the rate at
which the controller output changes for a Gain = Kp = 1
constant error value. TI = Integration time > 0
Kp * e TD= Derivation time = 0
• Shorter integration times correct continuous
errors faster.
• Control becomes unstable if the integration
time is too short.
• The figure shows the speed controller Kp * e e = Error value
output after an error step (error remains
constant). t
Note! You can use parameter 2305,
AUTOTUNE RUN, to automatically set
TI
proportional gain.
2303 DERIVATION TIME 0…10000 ms 1 ms 0
Sets the derivation time for the speed controller. %
• Derivative action makes the control more
responsive to error value changes.
Controller Output
• The longer the derivation time, the more the Δe
Kp * TD T*
speed controller output is boosted during the s Kp * e
change. Error Value
• If the derivation time is set to zero, the
controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as Kp * e e = Error value
a PID controller.
t
The figure shows the speed controller output
after an error step when the error remains TI
constant. Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time > 0
Ts= Sample time period = 2 ms
Δe = Error value change between two samples

Start-Up
102 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 23: Speed Control

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2304 ACC COMPENSATION 0.00…600.00 s 0.01 s 0.00
Sets the derivation time for acceleration compensation.
• Adding a derivative of the reference to the output of the speed controller compensates for inertia during
acceleration.
• 2303 DERIVATION TIME describes the principle of derivative action.
• Rule of thumb: Set this parameter between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time constants for the
motor and the driven machine.
• The figure shows the speed responses when a high inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
No Acceleration Compensation
Acceleration Compensation
% %

Speed reference
Actual speed

t t

*Note! You can use parameter 2305 AUTOTUNE RUN to automatically set acceleration compensation.
2305 AUTOTUNE RUN 0…1 1 0
Starts automatic tuning of the speed controller.
0 = OFF– Disables the Autotune creation process. (Does not disable the operation of Autotune settings.)
1 = ON – Activates speed controller autotuning. Automatically reverts to OFF.
Procedure:
Note! The motor load must be connected.
• Run the motor at a constant speed of 20 to 40% of the rated speed.
• Change the autotuning parameter 2305 to ON.
The drive:
• Accelerates the motor.
• Calculates values for proportional gain, integration time and acceleration compensation.
• Changes parameters 2301, 2302 and 2304 to these values.
• Resets 2305 to OFF.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 103

Group 25: Critical Speeds

This group defines up to three critical speeds or ranges of speeds that are to be
avoided due, for example, to mechanical resonance problems at certain speeds.
Group 25: Critical Speeds
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2501 CRIT SPEED SEL 0, 1 1 0
Sets the critical speeds function on or off. The critical speed foutput
function avoids specific speed ranges.
0 = OFF – Disables the critical speeds function.
1 = ON – Enables the critical speeds function. 52
Example: To avoid speeds at which a fan system vibrates 46
badly:
• Determine problem speed ranges. Assume they are found to 23
be: 18…23 Hz and 46…52 Hz.
• Set 2501 CRIT SPEED SEL = 1. 18
• Set 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO = 18 Hz.
• Set 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI = 23 Hz. fREF (Hz)
• Set 2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO = 46 Hz. f1L f1H f2L f2H
• Set 2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI = 52 Hz. 18 23 46 52
2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 0 rpm /
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 1.
• The value must be less than or equal to 2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI.
• Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR SPEED), then units are Hz.
2503 CRIT SPEED 1 HI 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 0 rpm /
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 1.
• The value must be greater than or equal to 2502 CRIT SPEED 1 LO.
• Units are rpm, unless 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR SPEED), then units are Hz.
2504 CRIT SPEED 2 LO 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 0 rpm /
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 2.
• See parameter 2502.
2505 CRIT SPEED 2 HI 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 0 rpm /
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 2.
• See parameter 2503.
2506 CRIT SPEED 3 LO 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 0 rpm /
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
Sets the minimum limit for critical speed range 3.
• See parameter 2502.
2507 CRIT SPEED 3 HI 0…30000 rpm / 1 rpm / 0 rpm /
0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 0.0 Hz
Sets the maximum limit for critical speed range 3.
• See parameter 2503.

Start-Up
104 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 26: Motor Control

This group provides controls for fine-tuning the motor control.
Group 26: Motor Control
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2601 FLUX OPTIMIZATION 0…1 1 0
Changes the magnitude of the flux depending on the actual load. Flux Optimization can reduce the total energy
consumption and noise, and should be enabled for drives that usually operate below nominal load.
0 = OFF – Disables the feature.
1 = ON – Enables the feature.
2602 FLUX BRAKING 0…1 1 0
Provides faster deceleration by raising the level of Braking
magnetization in the motor when needed, instead of limiting Torque (%) Rated Motor Power
the deceleration ramp. By increasing the flux in the motor, 1 2.2 kW
the energy of the mechanical system is changed to thermal 120% W/O Flux Braking
2 15 kW
energy in the motor.
3 37 kW
0 = OFF – Disables the feature. 80
1 = ON – Enables the feature. 4 75 kW
1 5 250 kW
40 3
4
2 5
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
f (Hz)
120% With Flux Braking

80
1

40 2
4 3
5
0
5 10 20 30 40 50
f (Hz)
2603 IR COMP VOLT 0…100 V 1V size dependent
Sets the IR compensation voltage used for 0 Hz.
Motor
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 Voltage
(SCALAR SPEED).
• Keep IR compensation as low as possible to prevent A
overheating.
• Typical IR compensation values are: A = IR Compensated
B = No compensation
380…480 V Units P 2603
PN (kW) 3 7.5 15 37 132
IR comp (V) 18 15 12 8 3 f (Hz)
B

IR Compensation P 2604
• When enabled, IR Compensation provides an extra
voltage boost to the motor at low speeds. Use IR Compensation, for example, in applications that require a high
breakaway torque.
2604 IR COMP FREQ 0…100% 1 80%
Sets the frequency at which IR compensation is 0 V (in % of motor frequency).
2605 U/f RATIO 1, 2 1 1
Selects the form for the U/f (voltage to frequency) ratio below field weakening point.
1 = LINEAR – Preferred for constant torque applications.
2 = SQUARED – Preferred for centrifugal pump and fan applications. (Square is more silent for most operating
frequencies.)

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 105

Group 26: Motor Control

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2606 SWITCHING FREQ 1, 4, 8, 12 kHz - 4 kHz
Sets the switching frequency for the drive. Also see parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL and "Switching Frequency
Derating" on page 264.
• Higher switching frequencies mean less noise.
• 12 kHz switching frequency is available only if parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 (SCALAR:SPEED).
• The 12 kHz switching frequency is available only on frame sizes R1…R6
2607 SW FREQ CTRL 0, 1 - 1
The switching frequency may be reduced if the ACH550 internal temperature rises above a limit. See Figure. This
function allows the highest possible switching frequency to be used based on operating conditions. Higher switching
frequency results in lower acoustic noise.
0 = OFF – The function is disabled.
1 = ON – The switching frequency is limited according to the figure.
fsw
Limit R1…R6 Drives fsw
Limit R7/R8 Drives
12 kHz

8 kHz ACH550
Temperature ACH550
4 kHz 4 kHz
Temperature
1 kHz
80 °C 90 °C 100 °C 90 °C 100 °C

2608 SLIP COMP RATIO 0…200% 1 0

Sets gain for slip compensation (in %).
• A squirrel-cage motor slips under load. Increasing the frequency as the motor torque increases compensates for
the slip.
• Requires parameter 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = SCALAR SPEED.
0 = No slip compensation.
1…200 = Increasing slip compensation. 100% means full slip compensation.
2609 NOISE SMOOTHING 0, 1 1 0
This parameter introduces a random component to the switching frequency. Noise smoothing distributes the
acoustic motor noise over a range of frequencies instead of a single tonal frequency resulting in lower peak noise
intensity. The random component has an average of 0Hz and is added to the switching frequency set by parameter
2606 (SWITCHING FREQ). This parameter has no effect if parameter 2606 = 12kHz.
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE

Start-Up
106 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 29: Maintenance Trig

This group contains usage levels and trigger points. When usage reaches the set
trigger point, a notice displayed on the control panel signals that maintenance is due.
Group 29: Maintenance Trig
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2901 COOLING FAN TRIG 0.0…6553.5 kh 0.1 kh 0.0
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s cooling fan counter.
0.0 = NOT SEL
2902 COOLING FAN ACT 0.0…6553.5 kh 0.1 kh 0.0
Defines the actual value of the drive’s cooling fan counter.
• The parameter is reset by writing 0.0 to it.
2903 REVOLUTION TRIG 0…65535 MRev 1 MRev 0
Sets the trigger point for the motor’s accumulated revolutions counter.
0.0 = NOT SEL
2904 REVOLUTION ACT 0…65535 MRev 1 MRev 0
Defines the actual value of the motor’s accumulated revolutions counter.
• The parameter is reset by writing 0 to it.
2905 RUN TIME TRIG 0.0…6553.5 kh 0.1 kh 0.0
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s run time counter.
0.0 = NOT SEL
2906 RUN TIME ACT 0.0…6553.5 kh 0.1 kh 0.0
Defines the actual value of the drive’s run time counter.
• The parameter is reset by writing 0.0 to it.
2907 USER MWh TRIG 0.0…6553.5 MWh 0.1 MWh 0.0
Sets the trigger point for the drive’s accumulated power consumption (in megawatt hours) counter.
0.0 = NOT SEL
2908 USER MWh ACT 0.0…6553.5 MWh 0.1 MWh 0.0
Defines the actual value of the drive’s accumulated power consumption (in megawatt hours) counter.
• The parameter is reset by writing 0.0 to it.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 107

Group 30: Fault Functions

This group defines situations that the drive should recognize as potential faults and defines how the
drive should respond if the fault is detected.
Group 30: Fault Functions
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION 0…3 1 0
Defines the drive response if the analog input (AI) signal drops below the fault limits and AI is used in reference
chain.
• 3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT and 3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT set the fault limits
0 = NOT SEL – No response.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (7, AI1 LOSS or 8, AI2 LOSS) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP7 – Displays a warning (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays a warning (2006, AI1 LOSS or 2007, AI2 LOSS) and sets speed using the last operating
level. This value is the average speed over the last 10 seconds.
Warning! If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the analog
input signal is lost.
3002 PANEL COMM ERR 1…3 1 1
Defines the drive response to a control panel communication error.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (10, PANEL LOSS) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP7 – Displays a warning (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays a warning (2008, PANEL LOSS) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is
the average speed over the last 10 seconds.
Warning! If you select CONST SP7 or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when the control
panel communication is lost.
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1 -6…6 1 0
Defines the External Fault 1 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.
0 = NOT SEL – External fault signal is not used.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the external fault input.
• Activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXTERNAL FAULT 1) and the drive coasts
to stop.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault input.
• See DI1 above.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the external fault input.
• De-activating the digital input indicates a fault. The drive displays a fault (14, EXTERNAL FAULT 1) and the drive
coasts to stop.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the external fault input.
• See DI1(INV) above.
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2 -6…6 1 0
Defines the External Fault 2 signal input and the drive response to an external fault.
• See parameter 3003 above.
3005 MOT THERM PROT 0, 2 1 1
Defines the drive response to motor overheating.
0 = NOT SEL – No response and/or motor thermal protection not set up.
1 = FAULT – When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C, displays a warning (2010, MOT OVERTEMP).
When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 110 C displays a fault (9, MOT OVERTEMP) and the drive coasts to
stop.
2 = WARNING – When the calculated motor temperature exceeds 90 C, displays a warning (2010, MOT OVERTEMP).

Start-Up
108 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 30: Fault Functions

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3006 MOT THERM TIME 256…9999 s 1 1050 s
Sets the motor thermal time constant for the motor temperature Motor load
model.
• This is the time required for the motor to reach 63% of the final
temperature with steady load. t
• For thermal protection according to UL requirements for NEMA
class motors, use the rule of thumb: MOTOR THERM TIME equals Temp. Rise
35 times t6, where t6 (in seconds) is specified by the motor 100%
manufacturer as the time that the motor can safely operate at 63%
six times its rated current.
• The thermal time for a Class 10 trip curve is 350 s, for a Class t
20 trip curve 700 s, and for a Class 30 trip curve 1050 s.

}
P 3006
3007 MOT LOAD CURVE 50…150% 1 100%
Sets the maximum allowable operating load of the motor. Output current (%) relative
• When set to 100%, the maximum allowable load is equal to the to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR
value of Start-up Data parameter 9906 MOTOR NOM CURRENT.
• Adjust the load curve level if the ambient temperature differs from 150
nominal.
P 3007 100

P 3008 50
Frequency

P 3009
3008 ZERO SPEED LOAD 25…150% 1 70%
Sets the maximum allowable current at zero speed.
• Value is relative to 9906 MOTOR NOM CURR.
3009 BREAK POINT FREQ 1…250 Hz 1 35 Hz
Sets the break point frequency for the motor load curve.
Example: Thermal protection trip IO/IN A
times when parameters 3006 3.5
MOT THERM TIME, 3007 MOT
LOAD CURVE and 3008 ZERO 3.0 60 s
SPEED LOAD have default
2.5 90 s
values.
2.0
180 s
1.5 300 s
600 s IO = Output current
1.0 ∞
IN = Nominal motor current
0.5 fO = Output frequency
fO/fBRK
fBRK = Break point frequency
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 A = Trip time

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 109

Group 30: Fault Functions

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3010 STALL FUNCTION 0…2 1 0
This parameter defines the operation of the Stall function. This Torque
protection is active if the drive operates in the stall region (see figure)
for the time defined by 3012 STALL TIME. The “User Limit” is defined in
Group 20 by 2017 MAX TORQUE 1, 2018 MAX TORQUE 2, or the limit on
Stall region
the COMM input.
0 = NOT SEL – Stall protection is not used. 95%
1 = FAULT – When the drive operates in the stall region for the time set User
by 3012 STALL TIME: Limit
• The drive coasts to stop.
• A fault indication is displayed.
2 = WARNING – When the drive operates in the stall region for the time
set by 3012 STALL TIME: f
• A warning indication is displayed. 3011
• The warning disappears when the drive is out of the stall region for
STALL FREQ HI
half the time set by parameter 3012 STALL TIME.
3011 STALL FREQUENCY 0.5…50.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 20.0 Hz
This parameter sets the frequency value for the Stall function. Refer to Figure.
3012 STALL TIME 10…400 s 1s 20 s
This parameter sets the time value for the Stall function.
3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION 0…2 - 0
Removal of motor load may indicate a process malfunction. The protection is activated if:
• The motor torque drops below the load curve selected by parameter 3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE.
• This condition has lasted longer than the time set by parameter 3014 UNDERLOAD TIME.
• Output frequency is higher than 10% of the nominal frequency.
0 = NOT SEL – Underload protection is not used.
1 = FAULT – When the protection is activated the drive coasts to stop. A fault indication is displayed.
2 = WARNING – A warning indication is displayed.
3014 UNDERLOAD TIME 10…400 s 1s 20 s
Time limit for underload protection.
3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE 1…5 1 1
This parameter provides five selectable curves TM
shown in the figure.
(%)
• If the load drops below the set curve for longer Underload curve types
than the time set by parameter 3014, the 80 3
underload protection is activated. 70%
• Curves 1…3 reach maximum at the motor
rated frequency set by parameter 9907 MOTOR 60 2
NOM FREQ.
• TM = nominal torque of the motor. 50%
• ƒN = nominal frequency of the motor. 1
40 5
30%

20
4
f
0
ƒN 2.4 * ƒN
3017 EARTH FAULT 0…1 1 1
Defines the drive response if the drive detects a ground fault in the motor or motor cables. The drive monitors for
ground faults while the drive is running, and while the drive is not running. Also see parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT.
0 = DISABLE – No drive response to ground faults.
1 = ENABLE – Ground faults display fault 16 (EARTH FAULT), and (if running) the drive coasts to stop.

Start-Up
110 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 30: Fault Functions

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0…3 1 0
Defines the drive response if the fieldbus communication is lost.
0 = NOT SEL – No response.
1 = FAULT – Displays a fault (28, SERIAL 1 ERR) and the drive coasts to stop.
2 = CONST SP7 – Displays a warning (2005, IO COMM) and sets speed using 1208 CONST SPEED 7. This “alarm speed”
remains active until the fieldbus writes a new reference value.
3 = LAST SPEED – Displays a warning (2005, IO COMM) and sets speed using the last operating level. This value is the
average speed over the last 10 seconds. This “alarm speed” remains active until the fieldbus writes a new
reference value.
Caution: If you select CONST SP7, or LAST SPEED, make sure that continued operation is safe when fieldbus
communication is lost.
3019 COMM FAULT TIME 0.0…60.0 s 0.1 s 10.0 s
Sets the communication fault time used with 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC.
• Brief interruptions in the fieldbus communication are not treated as faults if they are less than the COMM FAULT TIME
value.
3021 AI1 FAULT LIMIT 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Sets a fault level for analog input 1. See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3022 AI2 FAULT LIMIT 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Sets a fault level for analog input 2. See 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
3023 WIRING FAULT 0, 1 1 1
Defines the drive response to cross wiring faults and to ground faults detected when the drive is NOT running. When
the drive is not running it monitors for:
• Improper connections of input power to the drive output (the drive can display fault 35, OUTPUT WIRING if improper
connections are detected).
• Ground faults (the drive can display fault 16, EARTH FAULT if a ground fault is detected). Also, see parameter 3017
EARTH FAULT.
0 = DISABLE – No drive response to either of the above monitoring results.
1 = ENABLE – The drive displays faults when this monitoring detects problems.
3024 CB TEMP FAULT 0, 1 1 1
Defines the drive response to control board overheating
0 = DISABLE – No drive response to overheating
1 = ENABLE – Displays Fault 37 (CB OVERTEMP) and (if running) the drive coasts to a stop.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 111

Group 31: Automatic Reset

This group defines conditions for automatic resets. An automatic reset occurs after a particular fault is
detected. The drive holds for a set delay time, then automatically restarts. You can limit the number of
resets in a specified time period, and you can set up automatic resets for a variety of faults.
Group 31: Automatic Reset
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3101 NR OF TRIALS 0…5 1 5
Sets the number of allowed automatic resets within a trial period defined by 3102 TRIAL TIME.
• If the number of automatic resets exceeds this limit (within the trial
time), the drive prevents additional automatic resets and remains
Trial time
stopped.
• Starting then requires a successful reset performed from the control Time
panel or from a source selected by 1604 FAULT RESET SEL. X X X
Example: Three faults have occurred in the trial time. The last is reset x = Automatic reset
only if the value for 3101 NR OF TRIALS is 3 or more.
3102 TRIAL TIME 1.0…600.0 s 0.1 s 30.0 s
Sets the time period used for counting and limiting the number of resets.
• See 3101 NR OF TRIALS.
3103 DELAY TIME 0.0…120.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Sets the delay time between a fault detection and attempted drive restart.
• If DELAY TIME = zero, the drive resets immediately.
3104 AR OVERCURRENT 0, 1 1 0
Sets the automatic reset for the overcurrent function on or off.
0 = DISABLE – Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE – Enables automatic reset.
• Automatically resets the fault (OVERCURRENT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3105 AR OVERVOLTAGE 0, 1 1 0
Sets the automatic reset for the overvoltage function on or off.
0 = DISABLE – Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE – Enables automatic reset.
• Automatically resets the fault (DC OVERVOLT) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3106 AR UNDERVOLTAGE 0, 1 1 0
Sets the automatic reset for the undervoltage function on or off.
0 = DISABLE – Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE – Enables automatic reset.
• Automatically resets the fault (DC UNDERVOLTAGE) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes
normal operation.
3107 AR AI<MIN 0, 1 1 0
Sets the automatic reset for the analog input less than minimum value function on or off.
0 = DISABLE – Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE – Enables automatic reset.
• Automatically resets the fault (AI<MIN) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME, and the drive resumes normal
operation.
Warning! When the analog input signal is restored, the drive may restart, even after a long stop. Make sure
that automatic, long delayed starts will not cause physical injury and/or damage equipment.
3108 AR EXTERNAL FLT 0, 1 1 0
Sets the automatic reset for external faults function on or off.
0 = DISABLE – Disables automatic reset.
1 = ENABLE – Enables automatic reset.
• Automatically resets the fault (EXTERNAL FAULT 1 or EXTERNAL FAULT 2) after the delay set by 3103 DELAY TIME,
and the drive resumes normal operation.

Start-Up
112 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 32: Supervision

This group defines supervision for up to three signals from Group 01, Operating Data. Supervision
monitors a specified parameter and energizes a relay output if the parameter passes a defined limit.
Use Group 14, Relay Outputs, to define the relay and whether the relay activates when the signal is too
low or too high.
Group 32: Supervision
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM 101…199 1 103
Selects the first supervised parameter.
• Must be a parameter number from Group 01 Operating Data.
• If the supervised parameter passes a limit, a relay output is energized.
• The supervision limits are defined in this group.
• The relay outputs are defined in Group 14 Relay Outputs (definition also specifies which supervision limit is
monitored).
LO ≤ HI
Value of supervised parameter
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when
LO≤HI. HI (3203)
• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 LO (3202)
RELAY OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV 2
OVER. Use for monitoring when/if the supervised signal t
exceeds a given limit. The relay remains active until the
supervised value drops below the low limit. Case A
• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 Energized (1)
RELAY OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV 1 UNDER or SUPRV 2 t
UNDER. Use for monitoring when/if the supervised signal
0
falls below a given limit. The relay remains active until the Case B
supervised value rises above the high limit. Energized (1)
Note! Case LO ≤ HI represents a normal hysteresis. t
0
LO > HI
Operating data supervision using relay outputs, when
Value of Supervised Parameter Active Limit
LO>HI.
The lowest limit (HI 3203) is active initially, and remains
LO (3202)
active until the supervised parameter goes above the
highest limit (LO 3202), making that limit the active limit. HI (3203)
That limit remains active until the supervised parameter t
goes below the lowest limit (HI 3203), making that limit
active. Case A
• Case A = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402
RELAY OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 OVER or SUPRV2
Energized (1)
t
OVER. Initially the relay is de-energized. It is energized 0
whenever the supervised parameter goes above the
active limit. Case B
• Case B = Parameter 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 (or 1402 Energized (1)
RELAY OUTPUT 2, etc.) value is SUPRV1 UNDER or SUPRV2 t
UNDER. Initially the relay is energized. It is de-energized
0
whenever the supervised parameter goes below the
active limit.
Note! Case LO>HI represents a special hysteresis with two separate supervision limits.
3202 SUPERV 1 LIM LO Depends on selection - 60.0 Hz
Sets the low limit for the first supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3203 SUPERV 1 LIM HI Depends on selection - 60.0 Hz
Sets the high limit for the first supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM 101…199 1 104
Selects the second supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 113

Group 32: Supervision

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3205 SUPERV 2 LIM LO Depends on selection 4.6 A
Sets the low limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.
3206 SUPERV 2 LIM HI Depends on selection 4.6 A
Sets the high limit for the second supervised parameter. See 3204 SUPERV 2 PARAM above.
3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM 101…199 1 105
Selects the third supervised parameter. See 3201 SUPERV 1 PARAM above.
3208 SUPERV 3 LIM LO Depends on selection 100.0%
Sets the low limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above.
3209 SUPERV 3 LIM HI Depends on selection 100.0%
Sets the high limit for the third supervised parameter. See 3207 SUPERV 3 PARAM above.

Start-Up
114 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 33: Information

This group provides access to information about the drive’s current programs: versions and test date.

Group 33: Information

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3301 FW VERSION 0000…FFFF hex 1 Firmware ver.
Contains the version of the drive’s firmware.
3302 LP VERSION 0000…FFFF hex 1 0
Contains the version of the loading package.
3303 TEST DATE yy.ww 1 0
Contains the test date (yy.ww).
3304 DRIVE RATING - - -
Indicates the drive’s current and voltage rating. The format is XXXY, where:
• XXX =The nominal current rating of the drive in amps. If present, an “A” indicates a decimal point in the rating for
the current. For example XXX = 8A8 indicates a nominal current rating of 8.8 Amps.
• Y = The voltage rating of the drive, where Y = :
• 2 indicates a 208…240 Volt rating.
• 4 indicates a 380…480 Volt rating. .
• 6 indicates a 500…600 Volt rating.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 115

Group 34: Panel Display Process Variables

This group defines the content for control panel display (middle area), when the
control panel is in the output mode.
Group 34: Panel Display Process Variables
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3401 SIGNAL1 PARAM 100…199 1 103
Selects the first parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. P 3405
• Definitions in this group define display content when the control panel P 3404
is in the control mode.
• Any Group 01 parameter number can be selected. P 0137
• Using the following parameters, the display value can be scaled,
converted to convenient units, and/or displayed as a bar graph. P 0138
• The figure identifies selections made by parameters in this group.
P 0139
100 = not selected – First parameter not displayed.
101…199 = Displays parameter 0101…0199. If parameter does not D00001

exist, the display shows “n.a.”.

3402 SIGNAL1 MIN Depends on selection - 0.0 Hz
Defines the minimum expected value for the first display parameter. Display
Use parameters 3402, 3403, 3406, and 3407, for example to convert a Value
Group 01 parameter, such as 0102 SPEED (in rpm) to the speed of a
conveyor driven by the motor (in ft/min). For such a conversion, the P 3407
source values in the figure are the min. and max. motor speed, and the
display values are the corresponding min. and max. conveyor speed. Use
parameter 3405 to select the proper units for the display.
P 3406
Note! Selecting units does not convert values.

P3402 P 3403
Source Value
3403 SIGNAL1 MAX Depends on selection - 600.0 Hz
Defines the maximum expected value for the first display parameter.
3404 OUTPUT1 DSP FORM 0…9 1 9
Defines the decimal point location for the first display parameter.
1…7 – Defines the decimal point location. 3404 Value Display Range
• Enter the number of digits desired to the right of the decimal 0 +3 -32768…+32767
point. 1 + 3.1 (Signed)
• See table for example using pi (3.14159). 2 + 3.14
8 = BAR METER – Specifies a bar meter display. 3 + 3.142
9 = DIRECT – Decimal point location and units of measure are
4 3 0…65535
identical to the source signal. See Group 01 parameter listing in
5 3.1 (Unsigned)
“Complete Parameter List” for resolution (which indicates the
decimal point location) and the units of measure. 6 3.14
7 3.142

Start-Up
116 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 34: Panel Display Process Variables

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3405 OUTPUT1 DSP UNIT 0…127 1 -
Selects the units used with the first display parameter.
0 = NOT SEL 9 = °C 18 = MWh 27 = ft 36 = l/s 45 = Pa 54 = lb/m 63 = Mrev
1=A 10 = lb ft 19 = m/s 28 = MGD 37 = l/min 46 = GPS 55 = lb/h 64 = d
2=V 11 = mA 20 = m3/h 29 = inHg 38 = l/h 47 = gal/s 56 = FPS 65 = inWC
3 = Hz 12 = mV 21 = dm3/s 30 = FPM 39 = m3/s 48 = gal/m 57 = ft/s 66 = m/min
4=% 13 = kW 22 = bar 31 = kb/s 40 = m3/m 49 = gal/h 58 = inH2O
5=s 14 = W 23 = kPa 32 = kHz 41 = kg/s 50 = ft3/s 59 = in wg
6=h 15 = kWh 24 = GPM 33 = Ohm 42 = kg/m 51 = ft3/m 60 = ft wg
7 = rpm 16 = °F 25 = PSI 34 = ppm 43 = kg/h 52 = ft3/h 61 = lbsi
8 = kh 17 = hp 26 = CFM 35 = pps 44 = mbar 53 = lb/s 62 = ms

117 = %ref 119 = %dev 121 = % SP 123 = Iout 125 = Fout 127 = Vdc
118 = %act 120 = % LD 122 = %FBK 124 = Vout 126 = Tout

3406 OUTPUT1 MIN Depends on selection 1 -

Sets the minimum value displayed for the first display parameter.
3407 OUTPUT1 MAX Depends on selection 1 -
Sets the maximum value displayed for the first display parameter.
3408 SIGNAL 2 PARAM 100…199 1 104
Selects the second parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.
3409 SIGNAL 2 MIN Depends on selection 1 -
Defines the minimum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3402.
3410 SIGNAL 2 MAX Depends on selection 1 -
Defines the maximum expected value for the second display parameter. See parameter 3403.
3411 OUTPUT 2 DSP FORM 0…8 1 -
Defines the decimal point location for the second display parameter. See parameter 3404.
3412 OUTPUT 2 DSP UNIT -128…127 1 -
Selects the units used with the second display parameter. See parameter 3405.
3413 OUTPUT 2 MIN Depends on selection 1 -
Sets the minimum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3406.
3414 OUTPUT 2 MAX Depends on selection 1 -
Sets the maximum value displayed for the second display parameter. See parameter 3407.
3415 SIGNAL 3 PARAM 100…199 1 120
Selects the third parameter (by number) displayed on the control panel. See parameter 3401.
3416 SIGNAL 3 MIN Depends on selection 1 -
Defines the minimum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter 3402.
3417 SIGNAL 3 MAX Depends on selection 1 -
Defines the maximum expected value for the third display parameter. See parameter 3403.
3418 OUTPUT 3 DSP FORM 0…8 1 -
Defines the decimal point location for the third display parameter. See parameter 3404.
3419 OUTPUT 3 DSP UNIT -128…127 1 -
Selects the units used with the third display parameter. See parameter 3405.
3420 OUTPUT 3 MIN Depends on selection 1 -
Sets the minimum value displayed for the third display parameter. See parameter 3406.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 117

Group 34: Panel Display Process Variables

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3421 OUTPUT 3 MAX Depends on selection 1 -
Sets the maximum value displayed for the third display parameter. See parameter 3407.

Start-Up
118 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 35: Motor Temp Meas

This group defines the detection and reporting for a particular potential fault – motor
overheating, as detected by a temperature sensor. Typical connections are defined
below.
One Sensor

AI1
Motor
AGND

AO1

AGND
10 nF

Three Sensors
AI1

Motor AGND

T T T
AO1

AGND

10 nF

Warning! IEC 60664 requires double or reinforced insulation between live parts
and the surface of accessible parts of electrical equipment which are either
non-conductive or conductive but not connected to the protective earth.

To fulfil the insulation requirement, connect a thermistor (and other similar

components) to the drive’s control terminals using any of these alternatives:
• Separate the thermistor from live parts of the motor with double reinforced
insulation.
• Protect all circuits connected to the drive’s digital and analog inputs. Protect
against contact, and insulate from other low voltage circuits with basic insulation
(rated for the same voltage level as the drive’s main circuit).
• Use an external thermistor relay. The relay insulation must be rated for the same
voltage level as the drive’s main circuit.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 119

The figure below shows alternate thermistor connections. At the motor end the cable
shield should be earthed through a 10 nF capacitor. If this is not possible, leave the
shield unconnected.
Thermistor
relay
OMIO board

DI6
+24 VDC

T
Motor

Thermistor (0) OMIO board

DI6
+24 VDC
T 10 nF
Motor

For other faults, or for anticipating motor overheating using a model, see Group 30:
Fault Functions.
Group 35: Motor Temp Meas
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3501 SENSOR TYPE 0…6 1 0
Identifies the type of motor temperature sensor used, PT100 (°C) or PTC (ohms).
See parameters 1501 and 1507.
0 = NONE
1 = 1 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses one PT 100 sensor.
• Analog output AO1 or AO2 feeds constant current through the sensor.
• The sensor resistance increases as the motor temperature rises, as does the voltage over the sensor.
• The temperature measurement function reads the voltage through analog input AI1 or AI2 and converts it to
degrees centigrade.
2 = 2 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses two PT 100 sensors.
• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
3 = 3 x PT100 – Sensor configuration uses three PT 100 sensors.
• Operation is the same as for above 1 x PT100.
4 = PTC – Sensor configuration uses one PTC. Ohm
• The analog output feeds a constant current through the sensor. 4000
• The resistance of the sensor increases sharply as the motor temperature
rises over the PTC reference temperature (Tref), as does the voltage over
the resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage 1330
through analog input AI1 and converts it into ohms.
• The figure shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of 550
the motor operating temperature.
Temperature Resistance
100
Normal 0 … 1.5 kohm
Excessive > 4 kohm

Start-Up
120 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 35: Motor Temp Meas

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
5 = THERMISTOR (0) – Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect either a PTC sensor or a normally closed
thermistor relay to a digital input. The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table.
• When the digital input is ‘0’ the motor is overheated.
• See the figures in the introduction to this Group.
6 = THERMISTOR (1) – Sensor configuration uses a thermistor.
• Motor thermal protection is activated through a digital input. Connect a normally open thermistor relay to a digital
input. The drive reads the digital input states as shown in the above table.
• When the digital input is ‘1’ the motor is overheated.
See the figures in the introduction to this Group.
3502 INPUT SELECTION 1…8 1 1
Defines the input used for the temperature sensor.
1 = AI1 – PT100 and PTC.
2 = AI2 – PT100 and PTC.
3…8 = DI1…DI6 – Thermistor
3503 ALARM LIMIT -10...200 °C / 1 110 °C /
0...5000 Ohm / 1500 Ohm /
0…1 0
Defines the alarm limit for motor temperature measurement.
• At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays an alarm (2010, MOTOR OVERTEMP)
For thermistors:
0 = de-activated
1 = activated
3504 FAULT LIMIT -10...200 °C / 1 130 °C /
0...5000 Ohm / 4000 Ohm /
0…1 0
Defines the fault limit for motor temperature measurement.
• At motor temperatures above this limit, the drive displays a fault (9, MOTOR OVERTEMP) and stops the drive.
For thermistors:
0 = de-activated
1 = activated

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 121

Group 36: Timer Functions

This group defines the timer functions. The timer functions include:
• Four daily start and stop times.
• Four weekly start, stop and boost times.
• Four timers for collecting selected periods together.
A timer can be connected to multiple time periods and a time period can be in
multiple timers.

Time Period 1
3602 START TIME 1
3603 STOP TIME 1
3604 START DAY 1
3605 STOP DAY 1

Time Period 2
Timer 1
3606 START TIME 2
3607 STOP TIME 2 3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC
3608 START DAY 2
3609 STOP DAY 2 Timer 2
3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC
Time Period 3
3610 START TIME 3 Timer 3
3611 STOP TIME 3 3628 TIMER FUNC3 SRC
3612 START DAY 3
3613 STOP DAY 3
Timer 4
3629 TIMER FUNC4 SRC
Time Period 4
3614 START TIME 4
3615 STOP TIME 4
3616 START DAY 4
3617 STOP DAY 4

Booster
3622 BOOSTER SEL
3623 BOOSTER TIME

A parameter can be connected to only one time.

Timer1 1001 EXT 1 COMMANDS

3626 TIMER FUNC1 SRC 1002 EXT 2 COMMANDS
1102 EXT 1/2 SEL
1201 CONST SPEED SEL
Timer2 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1…1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3
3627 TIMER FUNC2 SRC 1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4…1412 RELAY OUTPUT 6
4027 PID PARAM SET
8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE

Start-Up
122 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 36: Timer Functions

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3601 TIMERS ENABLE -6…7 1 0
Selects the source for the timer enable signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Timed functions are disabled.
1 = DI1- Defines digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal.
• The digital input must be activated for timed functions enable.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the timed function enable signal.
7 = ENABLED – Timed functions are enabled.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the timed function enable signal.
• This digital input must be de-activated for timed function enable.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the timed function enable signal.
3602 START TIME 1 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 12:00:00
Defines the daily start time.
• The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds.
• If parameter value is 07:00:00, then the period will 20:30:00
be activated at 7 a.m.
• The figure shows multiple periods on different 17:00:00
weekdays.
15:00:00
When editing parameters to set times:
• Use arrow keys to select desired hour setting. 13:00:00
• Press NEXT to advance to minutes.
• Use arrow keys to select desired minutes setting. 12:00:00
• Press NEXT to advance to minutes.
• Use arrow keys to select desired seconds setting. 10:30:00
• Press SAVE.
09:00:00

00:00:00
Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Sun

3603 STOP TIME 1 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 12:00:00

Defines the daily stop time.
• The time can be changed in steps of 2 seconds.
• If the parameter value is 09:00:00, then the period will be deactivated at 9 a.m.
3604 START DAY 1 1…7 1 1
Defines the weekly start day.
1 = Monday…7 = Sunday.
• If parameter value is 1, then period 1 weekly is active from Monday midnight (00:00:00).
3605 STOP DAY 1 1…7 1 1
Defines weekly stop day.
1 = Monday…7 = Sunday.
• If parameter value is 5, then timer 1 weekly will be deactivated on Friday midnight (23:59:58).
3606 START TIME 2 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 12:00:00
Defines timer2 daily start time.
• See parameter 3602
3607 STOP TIME 2 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 12:00:00
Defines timer2 daily stop time.
• See parameter 3603
3608 START DAY 2 1…7 1 1
Defines timer 2 weekly start day.
• See parameter 3604

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 123

Group 36: Timer Functions

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3609 STOP DAY 2 1…7 1 1
Defines timer 2 weekly stop day.
• See parameter 3605
3610 START TIME 3 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 12:00:00
Defines timer 3 daily start time.
• See parameter 3602
3611 STOP TIME 3 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 12:00:00
Defines timer 3 daily stop time.
• See parameter 3603
3612 START DAY 3 1…7 1 1
Defines timer 3 weekly start day.
• See parameter 3604
3613 STOP DAY 3 1…7 1 1
Defines timer 3 weekly stop day.
• See parameter 3605
3614 START TIME 4 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 12:00:00
Defines timer 4 daily start time.
• See parameter 3602
3615 STOP TIME 4 00:00:00…23:59:58 2s 12:00:00
Defines timer 4 daily stop time.
• See parameter 3603
3616 START DAY 4 1…7 1 1
Defines timer 4 weekly start day.
• See parameter 3604
3617 STOP DAY 4 1…7 1 1
Defines timer 4 weekly stop day.
• See parameter 3605
3622 BOOSTER SEL -6…6 1 0
Selects the source for the booster signal.
0 = NOT SEL – Booster signal is disabled.
1 = DI1 – Defines DI1 as the booster signal.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines DI2…DI6 as the booster signal.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the booster signal.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the booster signal.
3623 BOOSTER TIME 00:00:00-23:59:58 2s 00:00:00
Defines the booster ON time. Time is started
when booster sel signal is released. If
Booster active
parameter range is 01:30:00, then booster is
active for 1 hour and 30 minutes after
activation DI is released.
Activation DI

Booster time

Start-Up
124 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 36: Timer Functions

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3626 TIMER 1 SRC 0…31 1 0
Defines the time periods used by the timer.
0 = NOT SEL- No timers have been selected.
1 = P1 – Time Period 1 selected in the timer.
2 = P2 – Time Period 2 selected in the timer.
3 = P2 + P1 – Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer.
4 = P3 – Time Period 3 selected in the timer.
5 = P3 + P1 – Time Periods 1 and 3 selected in the timer.
6 = P3 + P2 – Time Periods 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
7 = P3 + P2 + P1 – Time Periods 1, 2 and 3 selected in the timer.
8 = P4 – Time Period 4 selected in the timer.
9 = P4 + P1 – Time Periods 4 and 1 selected in the timer.
10 = P4 + P2 – Time Periods 4 and 2 selected in the timer.
11 = P4 + P2 + P1 – Time Periods 4, 2 and 1 selected in the timer.
12 = P4 + P3 – Time Periods 4 and 3 selected in the timer.
13 = P4 + P3 + P1 – Time Periods 4, 3 and 1 selected in the timer.
14 = P4 + P3 + P2 – Time Periods 4, 3 and 2 selected in the timer.
15 = P4 + P3 + P2 + P1 – Time Periods 4, 3, 2 and 1 selected in the timer.
16 = BOOSTER (B) – Booster selected in the timer.
17 = B + P1 – Booster and Time Period 1 selected in the timer.
18 = B + P2 – Booster and Time Period 2 selected in the timer.
19 = B + P2 + P1 – Booster and Time Periods 1 and 2 selected in the timer.
20 = B + P3 – Booster and Time Period 3 selected in the timer function.
21 = B + P3 + P1 – Booster and Time Period 3 and 1 selected in the timer.
22 = B + P3 + P2 – Booster and Time Periods 3 and 2 selected in the timer.
23 = B + P3 + P2 + P1 – Booster and Time Periods 3, 2 and 1 selected in the timer.
24 = B + P4 – Booster and Time Periods 4 selected in the timer.
25 = B + P4 + P1 – Booster and Time Period 4 and Timer 1 selected in the timer.
26 = B + P4 + P2 – Booster and Time Period 4 and 2 selected in the timer.
27 = B + P4 + P2 + P1 – Booster and Time Periods 4, 2 and 1 selected in the timer.
28 = B + P4 + P3 – Booster and Time Periods 4 and 3.
29 = B + P4 + P3 + P1 – Booster and Time Periods 4, 3 and 1 selected in the timer.
30 = B + P4 + P3 + P2 – Booster and Time Periods 4, 3 and 2 selected.
31 = B + P4 + P3 + P2 + P1 – Booster and Time Periods 4, 3, 2 and 1 selected.
3627 TIMER 2 SRC 0…31 1 0
• See parameter 3626.
3628 TIMER 3 SRC 0…31 1 0
• See parameter 3626.
3629 TIMER 4 SRC 0…31 1 0
• See parameter 3626.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 125

Group 40: Process PID Set 1

This group defines a set of parameters used with the Process PID (PID1) controller.
Typically only parameters in this group are needed.
PID Controller – Basic Set-up
In PID control mode, the drive compares a reference signal (setpoint) to an actual
signal (feedback), and automatically adjusts the speed of the drive to match the two
signals. The difference between the two signals is the error value.
Typically PID control mode is used, when the speed of a fan or pump needs to be
controlled based on pressure, flow or temperature. In most cases – when there is
only 1 transducer signal wired to the ACH550 – only parameter group 40 is needed.
A Schematic of setpoint/feedback signal flow using parameter group 40 is
presented.
Panel REF1 P1101

Panel REF 2 REF1

P1106
0…17 REF2
500% PID Setpoint
Panel REF2 19
-500%
AI P4016 G40
Current PID1 PANEL
Torque
Power Hand/Auto
Selection
AI P4017 P4014 P4015 HAND
Current
PID Act Value
Torque AUTO
Power

Panel REF 1 P1103 P1102

G12 P1104
DI Const P1105 EXT 1
AI Speed
Comm REF 1 EXT 2
Panel REF 2 P1106
G12
DI Const
AI Speed
Comm REF 2
P1106
Panel REF2 P4010 PID Setpoint 0…17 P1107
AI1 P4012
AI2 P1108
P4013 19
Comm
Internal G40
AI P4016 PID1
Current PID1 Out
Torque
Power P4014 P4015
AI P4017 PID Act Value
Current
Torque
Power

Note! In order to activate and use the PID controller Parameter 1106 must be set to
value 19.

Start-Up
126 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

PID Controller – Advanced

ACH550 has 2 separate PID Controllers:
• Process PID (PID1) and
• External PID (PID2)
Process PID (PID1) has 2 separate sets of parameters:
• Process PID (PID1) SET1, defined in Group 40 and
• Process PID (PID1) SET2, defined in Group 41
You can select between the 2 different sets by using parameter 4027.
Typically two different PID-Controller sets are used when the load of the motor
changes considerably from one situation to another.
You can use External PID (PID2), defined in Group 42, in 2 different ways:
• Instead of using additional PID-controller hardware, you can set outputs of the
ACH550 to control a field instrument like a damper or a valve. In this case, set
Parameter 4230 to value 0. (0 is the default value.)
• You can use External PID (PID2) as an additional PID-controller to Process PID
(PID1) to trim or fine-tune the speed of the ACH550.
An example of the trimming is a return fan that follows the speed of the supply fan.
As the return fan needs to run faster or slower then the supply fan in order to create
under- or overpressure, correction factors to the supply fan speed are needed. Use
External PID (PID2) in the return fan drive to provide these corrections.
Group 40: Process PID Set 1
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4001 GAIN 0.1…100.0 0.1 2.5
Defines the PID Controller’s gain.
• The setting range is 0.1… 100.
• At 0.1, the PID Controller output changes one-tenth as much as the error value.
• At 100, the PID Controller output changes one hundred times as much as the error value.
Use the proportional gain and integration time values to adjust the responsiveness of the system.
• A low value for proportional gain and a high value for integral time ensures stable operation, but provides sluggish
response.
If the proportional gain value is too large or the integral time too short, the system can become unstable.
Procedure:
• Initially, set:
• 4001 GAIN = 0.1.
• 4002 INTEGRATION TIME = 20 seconds.
• Start the system and see if it reaches the set point quickly while maintaining stable operation. If not, increase GAIN
(4001) until the actual signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be necessary to start and stop the drive
to induce this oscillation.
• Reduce GAIN (4001) until the oscillation stops.
• Set GAIN (4001) to 0.4 to 0.6 times the above value.
• Decrease the INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the feedback signal (or drive speed) oscillates constantly. It may be
necessary to start and stop the drive to induce this oscillation.
• Increase INTEGRATION TIME (4002) until the oscillation stops.
• Set INTEGRATION TIME (4002) to 1.15 to 1.5 times the above value.
• If the feedback signal contains high frequency noise, increase the value of Parameter 1303 FILTER AI1 or 1306
FILTER AI2 until the noise is filtered from the signal.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 127

Group 40: Process PID Set 1

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4002 INTEGRATION TIME 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
Defines the PID Controller’s integration time. A
Integration time is, by definition, is the time required to increase
the output by the error value: B
• Error value is constant and 100%. D (P 4001 = 10)
• Gain = 1.
• Integration time of 1 second denotes that a 100% change is C (P 4001 = 1)
achieved in 1 second.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables integration (I-part of controller). t
0.1…3600.0 = Integration time (seconds).
See 4001 for adjustment procedure. P 4002
A = Error
B = Error value step
C = Controller output with Gain = 1
D = Controller output with Gain = 10
4003 DERIVATION TIME 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Defines the PID Controller’s derivation time. Error Process Error Value
• You can add the derivative of the error to the PID controller output.
The derivative is the error value’s rate of change. For example, if the 100%
process error value changes linearly, the derivative is a constant
added to the PID controller output.
• The error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter. The time constant of
the filter is defined by parameter 4004 PID DERIV FILTER.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the error-derivative part of the PID controller
output 0% t
0.1…10.0 = Derivation time (seconds)

PID output D-part of controller output

Gain
P 401
t
P 4003
4004 PID DERIV FILTER 0.0…10.0 s 0.1 s 1.0 s
Defines the filter time constant for the error-derivative part of the PID controller output.
• Before being added to the PID controller output, the error-derivative is filtered with a 1-pole filter.
• Increasing the filter time smooths the error-derivative, reducing noise.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the error-derivative filter.
0.1…10.0 = Filter time constant (seconds).
4005 ERROR VALUE INV 0, 1 - 0
Selects either a normal or inverted relationship between the feedback signal and the drive speed.
0 = NO – Normal, a decrease in feedback signal increases drive speed. Error = Ref - Fbk
1 = YES – Inverted, a decrease in feedback signal decreases drive speed. Error = Fbk - Ref
4006 UNITS 0…31 - 4
Selects the unit for the PID controller actual values. (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130, and 0132).
• See parameter 3405 for list of available units.
4007 UNIT SCALE 0…4 1 1
Defines the decimal point location in PID controller actual values.
• Enter the decimal point location counting in from the right of the entry. 4007 Value Entry Display
• See table for example using pi (3.14159). 0 0003 3
1 0031 3.1
2 0314 3.14
3 3142 3.142

Start-Up
128 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 40: Process PID Set 1

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4008 0 % VALUE -1000.0…1000.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Defines (together with the next parameter) the scaling applied to the Units (P4006)
PID controller’s actual values (PID1 parameters 0128, 0130, and +1000%
Scale (P4007)
0132).
• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
P 4009

P 4008

0% 100%
-1000% Internal scale (%)
4009 100 % VALUE -1000.0…1000.0% 0.1% 100.0%
Defines (together with the previous parameter) the scaling applied to the PID controller’s actual values.
• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
4010 SET POINT SEL 0…19 1 1
Defines the reference signal source for the PID controller.
• Parameter has no significance when the PID regulator is by-passed (see 8121 REG BYPASS CTRL).
0 = KEYPAD – Control panel provides reference.
1 = AI1 – Analog input 1 provides reference.
2 = AI2 – Analog input 2 provides reference.
8 = COMM – Fieldbus provides reference.
9 = COMM + AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog Input
Reference Correction below.
10 = COMM * AI1 – Defines a fieldbus and analog input 1 (AI1) combination as the reference source. See Analog
Input Reference Correction below.
11 = DI3U, 4D(RNC) – Digital inputs, acting as a motor potentiometer control, provide reference.
• DI3 increases the speed (the U stands for “up”)
• DI4 decreases the reference (the D stands for “down”).
• Parameter 2205 ACCELER TIME 2 controls the reference signal’s rate of change.
• R = Stop command resets the reference to zero.
• NC = Reference value is not copied.
12 = DI3U, 4D(NC) – Same as DI3U, 4D(RNC) above, except:
• Stop command does not reset reference to zero. At restart the motor ramps up, at the selected acceleration rate,
to the stored reference.
13 = DI5U, 6D(NC) – Same as DI3U, 4D(NC) above, except:
• Uses digital inputs DI5 and DI6.
14 = AI1 + AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.
15 = AI1 * AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.
16 = AI1 - AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.
17 = AI1/AI2 – Defines an analog input 1 (AI1) and analog input 2 (AI2) combination as the reference source. See
Analog Input Reference Correction below.
19 = INTERNAL – A constant value set using parameter 4011 provides reference.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 129

Group 40: Process PID Set 1

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
Analog Input Reference Correction
Parameter values 9, 10, and 14…17 use the formula in the following table.
Value Setting AI reference is calculated as following:

C+B C value + (B value - 50% of reference value)

C*B C value * (B value / 50% of reference value)
C-B (C value + 50% of reference value) - B value
C/B (C value * 50% of reference value) / B value
Where:
• C = Main Reference value ( = COMM for values 9, 10 and = AI1 for values 14…17).
• B = Correcting reference ( = AI1 for values 9, 10 and = AI2 for values 14…17).
Example:
The figure shows the reference source curves for 120
value settings 9, 10, and 14…17, where: 17 (/)
• C = 25%. 100
• P 4012 SETPOINT MIN = 0.
• P 4013 SETPOINT MAX = 0. 80
• B varies along the horizontal axis.
60 9, 14 (+)

40 10, 15 (*)

20
16 (-)
0
0 100% B
4011 INTERNAL SETPNT -1000.0…1000.0% 0.1% 40.0%
Sets a constant value used for the process reference.
• Units and scale are defined by parameters 4006 and 4007.
4012 SETPOINT MIN -500.0%…500.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Sets the minimum value for the reference signal source. See parameter 4010.
4013 SETPOINT MAX -500.0%…500.0% 0.1% 100.0%
Sets the maximum value for the reference signal source. See parameter 4010.
4014 FBK SEL 1…10 1 1
Defines the PID controller feedback (actual signal).
• You can define a combination of two actual values (ACT1 and ACT2) as the feedback signal.
• Use parameter 4016 to define the source for actual value 1 (ACT1).
• Use parameter 4017 to define the source for actual value 2 (ACT2).
1 = ACT1 – Actual value 1 (ACT1) provides the feedback signal.
2 = ACT1-ACT2 – ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
3 = ACT1+ACT2 – ACT1 plus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
4 = ACT1*ACT2 – ACT1 times ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
5 = ACT1/ACT2 – ACT1 divided by ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
6 = MIN (A1, A2) – The smaller of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
7 = MAX (A1, A2) – The greater of ACT1 or ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
8 = SQRT (A1-A2) – Square root of the value for ACT1 minus ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
9 = SQA1 + SQA2 – Square root of ACT1 plus the square root of ACT2 provides the feedback signal.
10 = SQRT (ACT1) – Square root of ACT1 provides the feedback signal.

Start-Up
130 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 40: Process PID Set 1

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4015 FBK MULTIPLIER -32.768…32.767 0.001 0.000
Defines an extra multiplier for the PID FBK value defined by parameter 4014.
• Used mainly in applications where the flow is calculated from the pressure difference.
0 = NOT USED.
-32.768…32.767 = Multiplier applied to the signal defined by parameter 4014 FBK SEL.

Example: FBK = Multiplier × A1 – A2

4016 ACT1 INPUT 1…5 1 2
Defines the source for actual value 1 (ACT1).
1 = AI 1 – Uses analog input 1 for ACT1.
2 = AI 2 – Uses analog input 2 for ACT1.
3 = Current – Uses current for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = 0 current
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal current
4 = Torque – Uses torque for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = -2 x nominal torque
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal torque
5 = Power – Uses power for ACT1, scaled so:
• Min ACT1 = -2 x nominal power
• Max ACT1 = 2 x nominal power
4017 ACT2 INPUT 1…5 1 2
Defines the source for actual value 2 (ACT2).
1 = AI 1 – Uses analog input 1 for ACT2.
2 = AI 2 – Uses analog input 2 for ACT2.
3 = Current – Uses current for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = 0 current
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal current
4 = Torque – Uses torque for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = -2 x nominal torque
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal torque
5 = Power – Uses power for ACT2, scaled so:
• Min ACT2 = -2 x nominal power
• Max ACT2 = 2 x nominal power
4018 ACT1 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
Sets the minimum value for ACT1.
• Used with analog input min/max settings (e.g. 1301 MINIMUM AI1, 1302 MAXIMUM AI1).
• Scales analog inputs used as actual values.
• See figure: A= Normal; B = Inversion (ACT1 MINIMUM > ACT1 MAXIMUM)
ACT1 (%) B
ACT1 (%) A
P 4018
P 4019

P 4018 P 4019

P 1301 P 1302
P 1301 P 1302
Analog input signal
Analog input signal
4019 ACT1 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
Sets the maximum value for ACT1.
• See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
4020 ACT2 MINIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 0%
Sets the minimum value for ACT2.
• See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 131

Group 40: Process PID Set 1

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4021 ACT2 MAXIMUM -1000…1000% 1% 100%
Sets the maximum value for ACT2.
• See 4018 ACT1 MINIMUM.
4022 SLEEP SELECTION -6…7 - 0
Defines the control for the PID sleep function.
0 = NOT SEL– Disables the PID sleep control function.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• Activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
• De-activating the digital input restores PID control.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• See DI1 above.
7 = INTERNAL – Defines the output rpm/frequency, process reference, and process actual value as the control for the
PID sleep function. Refer to parameters 4025 WAKE-UP DEV and 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• De-activating the digital input activates the sleep function.
• Activating the digital input restores PID control.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for the PID sleep function.
• See DI1(INV) above.
4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL 0.0…120.0 Hz / 0.1 Hz / 0.0 Hz
0…7200 rpm 1 rpm
Sets the motor speed / frequency that enables the PID sleep function – a motor speed / frequency below this level,
for at least the time period 4024 PID SLEEP DELAY enables the PID sleep function (stopping the drive).
• Requires 4022 = 7 INTERNAL.
• See figure: A = PID output level; B = PID process feedback.
t < P 4024 A

t > P 4024

P 4023
t

B
C
Setpoint
P 4025
P 4026
Setpoint
P 4025 }4005 = 1
t P 4025 }4005
D
=0

Stop t
Start
4024 PID SLEEP DELAY 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s 60.0 s
Sets the time delay for the PID sleep function – a motor speed / frequency below 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL for at least
this time period enables the PID sleep function (stopping the drive).
• See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above.

Start-Up
132 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 40: Process PID Set 1

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4025 WAKE-UP DEVIATION 0.0…1000% 0.1 0.0
Defines the wake-up deviation – a deviation from the setpoint greater than this value, for at least the time period
4026 WAKE-UP DELAY, re-starts the PID controller.
• Parameters 4006 and 4007 define the units and scale.
• Parameter 4005 = 0, E
Wake-up level = Setpoint – Wake-up deviation.
• Parameter 4005 = 1, C
Wake-up level = Setpoint + Wake-up deviation. P 4025
• Wake-up level can be above or below setpoint. P 4026
Setpoint
See figures:
• C = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 1 P 4025
D
• D = Wake-up level when parameter 4005 = 0 t
• E = Feedback is above wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026
WAKE-UP DELAY – PID function wakes up. P 4026
• F = Feedback is below wake-up level and lasts longer than 4026
F
WAKE-UP DELAY – PID function wakes up.
4026 WAKE-UP DELAY 0.00…60.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s
Defines the wake-up delay –
a deviation from the setpoint greater than 4025 WAKE-UP DEVIATION, for at least this time period, re-starts the PID
controller.
• See 4023 PID SLEEP LEVEL above.
4027 PID 1 PARAM SET -6…11 1 0
Defines how selections are made between PID Set 1 and PID Set 2.
PID parameter set selection. When set 1 is selected, parameters 4001…4026 are used.
When set 2 is selected, parameters 4101…4126 are used.
0 = SET 1 – PID Set 1 (parameters 4001…4026) is active.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection.
• Activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.
• De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID Set selection.
• See DI1 above.
7 = SET 2 – PID Set 2 (parameters 4101…4126) is active.
8…11 = TIMER 1…4 – Defines the Timer as the control for the PID Set selection (Timer de-activated = PID Set 1;
Timer activated = PID Set 2)
See parameter Group 36: Timer Functions.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for PID Set selection.
• Activating the digital input selects PID Set 1.
• De-activating the digital input selects PID Set 2.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for PID Set selection.
• See DI1(INV) above.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 133

Group 41: Process PID Set 2

This group defines second set of parameters used with the Process PID (PID1)
controller.
The operation of parameters 4101…4126 is analogous with Process PID set 1
(PID1) parameters 4001…4026.
PID parameter set 2 can be selected by parameter 4027 PID 1 PARAM SET.
Group 41: Process PID Set 2
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4101 See 4001 …4026
…
4126

Start-Up
134 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 42: External PID

This group defines the parameters used for the second PID controller (PID2) of
ACH550
The operation of parameters 4201…4221 is analogous with Process PID set 1
(PID1) parameters 4001…4021.
Group 42: External PID
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4201 See 4001 …4021
…
4221
4228 ACTIVATE -6…12 - 0
Defines the source for enabling the external PID function.
• Requires 4230 TRIM MODE = 0 NOT SEL.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables external PID control.
1 = DI1 – Defines digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the digital input enables external PID control.
• De-activating the digital input disables external PID control.
2…6 = DI2…DI6 – Defines digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• See DI1 above.
7 = DRIVE RUN – Defines the start command as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the start command (drive is running) enables external PID control.
8 = ON – Defines the power-on as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating power to the drive enables external PID control.
9…12 = TIMER 1…4 – Defines the Timer as the control for enabling external PID control (Timer active enables
external PID control).
• See parameter Group 36: Timer Functions.
-1 = DI1(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI1 as the control for enabling external PID control.
• Activating the digital input disables external PID control.
• De-activating the digital input enables external PID control.
-2…-6 = DI2(INV)…DI6(INV) – Defines an inverted digital input DI2…DI6 as the control for enabling external PID
control.
• See DI1(INV) above.
4229 OFFSET 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Defines the offset for the PID output.
• When PID is activated, output starts from this value.
• When PID is deactivated, output resets to this value.
• Parameter is not active when 4230 TRIM MODE not = 0 (trim mode is not active).
4230 TRIM MODE 0…2 1 0
Selects the type of trim, if any. Using the trim it is possible to combine a corrective factor to the drive reference.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the trim function.
1 = PROPORTIONAL – Adds a trim factor that is proportional to the rpm/Hz reference.
2 = DIRECT – Adds a trim factor based on the control loop’s maximum limit.
4231 TRIM SCALE -100.0%…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Defines the multiplier (as a percent, plus or minus) used in the trim mode.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 135

Group 42: External PID

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
4232 CORRECTION SRC 1…2 1 1
Defines the trimming reference for the Add
correction source. Ramped Ref
1 = PID2 REF – Uses appropriate REF
Switch Select
MAX (SWITCH A OR B): (par. 4230) Trim Mul.
Ext ref 1 + Trimmed
• 1105 REF 1 MAX when REF1 is Scale Mul.
max (A) off Ref
active (A). X
• 1108 REF 2 MAX when REF2 is prop or. X
Ext ref 2
active (B). max (B) direct
2 = PID2 OUTPUT – Uses the absolute Abs Max
maximum speed or frequency Speed Freq
(Switch C): (C) Select
• 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED if 9904 (par. 4232)
MOTOR CONTROL MODE = 1 SPEED Trimming PID2 ref
or 2 TORQUE. PID2 ref PID 2 Trimming PID2 out
• 2008 MAXIMUM FREQUENCY IF 9904
MOTOR CONTROL MODE = 3 SCALAR.

Start-Up
136 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 51: Ext Comm Module

This group defines set-up variables for a fieldbus adapter (FBA) communication
module. For more information on these parameters, refer to the user’s manual
supplied with the FBA module.
Group 51: Ext Comm Module
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
5101 FBA TYPE - 1 0
Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.
0 = NOT DEFINED – Module not found, or not properly connected, or parameter 9802 is not set to 4 (EXT FBA).
1 = PROFIBUS-DP –
16 = INTERBUS –
21 = LONWORKS –
32 = CANOPEN –
37 = DEVICENET –
64 = MODBUS PLUS –
101 = CONTROLNET –
5102 FB PAR 2…FB PAR 26 0...65535 1 0
…
For more information on these parameters, refer to the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.
5126
5127 FBA PAR REFRESH 0, 1 1 0
Validates any changed fieldbus parameter settings.
• After refreshing, the value reverts automatically to DONE.
5128 FILE CPI FW REV 0000…FFFF hex 1 0000 hex
Displays the CPI firmware revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter configuration file. Format is xyz where:
• x = major revision number
• y = minor revision number
• z = correction number
Example: 107 = revision 1.07
5129 FILE CONFIG ID 0000…FFFF hex 1 0000 hex
Displays the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module’s configuration file identification.
• File configuration information is drive application program-dependent.
5130 FILE CONFIG REV 0000…FFFF hex 1 0000 hex
Contains the revision of the drive’s fieldbus adapter module configuration file.
Example: 1 = revision 1
5131 FBA STATUS 0…6 1 0
Contains the status of the adapter module.
0 = IDLE – Adapter not configured.
1 = EXEC. INIT – Adapter is initializing.
2 = TIME OUT – A timeout has occurred in the communication between the adapter and the drive.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – Adapter configuration error.
• The revision code of the adapter’s CPI firmware revision is older than required CPI firmware version defined in
the drive’s configuration file (parameter 5132 < 5128).
4 = OFF-LINE – Adapter is off-line.
5 = ON-LINE – Adapter is on-line.
6 = RESET – Adapter is performing a hardware reset.
5132 FBA CPI FW REV 0000…FFFF hex 1 0000 hex
Contains the revision of the module’s CPI program. Format is xyz where:
• x = major revision number
• y = minor revision number
• z = correction number
Example: 107 = revision 1.07
5133 FBA APPL FW REV 0000…FFFF hex 1 0000 hex
Contains the revision of the module’s application program Format is xyz (see parameter 5132).

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 137

Group 52: Panel Communication

This group defines the communication settings for the control panel port on the drive.
Normally, when using the supplied control panel, there is no need to change settings
in this group.
In this group, parameter modifications take effect on the next power-up.
Group 52: Panel Communication
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
5201 STATION ID 1…247 1 1
Defines the address of the drive.
• Two units with the same address are not allowed on-line.
• Range: 1…247
5202 BAUDRATE 9.6…115.2 kbits/s - 9.6 kbits/s
Defines the communication speed of the drive in kbits per second (kbits/s).
9.6
19.2
38.4
57.6
115.2
5203 PARITY 0…3 1 0
Sets the character format to be used with the panel communication.
0 = 8N1 – No parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8N2 – No parity, two stop bits.
2 = 8E1 – Even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8O1 – Odd parity, one stop bit.
5204 OK MESSAGES 0…65535 1 -
Contains a count of valid Modbus messages received by the drive.
• During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.
5205 PARITY ERRORS 0…65535 1 -
Contains a count of the characters with a parity error that is received from the fieldbus. For high counts, check:
• Parity settings of devices connected on the fieldbus – they must not differ.
• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels – high noise levels generate errors.
5206 FRAME ERRORS 0…65535 1 -
Contains a count of the characters with a framing error that the fieldbus receives. For high counts, check:
• Communication speed settings of devices connected on the fieldbus – they must not differ.
• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels – high noise levels generate errors.
5207 BUFFER OVERRUNS 0…65535 1 -
Contains a count of the characters received that cannot be placed in the buffer.
• Longest possible message length for the drive is 128 bytes.
• Received messages exceeding 128 bytes overflow the buffer. The excess characters are counted.
5208 CRC ERRORS 0…65535 1 -
Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error that the drive receives. For high counts, check:
• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels – high noise levels generate errors.
• CRC calculations for possible errors.

Start-Up
138 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 53: EFB Protocol

This group defines set-up variables used for an embedded fieldbus (EFB)
communication protocol. Refer to communication protocol documentation for more
information on these parameters.
Group 53: EFB Control
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID 0000…FFFF hex 1 0000 hex
Contains the identification and program revision of the protocol.
• Format: XXYY, where xx = protocol ID, and YY = program revision.
5302 EFB STATION ID 0…65535 1 1
Defines the node address of the RS485 link.
• The node address on each unit must be unique.
5303 EFB BAUD RATE 1.2…76.8 kbits/s - 9.6 kbits/s
Defines the communication speed of the RS485 link in kbits per second (kbits/s).
1.2 kbits/s
2.4 kbits/s
4.8 kbits/s
9.6 kbits/s
19.2 kbits/s
38.4 kbits/s
57.6 kbits/s
76.8 kbits/s
5304 EFB PARITY 0…3 0
Defines the data length, parity and stop bits to be used with the RS485 link communication.
• The same settings must be used in all on-line stations.
0 = 8N1 – 8 data bits, No parity, one stop bit.
1 = 8N2 – 8 data bits, No parity, two stop bits.
2 = 8E1 – 8 data bits, Even parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8O1 – 8 data bits, Odd parity, one stop bit.
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE 0…2 1 0
Selects the communication 1=ACH550 profile used by the EFB protocol.
0 = ABB DRV LIM – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACH400.
1 = DCU PROFILE – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to 32-bit DCU Profile.
2 = ABB DRV FULL – Operation of Control/Status Words conforms to ABB Drives Profile, as used in ACH600/800.
5306 EFB OK MESSAGES 0…65535 1 0
Contains a count of valid messages received by the drive.
• During normal operation, this counter is increasing constantly.
5307 EFB CRC ERRORS 0…65535 1 0
Contains a count of the messages with a CRC error received by the drive. For high counts, check:
• Ambient electro-magnetic noise levels – high noise levels generate errors.
• CRC calculations for possible errors.
5308 EFB UART ERRORS 0…65535 1 0
Contains a count of the messages with a character error received by the drive.
5309 EFB STATUS 0…7 1 0
Contains the status of the EFB protocol.
0 = IDLE – EFB protocol is configured, but not receiving any messages.
1 = EXEC. INIT – EFB protocol is initializing.
2 = TIME OUT – A timeout has occurred in the communication between the network master and the EFB protocol.
3 = CONFIG ERROR – EFB protocol has a configuration error.
4 = OFF-LINE – EFB protocol is receiving messages that are NOT addressed to this drive.
5 = ON-LINE – EFB protocol is receiving messages that are addressed to this drive.
6 = RESET – EFB protocol is performing a hardware reset.
7 = LISTEN ONLY – EFB protocol is in listen-only mode.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 139

Group 53: EFB Control

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
5310 EFB PAR 10 to EFB PAR 20 0…65535 1 Protocol dep.
to
These parameters are protocol-specific. Refer to the appropriate protocol in the "Embedded Fieldbus" section for
5320
these parameter descriptions.

Start-Up
140 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 81: PFA

This group defines a Pump and Fan Alternation (PFA) mode of operation. The major
features of PFA are:
• The ACH550 controls the motor of pump no. 1, varying the motor speed to control
the pump capacity. This motor is the speed regulated motor.
• Direct line connections power the motor of pump no. 2 and pump no.3, etc. The
ACH550 switches pump no. 2 (and then pump no. 3, etc.) on and off as needed.
These motors are auxiliary motors.
• The ACH550 PID control uses two signals: a process reference and an actual
value feedback. The PID controller adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first
pump such that the actual value follows the process reference.
• When demand (defined by the process reference) exceeds the first motor’s
capacity (user defined as a frequency limit), the PFA automatically starts an
auxiliary pump. The PFA also reduces the speed of the first pump to account for
the auxiliary pump’s addition to total output. Then, as before, the PID controller
adjusts the speed (frequency) of the first pump such that the actual value follows
the process reference. If demand continues to increase, PFA adds additional
auxiliary pumps, using the same process.
• When demand drops, such that the first pump speed falls below a minimum limit
(user defined by a frequency limit), the PFA automatically stops an auxiliary
pump. The PFA also increases the speed of the first pump to account for the
auxiliary pump’s missing output.
• An Interlock function (when enabled) identifies off-line (out of service) motors, and
the PFA skips to the next available motor in the sequence.
An Autochange function (when enabled and with the appropriate switchgear)
equalizes duty time between the pump motors. Autochange periodically increments
the position of each motor in the rotation – the speed regulated motor becomes the
last auxiliary motor, the first auxiliary motor becomes the speed regulated motor, etc.
Group 81: PFA
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.
• Applies only when at least one auxiliary (constant speed) motor is running.
• Default value is 0%.
Example: An ACH550 operates three parallel pumps that maintain water pressure in a pipe.
• 4011 INTERNAL SETPNT sets a constant pressure reference that controls the pressure in the pipe.
• The speed regulated pump operates alone at low water consumption levels.
• As water consumption increases, first one constant speed pump operates, then, the second.
• As flow increases, the pressure at the output end of the pipe drops relative to the pressure measured at the input
end. As auxiliary motors step in to increase the flow, the adjustments below correct the reference to more closely
match the output pressure.
• When the first auxiliary pump operates, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1.
• When both auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 reference step 1 + parameter
8104 reference step 2.
• When three auxiliary pumps operate, increase the reference with parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP 1 + parameter
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 + parameter 8105 REFERENCE STEP 3.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 141

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
8104 REFERENCE STEP 2 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.
• Applies only when at least two auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.
• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1.
8105 REFERENCE STEP 3 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 0.0%
Sets a percentage value that is added to the process reference.
• Applies only when at least three auxiliary (constant speed) motors are running.
• See parameter 8103 REFERENCE STEP1.
8109 START FREQ 1 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 60.0 (US)
Sets the frequency limit used to start the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor starts if:
• No auxiliary motors are running.
• ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit: f (Hz) P 8115
8109 + 1 Hz.
fMAX
• Output frequency stays above a relaxed limit
(8109 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D. (P 8109)+1
After the first auxiliary motor starts: P 8109
• Output frequency decreases by the value = A
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1). P 8112
B A
• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor drops to fMIN
compensate for the input from the auxiliary motor. t
See figure, where:
• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1)
• B = Output frequency increase during the start delay. C
• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as 1
t
frequency increases (1 = On). 0
Note! 8109 START FREQ 1 value must be between:
• 8112 LOW FREQ 1
• (2008 MAXIMUM FREQ) -1.
8110 START FREQ 2 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 60.0 (US)
Sets the frequency limit used to start the second auxiliary motor.
• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor starts if:
• One auxiliary motor is running.
• ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8110 + 1.
• Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8110 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.
8111 START FREQ 3 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 60.0 (US)
Sets the frequency limit used to start the third auxiliary motor.
• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The third auxiliary motor starts if:
• Two auxiliary motors are running.
• ACH550 output frequency exceeds the limit: 8111 + 1 Hz.
• Output frequency stays above the relaxed limit (8111 - 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8115 AUX MOT START D.

Start-Up
142 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
8112 LOW FREQ 1 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 30.0 (US)
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the first auxiliary motor. The first auxiliary motor stops if:
• The first auxiliary motor is running alone.
• ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit: f (Hz)
8112 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit fMAX
(8112 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
P 8109
After the first auxiliary motor stops:
• Output frequency increases by the value = A
P 8112 A
(8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1).
• In effect, the output of the speed regulated motor increases to (P 8112)-1
compensate for the loss of the auxiliary motor. fMIN
B t
See figure, where:
• A = (8109 START FREQ 1) - (8112 LOW FREQ 1) P 8116
• B = Output frequency decrease during the stop delay.
• C = Diagram showing auxiliary motor’s run status as C
frequency decreases (1 = On).
• Grey path = Shows hysteresis – if time is reversed, the path 1
t
backwards is not the same. For details on the path for 0
starting, see the diagram at 8109 START FREQ 1.
Note! Low Frequency 1 value must be between:
• (2007 MINIMUM FREQ) +1.
• 8109 START FREQ 1
8113 LOW FREQ 2 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 30.0 Hz (US)
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the second auxiliary motor.
• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The second auxiliary motor stops if:
• Two auxiliary motors are running.
• ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit: 8113 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8113 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8114 LOW FREQ 3 0.0…500.0 Hz 0.1 Hz 30.0 Hz (US)
Sets the frequency limit used to stop the third auxiliary motor.
• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
The third auxiliary motor stops if:
• Three auxiliary motors are running.
• ACH550 output frequency drops below the limit: 8114 - 1.
• Output frequency stays below the relaxed limit (8114 + 1 Hz) for at least the time: 8116 AUX MOT STOP D.
8115 AUX MOT START D 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s; 1 s 5.0 s
Sets the Start Delay for the auxiliary motors.
• The output frequency must remain above the start frequency limit (parameter 8109, 8110, or 8111) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor starts.
• See 8109 START FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.
8116 AUX MOT STOP D. 0.0…3600.0 s 0.1 s; 1 s 3.0 s
Sets the Stop Delay for the auxiliary motors.
• The output frequency must remain below the low frequency limit (parameter 8112, 8113, or 8114) for this time
period before the auxiliary motor stops.
• See 8112 LOW FREQ 1 for a complete description of the operation.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 143

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
8117 NR OF AUX MOT 0…3 1 1
Sets the number of auxiliary motors.
• Each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals.
• The Autochange function, if used, requires an additional relay output for the speed regulated motor.
The following describes the set-up of the required relay outputs.
Relay Outputs
As noted above, each auxiliary motor requires a relay output, which the drive uses to send start/stop signals. The
following describes how the drive keeps track of motors and relays.
• The ACH550 provides relay outputs RO1…RO3.
• An external digital output module can be added to provide relay outputs RO4…RO6.
• Parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412 define, respectively, how relays RO1…RO6 are used – the parameter
value 31 PFA defines the relay as used for PFA.
• The ACH550 assigns auxiliary motors to relays in ascending order. If the Autochange function is disabled, the first
auxiliary motor is the one connected to the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFA, and so on. If the
Autochange function is used, the assignments rotate. Initially, the speed regulated motor is the one connected to
the first relay with a parameter setting = 31 PFA, the first auxiliary motor is the one connected to the second relay
with a parameter setting = 31 PFA, and so on.

Relay Logic
ACH550 ACH550

Standard PFA mode

PFA with Autochange mode

• The fourth auxiliary motor uses the same reference step, low frequency and start frequency values as the third
auxiliary motor.
• The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output
parameters (1401…1403 and 1410…1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFA), or =X (anything but 31), and
where the Autochange function is disabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0).
Parameter Setting ACH550 Relay Assignment
1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange Disabled
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 0 1 2 7
31 X X X X X 1 Aux. X X X X X
31 31 X X X X 2 Aux. Aux. X X X X
31 31 31 X X X 3 Aux. Aux. Aux. X X X
X 31 31 X X X 2 X Aux. Aux. X X X
X X X 31 X 31 2 X X X Aux. X Aux.
31 31 X X X X 1* Aux. Aux. X X X X
* =One additional relay output for the PFA that is in use.
One motor is in “sleep” when the other is rotating.

Start-Up
144 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
The table below shows the ACH550 PFA motor assignments for some typical settings in the Relay Output
parameters (1401…1403 and 1410…1412), where the settings are either =31 (PFA), or =X (anything but 31), and
where the Autochange function is enabled (8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = value > 0).v

Parameter Setting ACH550 Relay Assignment

1 1 1 1 1 1 8 Autochange Enabled
4 4 4 4 4 4 1 RO1 RO2 RO3 RO4 RO5 RO6
0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 0 1 2 7
31 31 X X X X 1 PFA PFA X X X X
31 31 31 X X X 2 PFA PFA PFA X X X
x 31 31 X X X 1 X PFA PFA X X X
X X X 31 X 31 1 X X X PFA X PFA
31 31 X X X X 0** PFA PFA X X X X
** = No auxiliary motors, but the autochange function is in use.
Working as standard PID-control.

8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV 0.0…336.0 h 0.1 h 0.0

Controls operation of the Autochange function and sets the
interval between changes.
• The Autochange time interval only applies to the time when Relay Logic
the speed regulated motor is running. ACH550
• See parameter 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL for an overview of the
Autochange function.
• The drive always coasts to a stop when autochange is
performed.
• Autochange enabled requires parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS
= value > 0.
0.0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Autochange function.
0.1…336 = The operating time interval (the time when the
start signal is on) between automatic motor changes.
Warning! When enabled, the Autochange function
requires the interlocks (8120 interlocks = value > 0)
enabled. During autochange the drive's power output is
interrupted and the drive coasts to stop, preventing
damage to the contacts.

PFA with Autochange mode

8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL 0.0…100.0% 0.1% 50.0%
Sets an upper limit, as a percent of output capacity, for the autochange logic. When the output from the PID/PFA
control block exceeds this limit, autochange is prevented. For example, use this parameter to deny autochange
when the Pump-Fan system is operating near maximum capacity.
Autochange Overview
The purpose of the autochange operation is to equalize duty time between multiple motors used in a system. At
each autochange operation:
• A different motor takes a turn connected to the ACH550 output – the speed regulated motor.
• The starting order of the other motors rotates.
The Autochange function requires:
• External switchgear for changing the dive’s output power connections.
• Parameter 8120 INTERLOCKS = value > 0.
Autochange is performed when:
• The running time since the previous autochange reaches the time set by 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV
• The PFA input is below the level set by this parameter, 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
Note! The ACH550 always coasts to stop when autochange is performed.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 145

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
In an autochange, the Autochange function does all of the PID Output
following (see figure): A
4PFA
• Initiates a change when the running time, since the last 100%
autochange, reaches 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV, and PFA 2PFA
input is below limit 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL.
• Stops the speed regulated motor. P 8119
3PFA
• Switches off the contactor of the speed regulated motor. 3PFA
• Increments the starting order counter, to change the 4PFA
starting order for the motors. 2PFA
• Identifies the next motor in line to be the speed regulated
motor. 1PFA t
• Switches off the above motor’s contactor, if the motor was P 8122
running. Any other running motors are not interrupted.
• Switches on the contactor of the new speed regulated P 8118 P 8118
motor. The autochange switchgear connects this motor to B
the ACH550 power output. A = Area above 8119 AUTOCHNG LEVEL –
• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAy. autochange not allowed.
• Starts the speed regulated motor. B = Autochange occurs.
• Identifies the next constant speed motor in the rotation. 1PFA, etc. = PID output associated with each motor.
• Switches the above motor on, but only if the new speed
regulated motor had been running (as a constant speed
motor) – This step keeps an equal number of motors running before and after autochange.
• Continues with normal PFA operation.
Starting Order Counter
Output
The operation of the starting-order counter: frequency
No aux 1 aux 2 aux
• The relay output parameter definitions (1401…1403 and motors motor motors
1410…1412)) establish the initial motor sequence. (The lowest fMAX
parameter number with a value 31 (PFA) identifies the relay
connected to 1PFA, the first motor, and so on.)
• Initially, 1PFA = speed regulated motor, 2PFA = 1st auxiliary
motor, etc.
• The first autochange shifts the sequence to: 2PFA = speed
regulated motor, 3PFA = 1st auxiliary motor, …, 1PFA = last
auxiliary motor. Area
• The next autochange shifts the sequence again, and so on. Autochange
• If the autochange cannot start a needed motor because all is Allowed PID output
inactive motors are interlocked, the drive displays an alarm
(2051, PFA INTERLOCK). P 8119 100%
• When ACH550 power supply is switched off, the counter
preserves the current Autochange rotation positions in permanent memory. When power is restored, the
Autochange rotation starts at the position stored in memory.
• If the PFA relay configuration is changed (or if the PFA enable value is changed), the rotation is reset. (See the
first bullet above.)
8120 INTERLOCKS 0…6 1 4
Defines operation of the Interlock function. When the Interlock function is enabled:
• An interlock is active when its command signal is absent.
• An interlock is inactive when its command signal is present.
• The ACH550 will not start if a start command occurs when the speed regulated motor’s interlock is active – the
control panel displays an alarm (2015, PFA INTERLOCK).

Start-Up
146 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
Wire each Interlock circuit as follows:
• Wire a contact of the motor’s On/Off switch to the Interlock circuit – the drive’s PFA logic can then recognize that
the motor is switched off, and start the next available motor.
• Wire a contact of the motor thermal relay (or other protective device in the motor circuit) to the Interlock input – the
drive’s PFA logic can then recognize that a motor fault is activated and stop the motor.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables the Interlock function. All digital inputs are available for other purposes.
• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0 (The Autochange function must be disabled if Interlock function is
disabled.)
1 = DI1 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns a digital input (starting with DI1) to the interlock signal for each
PFA relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:
The number of PFA relays (number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412) with value = 31 (PFA).
The Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0, and otherwise enabled).
No. PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled
Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1: Speed Reg Motor Not allowed
DI2…DI6: Free
1 DI1: Speed Reg Motor DI1: First PFA Relay
DI2: First PFA Relay DI2…DI6: Free
DI3…DI6: Free
2 DI1: Speed Reg Motor DI1: First PFA Relay
DI2: First PFA Relay DI2: Second PFA Relay
DI3: Second PFA Relay DI3…DI6: Free
DI4…DI6: Free
3 DI1: Speed Reg Motor DI1: First PFA Relay
DI2: First PFA Relay DI2: Second PFA Relay
DI3: Second PFA Relay DI3: Third PFA Relay
DI4: Third PFA Relay DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
4 DI1: Speed Reg Motor DI1: First PFA Relay
DI2: First PFA Relay DI2: Second PFA Relay
DI3: Second PFA Relay DI3: Third PFA Relay
DI4: Third PFA Relay DI4: Fourth PFA Relay
DI5: Fourth PFA Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
5 DI1: Speed Reg Motor DI1: First PFA Relay
DI2: First PFA Relay DI2: Second PFA Relay
DI3: Second PFA Relay DI3: Third PFA Relay
DI4: Third PFA Relay DI4: Fourth PFA Relay
DI5: Fourth PFA Relay DI5: Fifth PFA Relay
DI6: Fifth PFA Relay DI6: Free
6 Not allowed DI1: First PFA Relay
DI2: Second PFA Relay
DI3: Third PFA Relay
DI4: Fourth PFA Relay
DI5: Fifth PFA Relay
DI6: Sixth PFA Relay

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 147

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
2 = DI2 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns a digital input (starting with DI2) to the interlock signal for each
PFA relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:
• The number of PFA relays (number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412) with value = 31 (PFA).
• The Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0, and otherwise enabled).
No. PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled
Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1: Free Not allowed
DI2: Speed Reg Motor
DI3…DI6: Free
1 DI1: Free DI1: Free
DI2: Speed Reg Motor DI2: First PFA Relay
DI3: First PFA Relay DI3…DI6: Free
DI4…DI6: Free
2 DI1: Free DI1: Free
DI2: Speed Reg Motor DI2: First PFA Relay
DI3: First PFA Relay DI3: Second PFA Relay
DI4: Second PFA Relay DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
3 DI1: Free DI1: Free
DI2: Speed Reg Motor DI2: First PFA Relay
DI3: First PFA Relay DI3: Second PFA Relay
DI4: Second PFA Relay DI4: Third PFA Relay
DI5: Third PFA Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
4 DI1: Free DI1: Free
DI2: Speed Reg Motor DI2: First PFA Relay
DI3: First PFA Relay DI3: Second PFA Relay
DI4: Second PFA Relay DI4: Third PFA Relay
DI5: Third PFA Relay DI5: Fourth PFA Relay
DI6: Fourth PFA Relay DI6: Free
5 Not allowed DI1: Free
DI2: First PFA Relay
DI3: Second PFA Relay
DI4: Third PFA Relay
DI5: Fourth PFA Relay
DI6: Fifth PFA Relay
6 Not allowed Not allowed

Start-Up
148 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
3 = DI3 – Enables the Interlocks function, and assigns a digital input (starting with DI3) to the interlock signal for each
PFA relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:
• The number of PFA relays (number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412) with value = 31 (PFA).
• The Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0, and otherwise enabled).

No. PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled

Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1…DI2: Free Not allowed
DI3: Speed Reg Motor
DI4…DI6: Free
1 DI1…DI2: Free DI1…DI2: Free
DI3: Speed Reg Motor DI3: First PFA Relay
DI4: First PFA Relay DI4…DI6: Free
DI5…DI6: Free
2 DI1…DI2: Free DI1…DI2: Free
DI3: Speed Reg Motor DI3: First PFA Relay
DI4: First PFA Relay DI4: Second PFA Relay
DI5: Second PFA Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
3 DI1…DI2: Free DI1…DI2: Free
DI3: Speed Reg Motor DI3: First PFA Relay
DI4: First PFA Relay DI4: Second PFA Relay
DI5: Second PFA Relay DI5: Third PFA Relay
DI6: Third PFA Relay DI6: Free
4 Not allowed DI1…DI2: Free
DI3: First PFA Relay
DI4: Second PFA Relay
DI5: Third PFA Relay
DI6: Fourth PFA Relay
5…6 Not allowed Not allowed

• INTERV = 0, and otherwise enabled).

4 = DI4 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns a digital input (starting with DI4) to the interlock signal for each
PFA relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:
• The number of PFA relays (number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412) with value = 31 (PFA).
The Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG
No. PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled
Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1…DI3: Free Not allowed
DI4: Speed Reg Motor
DI5…DI6: Free
1 DI1…DI3: Free DI1…DI3: Free
DI4: Speed Reg Motor DI4: First PFA Relay
DI5: First PFA Relay DI5…DI6: Free
DI6: Free
2 DI1…DI3: Free DI1…DI3: Free
DI4: Speed Reg Motor DI4: First PFA Relay
DI5: First PFA Relay DI5: Second PFA Relay
DI6: Second PFA Relay DI6: Free
3 Not allowed DI1…DI3: Free
DI4: First PFA Relay
DI5: Second PFA Relay
DI6: Third PFA Relay
4…6 Not allowed Not allowed

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 149

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
5 = DI5 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns a digital input (starting with DI5) to the interlock signal for each
PFA relay. These assignments are defined in the following table and depend on:
• The number of PFA relays (number of parameters 1401…1403 and 1410…1412) with value = 31 (PFA).
• The Autochange function status (disabled if 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0, and otherwise enabled).

No. PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled

Relays (P 8118) (P 8118)
0 DI1…DI4: Free Not allowed
DI5: Speed Reg Motor
DI6: Free
1 DI1…DI4: Free DI1…DI4: Free
DI5: Speed Reg Motor DI5: First PFA Relay
DI6: First PFA Relay DI6: Free
2 Not allowed DI1…DI4: Free
DI5: First PFA Relay
DI6: Second PFA Relay
3…6 Not allowed Not allowed

6 = DI6 – Enables the Interlock function, and assigns digital input DI6 to the interlock signal for the speed regulated
motor.
• Requires 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV = 0.

No. PFA Autochange Disabled Autochange Enabled

Relays
0 DI1…DI5: Free Not allowed
DI6: Speed Reg Motor
1 Not allowed DI1…DI5: Free
DI6: First PFA Relay
2…6 Not allowed Not allowed

8121 REG BYPASS CTRL 0…1 1 0

Selects Regulator by-pass control. When enabled,
fOUT
Regulator by-pass control provides a simple control
mechanism without a PID regulator. fMAX
• Use Regulator by-pass control only in special
applications.
0 = NO – Disables Regulator by-pass control. The drive
uses the normal PFA reference: 1106 REF2 SELECT. P 8110
1 = YES – Enables Regulator by-pass control. P 8109
• The process PID regulator is bypassed.
Actual value of PID is used as the PFA reference
(input). Normally EXT REF2 is used as the PFA
P 8113
reference.
• The drive uses the feedback signal defined by P 8112
4014 FBK SEL (or 4114) for the PFA frequency
reference. fMIN
• The figure shows the relation between the control P 4014
signal 4014 FBK SEL (OR 4114) and the speed A B C (%)
regulated motor’s frequency in a three-motor
system. A = No auxiliary motors running
B = One auxiliary motor running
C = Two auxiliary motors running

Start-Up
150 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
Example: In the diagram below, the pumping station’s outlet flow is controlled by the measured inlet flow (A).
3 Contactors
Mains 3~ 3
ACH550 P1
3 P2 3
M
P3 3 3~ Outlet
3
P1 Pipe1
A Sewage
Tank M
3~ Outlet
P2 Pipe2
Inlet Pipe
M
3~ Outlet
P3 Pipe3

8122 PFA START DELAY 0.00…10.00 s 0.01 s 0.50 s

Sets the start delay for speed regulated motors in the system. Using the delay, the drive works as follows:
• Switches on the contactor of the speed regulated motor – connecting the motor to the ACH550 power output.
• Delays motor start for the time 8122 PFA START DELAY.
• Starts the speed regulated motor.
• Starts auxiliary motors. See parameter 8115 for delay.
Warning! Motors equipped with star-delta starters require a PFA Start Delay.
• After the ACH550 relay output switches a motor On, the star-delta starter must switch to the star-connection and
then back to the delta-connection before the drive applies power.
• So, the PFA Start Delay must be longer than the time setting of the star-delta starter.
8123 PFA ENABLE 0…1 - 0
Selects PFA control. When enabled, PFA control:
• Switches in, or out, auxiliary constant speed motors as output demand increases or decreases. Parameters 8109
START FREQ 1 to 8114 LOW FREQ 3 define the switch points in terms of the drive output frequency.
• Adjusts the speed regulated motor output down, as auxiliary motors are added, and adjusts the speed regulated
motor output up, as auxiliary motors are taken off line.
• Provides Interlock functions, if enabled.
• Requires 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE = 3 SCALAR.
0 = NOT SEL – Disables PFA control.
1 = ACTIVE – Enables PFA control.
8124 ACC IN AUX STOP 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 0.0
Sets the PFA acceleration time for a zero-to-maximum frequency ramp. This PFA acceleration ramp:
• Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary motor is switched off.
• Replaces the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22: Accel / Decel.
• Applies only until the output of the regulated motor increases by an amount equal to the output of the switched off
auxiliary motor. Then the acceleration ramp defined in Group 22: Accel / Decel applies.

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 151

Group 81: PFA

Code Description Range Resolution Default S
0 = NOT SEL.
0.1…1800 = Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time.
fOUT

A
B

P 8125 P 8124 t

Aux.
Motor
1
t
0
• A = speed regulated motor accelerating using Group 22 parameters (2202 or 2205).
• B = speed regulated motor decelerating using Group 22 parameters (2203 or 2206).
• At aux. motor start, speed regulated motor decelerates using 8125 DEC IN AUX START.
• At aux. motor stop, speed regulated motor accelerates using 8124 ACC IN AUX STOP.
8125 DEC IN AUX START 0.0…1800.0 s 0.1 s 0.0 s
Sets the PFA deceleration time for a maximum-to-zero frequency ramp. This PFA deceleration ramp:
• Applies to the speed regulated motor, when an auxiliary motor is switched on.
• Replaces the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL / DECEL.
• Applies only until the output of the regulated motor decreases by an amount equal to the output of the auxiliary
motor. Then the deceleration ramp defined in Group 22 ACCEL / DECEL applies.
0 = NOT SEL.
0.1…1800 = Activates this function using the value entered as the acceleration time.
8126 TIMED AUTOCHANGE 0…4 1 0
Sets the autochange with timer. When enables, autochange is controlled with the timer functions.
0 = NOT SEL.
1 = Timer 1 – Enables autochange when Timer 1 is active.
2…4 Timer 2…4 – Enables autochange when Timer 2…4 is active.
8127 MOTORS 0…7 1 0
Sets the actual number of PFA controlled motors (maximum 6 motors, 1 speed regulated, 3 connected direct-on-line
and 3 spare motors).
• This value includes also the speed regulated motor.
• This value must be compatible with number of relays allocated to PFA if the autochange function is used.
• If Autochange function is not used, the speed regulated motor does not need to have a relay output allocated to
PFA but it needs to be included in this value.
8128 AUX START ORDER 1,2 1 1
Sets the start order of auxiliary motors.
1 = EVEN RUN TIME - The time sharing is active, start order depends on run times.
2 = RELAY ORDER - Start order is fixed to the order of the relays

Start-Up
152 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Group 98: Options

This group configures for options, in particular, enabling serial communication with
the drive.
Group 98: Options
Code Description Range Resolution Default S
9802 COMM PROT SEL 0…5 1 0
Selects the communication protocol.
0 = NOT SEL – No communication protocol selected.
1 = STD MODBUS – The drive communicates with Modbus via the RS485 channel (X1-communications, terminal).
• See also parameter Group 53 EFB PROTOCOL.
2 = N2 – Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using Metasys N2 protocol via the RS485 serial link (X1-
communications terminal).
3 = FLN – Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using FLN protocol via the RS485 serial link (X1-
communications terminal).
4 = EXT FBA – The drive communicates via a fieldbus adapter module in option slot 2 of the drive.
• See also parameter Group 51 EXT COMM MODULE.
5 = BACNET – Enables fieldbus communication with the drive using BACnet protocol via the RS485 serial link (X1-
communications terminal).

Start-Up
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 153

Embedded Fieldbus

Overview
The ACH550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACH550 can
either:
• Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
• Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs, and the control panel.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus

Other Devices

Connect using either:

• Standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at
terminals X1:28…32
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) module
mounted in slot 2 (option Rxxx)

Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

• Embedded fieldbus (EFB) – Using the RS485 interface at terminals X1:28…32 on
the control board, a control system can communicate with the drive using the
Modbus® protocol. (For protocol and profile descriptions, see "Modbus Protocol
Technical Data", "ABB Control Profiles Technical Data", etc. starting on page
169.):
– Modbus®
– Metasys® N2
– APOGEE® FLN
– BACnet®
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) – See "Fieldbus Adapter" on page 223.

Embedded Fieldbus
154 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Control Interface
In general, the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive
consists of:
Protocol Control Interface Reference for more information
Modbus • Output Words The content of these words is defined by profiles. For
– Control word details on the profiles used, see
"ABB Control Profiles Technical Data"
– Reference1
– Reference2
• Input Words
– Status word
– Actual value 1
– Actual value 2
– Actual value 3
– Actual value 4
– Actual value 5
– Actual value 6
– Actual value 7
– Actual value 8
N2 • Binary output objects "N2 Protocol Technical Data"
• Analog output objects
• Binary input objects
• Analog input objects
FLN • Binary output points "FLN Protocol Technical Data"
• Analog output points
• Binary input points
• Analog input points
BACnet • Device management "BACnet Technical Data"
• Binary output objects
• Analog output objects
• Binary input objects
• Analog input objects

Note! The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.

Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
• What control information must be sent down to the drives?
• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 155

Mechanical and Electrical Installation – EFB

Warning! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected

from the power source.

Drive terminals 28…32 are for RS485 communications.

• Use Belden 9842 or equivalent. Belden 9842 is a dual twisted, shielded pair cable
with a wave impedance of 120 Ω.
• Use one of these twisted shielded pairs for the RS485 link. Use this pair to
connect all A (-) terminals together and all B (+) terminals together.
• Use one of the wires in the other pair for the logical ground (terminal 31), leaving
one wire unused.
• Do not directly ground the RS485 network at any point. Ground all devices on the
network using their corresponding earthing terminals.
• As always, the grounding wires should not form any closed loops, and all the
devices should be earthed to a common ground.
• Connect the RS485 link in a daisy-chained bus, without dropout lines.
• To reduce noise on the network, terminate the RS485 network using 120 Ω
resistors at both ends of the network. Use the DIP switch to connect or disconnect
the termination resistors. See following diagram and table.
Terminated Terminated
Station Station Station Station

X1 Identification Hardware Description

28 Screen RS485 Multidrop application RS485 interface
29 B (Positive +) 28 SCR J2 J2
SCR
29 B
30 A (Negative -) +
- 30 A ON
31 AGND GND 31 AGND ON
SCR 32 SCR
32 Screen OFF position ON position
+ Bus termination
-
GND

• Connect the shield at each end of the cable to a drive. On one end, connect the
shield to terminal 28, and on the other end connect to terminal 32. Do not connect
the incoming and outgoing cable shields to the same terminals, as that would
make the shielding continuous.
• For configuration information see the following:
– "Communication Set-up – EFB" below.
– "Activate Drive Control Functions – EFB" on page 159.
– The appropriate EFB protocol specific technical data. For example, "Modbus
Protocol Technical Data" on page 169.

Embedded Fieldbus
156 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Communication Set-up – EFB

Serial Communication Selection

To activate the serial communication, set parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL =
• 1 (STD MODBUS).
• 2 (N2)
• 3 (FLN)
• 5 (BACNET)

Note! If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel, your drive does not have
that protocol software in the application memory.

Serial Communication Configuration

Setting 9802 automatically sets the appropriate default values in parameters that
define the communication process. These parameters and descriptions are defined
below. In particular, note that the station Id may require adjustment.
EFB Protocol Reference
Code Description
Modbus N2 FLN BACnet
5301 EFB PROTOCOL ID Do not edit. Any non-zero value entered for parameter 9802
Contains the identification and COMM PROT SEL, sets this parameter automatically. The
program revision of the format is: XXYY, where xx = protocol ID, and YY = program
protocol. revision.

5302 EFB STATION ID Set each drive on the network Sets MS/TP MAC ID. A
Defines the node address of with a unique value for this temporary value of 0
the RS485 link. parameter. places the protocol
When this protocol is selected, channel in reset.
the default value for this
parameter is: 1
Note: For a new address to
take affect, the drive power
must be cycled OR 5302 must
first be set to 0 before selecting
a new address. Leaving 5302 =
0 places the RS485 channel in
reset, disabling communication.
5303 EFB BAUD RATE When this protocol is selected, When this protocol is
Defines the communication the default value for this selected, the default
speed of the RS485 link in parameter is: 9.6 value for this parameter
kbits per second (kbits/s). is: 9600.
1.2 kbits/s Do not edit.
2.4 kbits/s
4.8 kbits/s
9.6 kbits/s
19.2 kbits/s
38.4 kbits/s
57.6 kbits/s
76.8 kbits/s

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 157

EFB Protocol Reference

Code Description
Modbus N2 FLN BACnet
5304 EFB PARITY When this When this protocol is selected, the default
Defines the data length, parity protocol is value for this parameter is: 0
and stop bits to be used with selected,
the default Sets MS/TP character
the RS485 link communication. format.
value for
• The same settings must be this
used in all on-line stations. parameter
0 = 8N1 – 8 data bits, No parity, is: 1
one stop bit.
1 = 8N2 – 8 data bits, No parity,
two stop bits.
2 = 8E1 – 8 data bits, Even
parity, one stop bit.
3 = 8O1 – 8 data bits, Odd
parity, one stop bit.
5305 EFB CTRL PROFILE When this N/A. When this protocol is selected, the
Selects the communication protocol is default value for this parameter is: 0.
profile used by the EFB selected, Changing the value for this parameter has no
protocol. the default affect on this protocol’s behavior.
value for
0 = ABB DRV LIM – Operation of this
Control/Status Words parameter
conform to ABB Drives is: 0
Profile, as used in ACH400.
1 = DCU PROFILE – Operation of
Control/Status Words
conform to 32-bit DCU
Profile.
2 = ABB DRV FULL – Operation
of Control/Status Words
conform to ABB Drives
Profile, as used in ACH600/
800.
5310 EFB PAR10 Not used Sets them response turnaround time in
for Comm milliseconds. When this protocol is selected,
setup. the default value is:
3 msec. 0 msec. 5 msec.
5311 EFB PAR11 Not used for Comm setup. This parameter, together
with parameter 5317, EFB
PAR 17, sets BACnet
instance IDs:
• For the range 1 to
65,535: This
parameter sets the ID
directly (5317 must be
0). For example, the
following values set
the ID to 49134: 5311
= 49134 and 5317 = 0.
• For IDs > 65,335: The
ID equals 5311’s value
plus 10,000 times
5317’s value. For
example, the following
values set the ID to
71234: 5311 = 1234
and 5317 = 7.

Embedded Fieldbus
158 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

EFB Protocol Reference

Code Description
Modbus N2 FLN BACnet
5314 EFB PAR14 Not used for Comm setup. Enables autobaud
detection.
0 = DISABLE
1 = ENABLE
5315 EFB PAR15 Displays the detected
baud rate when autobaud
detection is used.
5317 EFB PAR17 This parameter works
with parameter 5311 to
set BACnet instance IDs.
See parameter 5311.

Note! After any changes to the communication settings, protocol must be

reactivated by either cycling the drive power, or by clearing and then restoring the
station Id (5302).

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 159

Activate Drive Control Functions – EFB

Controlling the Drive

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control.
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. For the protocol-specific details, see the document supplied
with the FBA module.

Start/Stop Direction Control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus1
Drive Parameter Value Description
DCU N2 FLN BACnet
ABB DRV
PROFILE

1001 EXT1 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by 40001 40031 BO1 24 BV10

COMMANDS fieldbus with Ext1 bits 0…3 bits 0, 1
selected.
1002 EXT2 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by 40001 40031 BO1 24 BV10
COMMANDS fieldbus with Ext2 bits 0…3 bits 0, 1
selected.
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Direction by 4002/ 40031 BO2 22 BV11
fieldbus. 40032 bit 3

1. For Modbus, the protocol reference can depend on the profile used, hence two columns in these
tables. One column refers to the ABB Drives profile, selected when parameter 5305 = 0 (ABB DRV
LIM) or 5305 = 2 (ABB DRV FULL). The other column refers to the DCU profile selected when
parameter 5305 = 1 (DCU PROFILE). See "ABB Control Profiles Technical Data" on page 177.
2. The reference provides direction control – a negative reference provides reverse rotation.

Embedded Fieldbus
160 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Input Reference Select

Using the fieldbus to provide input references to the drive requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus
Drive Parameter Value Setting
DCU N2 FLN BACnet
ABB DRV
PROFILE

1102 EXT1/EXT2 8 (COMM) Reference set 40001 40031 BO5 26 BV13

SEL selection by fieldbus. bit 11 bit 5
1103 REF1 SEL 8 (COMM) Input reference 1 by 40002 AO1 60 AV16
fieldbus.
1106 REF2 SEL 8 (COMM) Input reference 2 by 40003 AO2 61 AV17
fieldbus.

Reference Scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the following, as appropriate:
• Modbus Register "40002" in the "Modbus Protocol Technical Data" section.
• "Reference Scaling" in the "ABB Control Profiles Technical Data" section.
• "N2 Analog Output Objects" in the "N2 Protocol Technical Data" section.
• The slope of points 60 and 61 in the "FLN Protocol Technical Data" section.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 161

Miscellaneous Drive Control

Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.

• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The

location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus
Drive Parameter Value Setting
DCU N2 FLN BACnet
ABB DRV
PROFILE

1601 RUN 7 (COMM) Run enable by 40001 40031 BO4 35 BV12

ENABLE fieldbus. bit 3 bit 6
(inverted)
1604 FAULT 8 (COMM) Fault reset by 40001 40031 BO6 94 BV14
RESET SEL fieldbus. bit 7 bit 4
1606 LOCAL 8 (COMM) Source for local Does not 40031
LOCK lock selection is the apply bit 14
fieldbus.
1607 PARAM 1 (SAVE) Saves altered 41607 40032 BO18 N/A1
SAVE parameters to bit 2
memory (then value
returns to 0).
1608 START 7 (COMM) Source for start Does not 40032 BV20
ENABLE 1 enable 1 is the apply. bit 2
fieldbus Command
word.
1609 START 7 (COMM) Source for start 40032 BV21
ENABLE 2 enable 2 is the bit 3
fieldbus Command
word.
2013 MIN 7 (COMM) Source for minimum 40031
TORQUE torque selection is bit 15
SEL the fieldbus.
2014 MAX 7 (COMM) Source for
TORQUE maximum torque
SEL selection is the
fieldbus.
2201 ACC/DEC 7 (COMM) Source for ramp 40031
1/2 SEL pair selection is the bit 10
fieldbus.

1. Use Memorize Point command.

Embedded Fieldbus
162 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Relay Output Control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.

• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The

location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus
Drive Parameter Value Setting
DCU N2 FLN BACnet
ABB DRV
PROFILE

1401 RELAY 35 Relay Output 1 40134 bit 0 or 00033 BO7 40 BO0

OUTPUT 1 (COMM) controlled by fieldbus.
1402 RELAY 35 Relay Output 2 40134 bit 1 or 00034 BO8 41 BO1
OUTPUT 2 (COMM) controlled by fieldbus.
1403 RELAY 35 Relay Output 3 40134 bit 2 or 00035 BO9 42 BO2
OUTPUT 3 (COMM) controlled by fieldbus.
14101 RELAY 35 Relay Output 4 40134 bit 3 or 00036 BO10 43 BO3
OUTPUT 4 (COMM) controlled by fieldbus.
14111 RELAY 35 Relay Output 5 40134 bit 4 or 00037 BO11 44 BO4
OUTPUT 5 (COMM) controlled by fieldbus.
14121 RELAY 35 Relay Output 6 40134 bit 5 or 00038 BO12 45 BO5
OUTPUT 6 (COMM) controlled by fieldbus.

1. More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.

For example: To control relays 1 and 2 using serial communication:
Set parameters 1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 and 1402 RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 35 (COMM).
Then, for example using N2:
• To turn Relay 1 On: Force object B07 to On.
• To turn Relay 2 On: Force object B08 to On.
• To turn both Relay 1 and 2 On: Force objects B07 and B08 On.

Note! Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Protocol Reference
Drive
Value Setting Modbus
Parameter N2 FLN BACnet
ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

0122 RO 1-3 Relay 1…3 40122 0122 BI4… 76… BI0…

STATUS status. BI6 78 BI2
0123 RO 4-6 Relay 4…6 40123 0123 BI7… 79… BI3…
STATUS status. BI9 81 BI5

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 163

Analog Output Control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol Reference
Modbus
Drive Parameter Value Setting
ABB DCU N2 FLN BACnet
DRV PROFILE

1501 AO1 CONTENT 135 (COMM Analog Output 1 – – – –

SEL VALUE 1) controlled by
writing to
0135 COMM VALUE 1 – parameter 0135. 40135 AO14 46 AO0

1507 AO2 CONTENT 136 (COMM Analog Output 2 – – – –

SEL VALUE 2) controlled by
writing to
0136 COMM VALUE 2 – parameter 0136. 40136 AO15 47 AO1

PID Control Setpoint Source

Use the following settings to select the fieldbus as the setpoint source for PID loops:
Protocol Reference
Modbus
Drive Parameter Value Setting
ABB DCU N2 FLN BACnet
DRV PROFILE

4010 SET POINT 8 (COMM Setpoint is either: 40003 AO2 61 AV17

SEL (Set 1) VALUE 1) • Input Reference 2 (+/
4110 SET POINT 9 (COMM + -/* AI1). Control
SEL (Set 2) AI1) requires parameter
10 1106 value = comm.
4210 SET POINT (COMM*AI1) • Process PID
SEL (Ext/
setpoint. Control
Trim) requires parameter
1106 value = pid1
out and parameter
4010 value = comm.

Communication Fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the drive’s action if serial communication is lost.
Drive Parameter Value Description
3018 COMM FAULT FUNC 0 (NOT SEL) Set for appropriate drive response.
1 (FAULT)
2 (CONST SP7)
3 (LAST SPEED)
3019 COMM FAULT TIME Set time delay before acting on a communication loss.

Embedded Fieldbus
164 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Feedback from the Drive – EFB

Pre-defined Feedback
Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see input word/point/object
listings in the technical data for the appropriate protocol starting on page 169.
Protocol Reference
Drive Parameter
Modbus N2 FLN BACnet
0102 SPEED 40102 AI3 5 AV0
0103 FREQ OUTPUT 40103 AI1 2 AV1
0104 CURRENT 40104 AI4 6 AV4
0105 TORQUE 40105 AI5 7 AV5
0106 POWER 40106 AI6 8 AV6
0107 DC BUS VOLT 40107 AI11 13 AV2
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 40109 AI12 14 AV3
0115 KWH COUNTER 40115 AI8 10 AV8
0118 DI1-3 STATUS – bit 1 (DI3) 40118 BI12 72 BI6, BI7, BI8
0122 RO1-3 STATUS 40122 BI4, BI5, BI6 76, 77, 78 BI0, BI1, BI2
0301 FB STATUS WORD – bit 0 (STOP) 40301 bit 0 BI1 23 BV0
0301 FB STATUS WORD – bit 2 (REV) 40301 bit 2 BI2 21 BV1

Note! With Modbus, any parameter can be accessed using the format: 4 followed by
the parameter number.

Mailbox Read/Write
The ACH550 provides a “Mailbox” function to access parameters that have not been
pre-defined by the protocol. Using mailbox, any drive parameter can be identified
and read. Mailbox can also be used to adjust parameter settings by writing a value to
any parameter identified. The following table describes the use of this function.
Protocol Reference
Name Description
Modbus1 N2 FLN BACnet
Mailbox Enter the number of the drive parameter Does not AO19 95 AV25
Parameter to access. apply.
Mailbox Contains the parameter value after a AO20 96 AV26
Data read, or enter the desired parameter
value for a write.
Mailbox A binary value triggers a read – the value BO19 97 BV15
Read of the “Mailbox Parameter” appears in
“Mailbox data”.
Mailbox A binary value triggers a write – the drive BO20 98 BV16
Write value for the “Mailbox Parameter”
changes to the value in “Mailbox data”.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 165

1. As noted above, Modbus provides direct access to all parameters using the format: 4 followed by
the parameter number.

Actual Value Scaling

The scaling of actual values can be protocol dependent. In general, for Actual
Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See
"Parameter Descriptions" section for parameter resolutions.) For example:
Feedback Parameter
(Feedback Integer) * (Parameter Resolution) = Scaled Value
Integer Resolution
1 0.1 mA 1 * 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 * 0.1% = 1%

Where parameters are in percent, the "Parameter Descriptions" section specifies

what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from percent to
engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100% and
divide by 100%. For example:
Value of the
Feedback Parameter (Feedback Integer) * (Parameter Resolution) *
Parameter that
Integer Resolution (Value of 100% Ref.) / 100% = Scaled Value
defines 100%
10 0.1% 1500 rpm1 10 * 0.1% * 1500 RPM / 100% = 15 rpm
100 0.1% 500 Hz2 100 * 0.1% * 500 Hz / 100% = 50 Hz

1. Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED
as the 100% reference, and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.
2. Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ
as the 100% reference, and that 9907 = 500 Hz.
Although Actual Value scaling could differ from the above for the N2 and FLN
protocols, it currently does not. To confirm, see the following sections, as
appropriate:
• "N2 Analog Input Objects" in the "N2 Protocol Technical Data" section.
• "Scaling Drive Feedback Values" in the "FLN Protocol Technical Data" section.
Scaling does not apply for the BACnet protocol.

Embedded Fieldbus
166 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Diagnostics – EFB

Fault Queue for Drive Diagnostics

For general ACH550 diagnostics information, see "Diagnostics" starting on page
243. The three most recent ACH550 faults are reported to the fieldbus as defined
below.
Protocol Reference
Drive Parameter
Modbus N2 FLN BACnet1
0401 Last Fault 40401 17 90 AV18
0412 Previous Fault 1 40402 18 91 AV19
0413 Previous Fault 2 40403 19 92 AV20

Serial Communication Diagnostics

Network problems can be caused by multiple sources. Some of these sources are:
• Loose connections
• Incorrect wiring (including swapped wires)
• Bad grounding
• Duplicate station numbers
• Incorrect setup of drives or other devices on the network
The major diagnostic features for fault tracing on an EFB network include Group 53
EFB Protocol parameters 5306…5309. The "Parameter Descriptions" section
describes these parameters in detail.

Diagnostic Situations
The sub-sections below describe various diagnostic situations – the problem
symptoms and corrective actions.
Normal Operation
During normal network operation, 5306…5309 parameter values act as follows at
each drive:
• 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES advances (advances for each application message
properly received and addressed to this drive).
• 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when an invalid
message CRC is received).
• 5308 EFB UART ERRORS does not advance at all (advances when character format
errors are detected, such as parity or framing errors).
• 5309 EFB status value varies depending on network traffic.
• BACnet protocol: 5316 EFB PAR 16 (MS/TP token counter) advances for each
token passed to this drive. (Does not apply for other protocols.)

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 167

Loss of Communication
The ACH550 behavior, if communication is lost, was configured in "Communication
Fault". The parameters are 3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME. The
"Parameter Descriptions" section describes these parameters in detail.
No Master Station on Line
If no master station is on line: Neither the EFB OK MESSAGES nor the errors (5307 EFB
CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS) increase on any of the stations.
To correct:
• Check that a network master is connected and properly programmed on the
network.
• Verify that the cable is connected, and is not cut or short circuited.
Duplicate Stations
If two or more stations have duplicate numbers:
• Two or more drives cannot be addressed.
• Every time there is a read or write to one particular station, the value for 5307 EFB
CRC ERRORS or 5308 EFB UART ERRORS advances.

To correct: Check all station numbers and edit conflicting values.

Swapped Wires
If the communication wires are swapped (terminal A on one drive is connected to
terminal B on another):
• The value of 5306 EFB OK MESSAGES does not advance.
• The values of 5307 EFB CRC ERRORS and 5308 EFB UART ERRORS are advancing.
To correct: Check that the RS-485 lines are not swapped.
Fault 28 – Serial 1 Err
If the drive’s control panel shows fault code 28 “SERIAL 1 ERR”, check for either of the
following:
• The master system is down. To correct, resolve problem with master system.
• The communication connection is bad. To correct, check communication
connection at the drive.
• The time-out selection for the drive is too short for the given installation. The
master is not polling the drive within the specified time-out delay. To correct,
increase the time set by parameter 3019 COMM FAULT TIME.
Fault 31 – EFB1
For BACnet: If the drive’s control panel shows fault code 31 “EFB1”, the drive has an
invalid object instance ID. To correct, use parameters 5311 and 5317 and establish a
unique drive ID that is in the range 1 to 4,194,303.

Embedded Fieldbus
168 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Faults 31…33 – EFB1…EFB3

Except as noted above, these three EFB fault codes (listed for the drive in
"Diagnostics" starting on page 243, fault codes 31…33) are not used.
Intermittent Off-line Occurrences
The problems described above are the most common problems encountered with
ACH550 serial communication. Intermittent problems might also be caused by:
• Marginally loose connections,
• Wear on wires caused by equipment vibrations,
• Insufficient grounding and shielding on both the devices and on the
communication cables.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 169

Modbus Protocol Technical Data

Overview
The Modbus® protocol was introduced by Modicon, Inc. for use in control
environments featuring Modicon programmable controllers. Due to its ease of use
and implementation, this common PLC language was quickly adopted as a de-facto
standard for integration of a wide variety of master controllers and slave devices.
Modbus is a serial, asynchronous protocol. Transactions are half-duplex, featuring a
single Master controlling one or more Slaves. While RS232 can be used for point-to-
point communication between a single Master and a single Slave, a more common
implementation features a multi-drop RS485 network with a single Master controlling
multiple Slaves. The ACH550 features RS485 for its Modbus physical interface.
RTU
The Modbus specification defines two distinct transmission modes: ASCII and RTU.
The ACH550 supports RTU only.
Feature Summary
The following Modbus function codes are supported by the ACH550.
Function Code (Hex) Description
Read Coil Status 0x01 Read discrete output status. For the ACH550, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Read Discrete Input 0x02 Read discrete inputs status. For the ACH550, the individual bits
Status of the status word are mapped to Inputs 1…16 or 1…32,
depending on the active profile. Terminal inputs are mapped
sequentially beginning with Input 33 (e.g. DI1=Input 33).
Read Multiple 0x03 Read multiple holding registers. For the ACH550, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Read Multiple Input 0x04 Read multiple input registers. For the ACH550, the 2 analog input
Registers channels are mapped as input registers 1 & 2.
Force Single Coil 0x05 Write a single discrete output. For the ACH550, the individual bits
of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs are
mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil 33).
Write Single 0x06 Write single holding register. For the ACH550, the entire
Holding Register parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Diagnostics 0x08 Perform Modbus diagnostics. Subcodes for Query (0x00),
Restart (0x01) & Listen Only (0x04) are supported.
Force Multiple Coils 0x0F Write multiple discrete outputs. For the ACH550, the individual
bits of the control word are mapped to Coils 1…16. Relay outputs
are mapped sequentially beginning with Coil 33 (e.g. RO1=Coil
33).
Write Multiple 0x10 Write multiple holding registers. For the ACH550, the entire
Holding Registers parameter set is mapped as holding registers, as well as
command, status and reference values.
Read/Write Multiple 0x17 This function combines functions 0x03 and 0x10 into a single
Holding Registers command.

Embedded Fieldbus
170 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Mapping Summary
The following table summarizes the mapping between the ACH550 (parameters and
I/0) and Modbus reference space. For details, see "Modbus Addressing" below.
ACH550 Modbus Reference Supported Function Codes
• Control Bits Coils(0xxxx) • 01 – Read Coil Status
• Relay Outputs • 05 – Force Single Coil
• 15 – Force Multiple Coils
• Status Bits Discrete Inputs(1xxxx) • 02 – Read Input Status
• Discrete Inputs
• Analog Inputs Input Registers(3xxxxx) • 04 – Read Input Registers
• Parameters Holding Registers(4xxxx) • 03 – Read 4X Registers
• Control/Status Words • 06 – Preset Single 4X Register
• References • 16 – Preset Multiple 4X Registers
• 23 – Read/Write 4X Registers

Communication Profiles
When communicating by Modbus, the ACH550 supports multiple profiles for control
and status information. Parameter 5305 (EFB CTRL PROFILE) selects the profile used.
• ABB DRV LIM – The primary (and default) profile is the ABB DRV LIM profile, which
standardizes the control interface with ACH400 drives. This profile is based on
the PROFIBUS interface, and is discussed in detail in the following sections.
• DCU PROFILE – Another profile is called the DCU PROFILE profile. It extends the
control and status interface to 32 bits, and is the internal interface between the
main drive application and the embedded fieldbus environment.
• ABB DRV FULL – This profile standardizes the control interface with ACH600 and
ACS800 drives. This profile is also based on the PROFIBUS interface, and
supports two control word bits not supported by the ABB DRV LIM profile.

Modbus Addressing
With Modbus, each function code implies access to a specific Modbus reference set.
Thus, the leading digit is not included in the address field of a Modbus message.

Note: The ACH550 supports the zero-based addressing of the Modbus

specification. Holding register 40002 is addressed as 0001 in a Modbus message.
Similarly, coil 33 is addressed as 0032 in a Modbus message.

Refer again to the "Mapping Summary" above. The following sections describe, in
detail, the mapping to each Modbus reference set.
0xxxx Mapping – Modbus Coils. The drive maps the following information to the
0xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Coils:
• Bit-wise map of the CONTROL WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE). The first 32 coils are reserved for this purpose.

• Relay output states, numbered sequentially beginning with coil 00033.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 171

The following table summarizes the 0xxxx reference set:

Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV LIM DCU PROFILE ABB DRV FULL
Ref. (All Profiles) (5305 = 0) (5305 = 1) (5305 = 2)
00001 CONTROL WORD – Bit 0 OFF1* STOP OFF1*
00002 CONTROL WORD – Bit 1 OFF2* START OFF2*
00003 CONTROL WORD – Bit 2 OFF3* REVERSE OFF3*
00004 CONTROL WORD – Bit 3 START LOCAL START
00005 CONTROL WORD – Bit 4 N/A RESET RAMP_OUT_ZERO*
00006 CONTROL WORD – Bit 5 RAMP_HOLD* EXT2 RAMP_HOLD*
00007 CONTROL WORD – Bit 6 RAMP_IN_ZERO* RUN_DISABLE RAMP_IN_ZERO*
00008 CONTROL WORD – Bit 7 RESET STPMODE_R RESET
00009 CONTROL WORD – Bit 8 N/A STPMODE_EM N/A
00010 CONTROL WORD – Bit 9 N/A STPMODE_C N/A
00011 CONTROL WORD – Bit 10 N/A RAMP_2 REMOTE_CMD*
00012 CONTROL WORD – Bit 11 EXT2 RAMP_OUT_0 EXT2
00013 CONTROL WORD – Bit 12 N/A RAMP_HOLD N/A
00014 CONTROL WORD – Bit 13 N/A RAMP_IN_0 N/A
00015 CONTROL WORD – Bit 14 N/A REQ_LOCALLOCK N/A
00016 CONTROL WORD – Bit 15 N/A TORQLIM2 N/A
00017 CONTROL WORD – Bit 16 Does not apply FBLOCAL_CTL Does not apply
00018 CONTROL WORD – Bit 17 FBLOCAL_REF
00019 CONTROL WORD – Bit 18 START_DISABLE1
00020 CONTROL WORD – Bit 19 START_DISABLE2
00021… Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved
00032
00033 RELAY OUTPUT 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1 Relay Output 1
00034 RELAY OUTPUT 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2 Relay Output 2
00035 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3 Relay Output 3
00036 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4 Relay Output 4
00037 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5 Relay Output 5
00038 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6 Relay Output 6

* = Active low
For the 0xxxx registers:
• Status is always readable.
• Forcing is allowed by user configuration of the drive for fieldbus control.
• Additional relay outputs are added sequentially.

Embedded Fieldbus
172 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for coils:
Function Code Description
01 Read coil status
05 Force single coil
15 (0x0F Hex) Force multiple coils

1xxxx Mapping – Modbus Discrete Inputs. The drive maps the following
information to the 1xxxx Modbus set called Modbus Discrete Inputs:
• Bit-wise map of the STATUS WORD (selected using parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE). The first 32 inputs are reserved for this purpose.

• Discrete hardware inputs, numbered sequentially beginning with input 33.

The following table summarizes the 1xxxx reference set:
Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE
Ref. (All Profiles) (5305 = 0 or 2) (5305 = 1)
10001 STATUS WORD – Bit 0 RDY_ON READY
10002 STATUS WORD – Bit 1 RDY_RUN ENABLED
10003 STATUS WORD – Bit 2 RDY_REF STARTED
10004 STATUS WORD – Bit 3 TRIPPED RUNNING
10005 STATUS WORD – Bit 4 OFF_2_STA* ZERO_SPEED
10006 STATUS WORD – Bit 5 OFF_3_STA* ACCELERATE
10007 STATUS WORD – Bit 6 SWC_ON_INHIB DECELERATE
10008 STATUS WORD – Bit 7 ALARM AT_SETPOINT
10009 STATUS WORD – Bit 8 AT_SETPOINT LIMIT
10010 STATUS WORD – Bit 9 REMOTE SUPERVISION
10011 STATUS WORD – Bit 10 ABOVE_LIMIT REV_REF
10012 STATUS WORD – Bit 11 EXT2 REV_ACT
10013 STATUS WORD – Bit 12 RUN_ENABLE PANEL_LOCAL
10014 STATUS WORD – Bit 13 N/A FIELDBUS_LOCAL
10015 STATUS WORD – Bit 14 N/A EXT2_ACT
10016 STATUS WORD – Bit 15 N/A FAULT
10017 STATUS WORD – Bit 16 Reserved ALARM
10018 STATUS WORD – Bit 17 Reserved REQ_MAINT
10019 STATUS WORD – Bit 18 Reserved DIRLOCK
10020 STATUS WORD – Bit 19 Reserved LOCALLOCK
10021 STATUS WORD – Bit 20 Reserved CTL_MODE
10022 STATUS WORD – Bit 21 Reserved Reserved
10023 STATUS WORD – Bit 22 Reserved Reserved
10024 STATUS WORD – Bit 23 Reserved Reserved
10025 STATUS WORD – Bit 24 Reserved Reserved
10026 STATUS WORD – Bit 25 Reserved Reserved
10027 STATUS WORD – Bit 26 Reserved REQ_CTL

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 173

Modbus Internal Location ABB DRV DCU PROFILE

Ref. (All Profiles) (5305 = 0 or 2) (5305 = 1)
10028 STATUS WORD – Bit 27 Reserved REQ_REF1
10029 STATUS WORD – Bit 28 Reserved REQ_REF2
10030 STATUS WORD – Bit 29 Reserved REQ_REF2EXT
10031 STATUS WORD – Bit 30 Reserved ACK_STARTINH
10032 STATUS WORD – Bit 31 Reserved ACK_OFF_ILCK
10033 DI1 DI1 DI1
10034 DI2 DI2 DI2
10035 DI3 DI3 DI3
10036 DI4 DI4 DI4
10037 DI5 DI5 DI5
10038 DI6 DI6 DI6

* = Active low
For the 1xxxx registers:
• Additional discrete inputs are added sequentially.
The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for discrete inputs:
Function Code Description
02 Read input status

3xxxx Mapping – Modbus Inputs. The drive maps the following information to the
3xxxx Modbus addresses called Modbus input registers:
• Any user defined analog inputs.
The following table summarizes the input registers:
Internal
Modbus
Location Remarks
Reference
(All Profiles)
30001 AI1 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 1 (0…100%).
30002 AI2 This register shall report the level of Analog Input 2 (0…100%).

The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 3xxxx registers:
Function Code Description
04 Read 3xxxx input status

4xxxx Register Mapping. The drive maps its parameters and other data to the
4xxxx holding registers as follows:
• 40001…40099 map to drive control and actual values. These registers are
described in the table below.
• 40101…49999 map to drive parameters 0101…9999. Register addresses that do
not correspond to drive parameters are invalid. If there is an attempt to read or
write outside the parameter addresses, the Modbus interface returns an
exception code to the controller.

Embedded Fieldbus
174 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

The following table summarizes the 4xxxx drive control registers 40001…40099 (for
4xxxx registers above 40099, see the drive parameter list, e.g. 40102 is parameter
0102):
Modbus Register Access Remarks
40001 CONTROL WORD R/W Maps directly to the profile‘S CONTROL WORD. Supported
only if 5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter
5319 holds a copy in hex format.
40002 Reference 1 R/W Range = 0…+20000 (scaled to 0…1105 REF1 MAX), or
-20000…0 (scaled to 1105 REF1 MAX…0).
40003 Reference 2 R/W Range = 0…+10000 (scaled to 0…1108 REF2 MAX), or
-10000…0 (scaled to 1108 REF2 MAX…0).
40004 STATUS WORD R Maps directly to the profile‘S STATUS WORD. Supported
only if 5305 = 0 or 2 (ABB Drives profile). Parameter
5320 holds a copy in hex format.
40005 Actual 1 R By default, stores a copy of 0103 OUTPUT FREQ. Use
(select using 5310) parameter 5310 to select a different actual value for this
register.
40006 Actual 2 R By default, stores a copy of 0104 CURRENT. Use
(select using 5311) parameter 5311 to select a different actual value for this
register.
40007 Actual 3 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5312 to
(select using 5312) select an actual value for this register.
40008 Actual 4 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5313 to
(select by 5313) select an actual value for this register.
40009 Actual 5 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5314 to
(select using 5314) select an actual value for this register.
40010 Actual 6 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5315 to
(select using 5315) select an actual value for this register.
40011 Actual 7 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5316 to
(select using 5316) select an actual value for this register.
40012 Actual 8 R By default, stores nothing. Use parameter 5317 to
(select using 5317) select an actual value for this register.
40031 ACH550 CONTROL R/W Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0301.
40032 ACH550 CONTROL R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0302.
40033 ACH550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Least Significant Word of the DCU
WORD LSW profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0303.
40034 ACH550 STATUS R Maps directly to the Most Significant Word of the DCU
WORD MSW profile‘s CONTROL WORD. Supported only if 5305 = 1.
See parameter 0304.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 175

For the Modbus protocol, drive parameters in group 53 report the parameter
mapping to 4xxxx Registers.
Code Description
5310 EFB PAR 10
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40005.
5311 EFB PAR 11
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40006.
5312 EFB PAR 12
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40007.
5313 EFB PAR 13
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40008.
5314 EFB PAR 14
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40009.
5315 EFB PAR 15
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40010.
5316 EFB PAR 16
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40011.
5317 EFB PAR 17
Specifies the parameter mapped to Modbus register 40012.
5318 Reserved.
5319 EFB PAR 19
Holds a copy (in hex) of the CONTROL WORD, Modbus register 40001.
5320 EFB PAR 20
Holds a copy (in hex) of the STATUS WORD, Modbus register 40004.

Except where restricted by the drive, all parameters are available for both reading
and writing. The parameter writes are verified for the correct value, and for a valid
register addresses.

Note! Parameter writes through standard Modbus are always volatile i.e. modified
values are not automatically stored to permanent memory. Use parameter 1607
PARAM. SAVE to save all altered values.

The ACH550 supports the following Modbus function codes for 4xxxx registers:
Function Code Description
03 Read holding 4xxxx registers
06 Preset single 4xxxx register
16 (0x10 Hex) Preset multiple 4xxxx registers
23 (0x17 Hex) Read/write 4xxxx registers

Embedded Fieldbus
176 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Actual Values
The contents of the register addresses 40005…40012 are ACTUAL VALUES and are:
• Specified using parameters 5310…5317.
• Read-only values containing information on the operation of the drive.
• 16-bit words containing a sign bit and a 15-bit integer.
• When negative values, written as the two’s complement of the corresponding
positive value.
• Scaled as described earlier in "Actual Value Scaling".
Exception Codes
Exception codes are serial communication responses from the drive. The ACH550
supports the standard Modbus exception codes defined below.
Exception
Name Meaning
Code
01 ILLEGAL FUNCTION Unsupported Command
02 ILLEGAL DATA ADDRESS The data address received in the query is not allowable. It is not
a defined parameter/group.
03 ILLEGAL DATA VALUE A value contained in the query data field is not an allowable
value for the ACH550, because it is one of the following:
• Outside min. or max. limits.
• Parameter is read-only.
• Message is too long.
• Parameter write not allowed when start is active.
• Parameter write not allowed when factory macro is selected.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 177

ABB Control Profiles Technical Data

Overview
ABB Drives Profile
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple
protocols, including Modbus and the protocols available on the FBA module. Two
implementations of the ABB Drives profile are available:
• ABB DRV FULL – This implementation standardizes the control interface with
ACS600 and ACS800 drives.
• ABB DRV LIM– This implementation standardizes the control interface with
ACS400 drives. This implementation does not support two control word bits
supported by ABB DRV FULL.
Except as noted, the following “ABB Drives Profile” descriptions apply to both
implementations.
DCU Profile
The DCU profile extends the control and status interface to 32 bits, and is the
internal interface between the main drive application and the embedded fieldbus
environment.
Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus master station sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD (ABB Drives profile version) requires that:

• The drive is in remote (REM) control.

• The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling
commands (set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS, 1002 EXT2 COMMANDS
and 1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL).
• The serial communication channel used is configured to use an ABB control
profile. For example, to use the control profile ABB DRV FULL, requires both
parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 1 (STD MODBUS), and parameter 5305 EFB CTRL
PROFILE = 2 (ABB DRV FULL).

Embedded Fieldbus
178 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

ABB Drives Profile

The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the
CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives Profile.
ABB Drives Profile (EFB) CONTROL WORD
Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently
active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF1 ACTIVE
• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON,
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are
active.
1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop.
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF2 ACTIVE
• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED
2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by
parameter 2208.
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF3 ACTIVE
• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and driven
equipment can be stopped using this
mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run
OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active. See 1601. If
1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives
the Run Enable signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION
INHIBITED INHIBITED

4 Unused (ABB DRV LIM)

RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED
(ABB DRV FULL)
0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to
Zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC
voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED

0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held)
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
ZERO
0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to
zero.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 179

ABB Drives Profile (EFB) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
7 RESET 0=>1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if 1604 =
COMM.

0 OPERATING Continue normal operation

8…9 Unused
10 Unused (ABB DRV LIM)
REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled.
(ABB DRV FULL)
0 • CW =/ 0 or Ref =/ 0: Retain last CW and
Ref.
• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp
are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXT2).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXT1).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
12…15 Unused

DCU Profile
The following tables describe the CONTROL WORD content for the DCU profile.
DCU Profile CONTROL WORD (See Parameter 0301)
Bit Name Value Command/Req. Comments
0 STOP 1 Stop Stops according to either the stop
mode parameter or the stop mode
0 (no op) requests (bits 7 and 8).
1 START 1 Start Simultaneous STOP and START
commands result in a stop command.
0 (no op)
2 REVERSE 1 Reverse direction This bit XOR’d with the sign of the
reference defines direction.
0 Forward direction
3 LOCAL 1 Local mode When the fieldbus sets this bit, it steals
control and the drive moves to fieldbus
0 External mode local control mode.
4 RESET -> 1 Reset Edge sensitive.
other (no op)
5 EXT2 1 Switch to EXT2
0 Switch to EXT1
6 RUN_DISABLE 1 Run disable Inverted run enable.
0 Run enable on
7 STPMODE_R 1 Normal ramp stop
mode
0 (no op)

Embedded Fieldbus
180 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

DCU Profile CONTROL WORD (See Parameter 0301)

Bit Name Value Command/Req. Comments
8 STPMODE_EM 1 Emergency ramp
stop mode
0 (no op)
9 STPMODE_C 1 Coast stop mode
0 (no op)
10 RAMP_2 1 Ramp pair 2
0 Ramp pair 1
11 RAMP_OUT_0 1 Ramp output to 0
0 (no op)
12 RAMP_HOLD 1 Ramp freeze
0 (no op)
13 RAMP_IN_0 1 Ramp input to 0
0 (no op)
14 RREQ_LOCALLOC 1 Local mode lock In lock, drive will not switch to local
mode.
0 (no op)
15 TORQLIM2 1 Torque limit pair 2
0 Torque limit pair 1

DCU Profile CONTROL WORD (See Parameter 0302)

Bit Name Value Function Comments
16…26 Reserved
27 REF_CONST 1 Constant speed ref. These bits are only for supervision
purposes.
0 (no op)
28 REF_AVE 1 Average speed ref.
0 (no op)
29 LINK_ON 1 Master is detected
in link
0 Link is down
30 REQ_STARTINH 1 Start inhibit request
is pending
0 Start inhibit request
is OFF
31 OFF_INTERLOCK 1 Panel OFF button For the control panel (or PC tool) this is
pressed the OFF button interlock.
0 (no op)

Status Word
The contents of the STATUS WORD is status information, sent by the drive to the
master station.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 181

ABB Drives Profile

The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the status
word content for the ABB Drives Profile.
ABB Drives Profile (EFB) STATUS WORD
Description
Bit Name Value
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON

0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON

1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE

0 OFF1 ACTIVE

2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED

0 OPERATION INHIBITED

3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT

0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 INACTIVE

0 OFF2 ACTIVE

5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 INACTIVE

0 OFF3 ACTIVE

6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE

0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE

7 ALARM 1 Warning/alarm (See "Alarm Listing" in the "Diagnostics"

section for details on alarms.)
0 No warning/alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits)
the reference value.
0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to
reference value).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.
Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value <
supervision low limit.
See group 32, Supervision
0 Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value >
supervision high limit.
See group 32, Supervision
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received
0 No External Run Enable signal received
13… 15 Unused

Embedded Fieldbus
182 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

DCU Profile
The following tables describe the STATUS WORD content for the DCU profile.
DCU Profile STATUS WORD (See Parameter 0303)
Bit Name Value Status
0 READY 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.
0 Drive is not ready.
1 ENABLED 1 External run enable signal received.
0 No external run enable signal received.
2 STARTED 1 Drive has received start command.
0 Drive has not received start command.
3 RUNNING 1 Drive is modulating.
0 Drive is not modulating.
4 ZERO_SPEED 1 Drive is at zero speed.
0 Drive has not reached zero speed.
5 ACCELERATE 1 Drive is accelerating.
0 Drive is not accelerating.
6 DECELERATE 1 Drive is decelerating.
0 Drive is not decelerating.
7 AT_SETPOINT 1 Drive is at setpoint.
0 Drive has not reached setpoint.
8 LIMIT 1 Operation is limited by Group 20 settings.
0 Operation is within Group 20 settings.
9 SUPERVISION 1 A supervised parameter (Group 32) is outside its limits.
0 All supervised parameters are within limits.
10 REV_REF 1 Drive reference is in reverse direction.
0 Drive reference is in forward direction.
11 REV_ACT 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.
0 Drive is running in forward direction.
12 PANEL_LOCAL 1 Control is in control panel (or PC tool) local mode.
0 Control is not in control panel local mode.
13 FIELDBUS_LOCAL 1 Control is in fieldbus local mode (steals control panel local).
0 Control is not in fieldbus local mode.
14 EXT2_ACT 1 Control is in EXT2 mode.
0 Control is in EXT1 mode.
15 FAULT 1 Drive is in a fault state.
0 Drive is not in a fault state.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 183

DCU Profile STATUS WORD (See Parameter 0304)

Bit Name Value Status
16 ALARM 1 An alarm is on.
0 No alarms are on.
17 REQ_MAINT 1 A maintenance request is pending.
0 No maintenance request is pending.
18 DIRLOCK 1 Direction lock is ON. (Direction change is locked out.)
0 Direction lock is OFF.
19 LOCALLOCK 1 Local mode lock is ON. (Local mode is locked out.)
0 Local mode lock is OFF.
20 CTL_MODE 1 Drive is in vector control mode.
0 Drive is in scalar control mode.
21…25 Reserved
26 REQ_CTL 1 Copy the control word
0 (no op)
27 REQ_REF1 1 Reference 1 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 1 is not requested in this channel.
28 REQ_REF2 1 Reference 2 requested in this channel.
0 Reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
29 REQ_REF2EXT 1 External PID reference 2 requested in this channel.
0 External PID reference 2 is not requested in this channel.
30 ACK_STARTINH 1 A start inhibit from this channel is granted.
0 A start inhibit from this channel is not granted.
31 ACK_OFF_ILCK 1 Start inhibit due to OFF button
0 Normal operation

Embedded Fieldbus
184 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

State Diagram
ABB Drives Profile
To illustrate the operation of the state diagram, the following example (ABB DRV LIM
implementation of the ABB Drives profile) uses the control word to start the drive:
• First, the requirements for using the CONTROL WORD must be met. See above.
• When the power is first connected, the state of the drive is not ready to switch on.
See dotted lined path ( ) in the state diagram below.
• Use the CONTROL WORD to step through the state machine states until the
OPERATING state is reached, meaning that the drive is running and follows the
given reference. See table below.
Step CONTROL WORD Value Description
1 CW = 0000 0000 0000 0110 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO SWITCH
ON.
bit 15 bit 0
2 Wait at least 100 ms before proceeding.
3 CW = 0000 0000 0000 0111 This CW value changes the drive state to READY TO OPERATE.
4 CW = 0000 0000 0000 1111 This CW value changes the drive state to OPERATION ENABLED.
The drive starts, but will not accelerate.
5 CW = 0000 0000 0010 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)
output, and changes the drive state to RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED.

6 CW = 0000 0000 0110 1111 This CW value releases the ramp function generator (RFG)
output, and changes the drive state to OPERATING. The drive
accelerates to the given reference and follows the reference.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 185

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits for the ABB Drives profile.
From any state From any state From any state
Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault
OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)

OFF3 OFF2
(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0) FAULT (SW Bit3=1)
ACTIVE ACTIVE

f=0 / I=0 (CW Bit7=1)*

From any state

SWITCH-ON
OFF1 (CW Bit0=0) MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)

f=0 / I=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)

A C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON

(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx xxxx xxxx x110)

OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2=0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON

(CW xxxx xxxx xxxx x111)

C D READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE

(CW Bit5=0) (CW Bit3=1 and

SW Bit12=1)

OPERATION
D (SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED

A
(CW Bit6=0) (CW Bit5=1)

KEY
State RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
CW = CONTROL WORD
SW = STATUS WORD C
Path described in example (CW Bit6=1)
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
D
*This state transition also occurs if the fault is reset from any other source (e.g. digital input).

Embedded Fieldbus
186 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Reference Scaling
ABB Drives and DCU Profiles
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives and DCU Profiles
Reference
Reference Range Scaling Remarks
Type
REF1 -32767 Speed or -20000 = -(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
… frequency 0=0 1104/1105. Actual motor
+32767 +20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by 2001/2002
(20000 corresponds to 100%) (speed) or 2007/2008
(frequency).
REF2 -32767 Speed or -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
… frequency 0=0 1107/1108. Actual motor
+32767 +10000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by 2001/2002
(10000 corresponds to 100%) (speed) or 2007/2008
(frequency).
Torque -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
0=0 2015/2017 (torque1) or 2016/
+10000 = (par. 1108) 2018 (torque2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
Reference 0=0 4012/4013 (PID set1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 4112/4113 (PID set2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)

Note! The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on
the scaling of references.

When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM+AI1 or
COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:

ABB Drives and DCU Profiles

Value
Reference AI Reference Scaling
Setting
REF1 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) +(AI (%) - 0.5*REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
(100 + 0.5 * (Par. 1105)%

100%

AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 187

ABB Drives and DCU Profiles

Value
Reference AI Reference Scaling
Setting
REF1 COMM*AI1 COMM (%) * (AI (%) / 0.5*REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
200%

100%

AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%

REF2 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) + (AI (%) - 0.5*REF2 MAX (%))

Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
(100 + 0.5 * (Par. 1108)%

100%

AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1108)%
0% 50% 100%

REF2 COMM*AI1 COMM (%) * (AI (%) / 0.5*REF2 MAX (%))

Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
200%

100%

AI1 Input Signal

0%
0% 50% 100%

Embedded Fieldbus
188 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Reference Handling
Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control
location (EXT1 and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters
and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values (REF1
and REF2). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is they can be positive or
negative.
ABB Drives Profile
Parameter Value Setting AI Reference Scaling
1003 DIRECTION 1 (FORWARD)
Resultant Ref.
Max. Ref

Fieldbus
Reference -163% -100% 100% 163%

-(Max. Ref.)

1003 DIRECTION 2 (REVERSE) Max. Ref

Resultant Ref.

Fieldbus -163% -100% 100% 163%

Reference

-(Max. Ref.)

1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST)

Resultant Ref.
Max. Ref

Fieldbus -163% -100%

Reference 100% 163%

-(Max. Ref.)

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 189

N2 Protocol Technical Data

Overview
The N2 Fieldbus connection to the ACH550 drives is based on an industry standard
RS-485 physical interface. The N2 Fieldbus protocol is a master-slave type, serial
communication protocol, used by the Johnson Controls Metasys® system. In the
Metasys architecture the N2 Fieldbus connects object interfaces and remote
controllers to Network Control Units (NCUs).
The N2 Fieldbus can also be used to connect ACH550 drives to the Metasys
Companion product line.
This section describes the use of the N2 Fieldbus with the ACH550 drives’
connection and does not describe the protocol in detail.
Supported Features
In the N2 Fieldbus protocol the ACH550 drive appears as a “virtual object”.
Metasys
Analog Inputs

Binary Inputs
ACH550
Virtual Object Analog Outputs

Binary Outputs

Note: Metasys inputs are drive outputs and

drive inputs are Metasys outputs
Internal values, Float, Integer, Byte

A virtual object is made up of:

• Analog Inputs
• Binary Inputs
• Analog Outputs
• Binary Outputs
• Internal values for Floating point, Integer, and Byte values.
The ACH550 drive does not support N2 Fieldbus communication “internal values”.
All of the Analog and Binary I/O objects are listed below, starting with "N2 Analog
Input Objects" on page 191.
Analog Input – The analog input objects support the following features:
• Analog Input actual value in engineering units
• Low Alarm limit
• Low Warning limit
• High Warning limit
• High Alarm limit
• Differential value for the hysteresis of the Alarms and Warnings

Embedded Fieldbus
190 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

• Change of State (COS) enabled

• Alarm Enabled
• Warning Enabled
• Override value is received, but there is no action taken.
Binary Input – The binary input objects support the following features:
• Binary Input actual value
• Normal / Alarm state specification
• Alarm Enabled
• Change of State (COS) enabled
• Override value is received, but there is no action taken.
Analog Output – The analog output objects support the following features:
• Analog Output value in engineering units
• Override value is used to change the Analog Output value. It is not possible to
return to the previous value by removing the override. The override feature is
used only to change the value.
Binary Output – The binary output objects support the following features:
• Binary Output value
• Override value is used to change the Binary Output value. It is not possible to
return to the previous value by removing the override. The override feature is
used only to change the value.
Metasys Integration
The following diagram shows the drives’ integration to the Johnson Controls
Metasys system.
N1LAN

NCU
N2 Fieldbus

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 191

The following diagram shows the drives’ integration to the Johnson Controls
Metasys Companion system.
PC-Version
PC Version Panel Version/LTD
Panel Version/LTD

Converter Converter
RS232 -RS485

N2 Fieldbus

On the N2 Fieldbus each ACH550 drive can be accessed by the full complement of
Metasys FMS features, including Change-of-State (COS) monitoring, alarm
notification, scheduling, trend, and totalization.
On one N2 Fieldbus segment there can be up to 32 nodes while integrating ACH550
drives with Johnson Controls Metasys.
Drive Device Type
For the Metasys and Metasys Companion products, the device type for the ACH550
drive is VND.

N2 Analog Input Objects

The following table lists the N2 Analog Input objects defined for the ACH550 drive.
N2 Analog Inputs:
Drive Scale
Number Object Units Range
Parameter Factor
AI1 OUTPUT FREQUENCY 0103 10 Hz 0…250
AI2 RATED SPEED Note 1 10 % 0 …100
AI3 SPEED 0102 1 rpm 0 …9999
AI4 CURRENT 0104 10 A 0…9999
AI5 TORQUE 0105 10 % -200…200
AI6 POWER 0106 10 kW 0…9999
AI7 DRIVE TEMPERATURE 0110 10 °C 0 …125
AI8 KILOWATT HOURS 0115 1 kWh 0…9999

Embedded Fieldbus
192 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

N2 Analog Inputs:
Drive Scale
Number Object Units Range
Parameter Factor
AI9 MEGAWATT HOURS 0141 1 MWh 0…999
AI10 RUN TIME 0114 1 H 0…9999
AI11 DC BUS VOLTAGE 0107 1 V 0…999
AI12 OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0109 1 V 0…999
AI13 PRC PID FEEDBACK 0130 10 % 0…100
AI14 PRC PID DEVIATION 0132 10 % 0…100
AI15 EXT PID FEEDBACK 0131 10 % 0…100
AI16 EXT PID DEVIATION 0133 10 % 0…100
AI17 LAST FAULT 0401 1 fault code
AI18 PREV FAULT 0402 1 fault code
AI19 OLDEST FAULT 0403 1 fault code
AI20 AI 1 ACTUAL 0120 10 % 0…100
AI21 AI 2 ACTUAL 0121 10 % 0…100
AI22 AO 1 ACTUAL 0124 10 mA 0…20
AI23 AO 2 ACTUAL 0125 10 mA 0…20
AI24 MOTOR TEMP 0145 1 °C 0…200
AI25 REVOLUTION CNT 0142 1 MREV 0…32767

1. RATED SPEED is a percent of maximum frequency (parameter 2008) if the drive is in scalar mode,
and is a percent of maximum speed (parameter 2002) in speed mode.

N2 Binary Input Objects

The following table lists the N2 Binary Input objects defined for the ACH550 drive.
N2 Binary Inputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BI1 STOP/RUN Status Word 0 = Stop, 1 = Drive Running
BI2 FORWARD/REVERSE Status Word 0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse
BI3 FAULT STATUS Status Word 0 = OK, 1 = Drive Fault
BI4 RELAY 1 STATUS 0122 (bit mask 04) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI5 RELAY 2 STATUS 0122 (bit mask 02) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI6 RELAY 3 STATUS 0122 (bit mask 01) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI7 RELAY 4 STATUS 0123 (bit mask 04) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI8 RELAY 5 STATUS 0123 (bit mask 02) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI9 RELAY 6 STATUS 0123 (bit mask 01) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI10 INPUT 1 STATUS 0118 (bit mask 04) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI11 INPUT 2 STATUS 0118 (bit mask 02) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI12 INPUT 3 STATUS 0118 (bit mask 01) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI13 INPUT 4 STATUS 0119 (bit mask 04) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI14 INPUT 5 STATUS 0119 (bit mask 02) 0 = Off, 1 = On

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 193

N2 Binary Inputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BI15 INPUT 6 STATUS 0119 (bit mask 01) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BI16 EXTERNAL 2 SELECT Status Word 0 = EXT1 = EXT2
BI17 HAND/AUTO Status Word 0 = AUTO, 1 = HAND
BI18 ALARM Status Word 0 = OK, 1 = ALARM
BI19 MAINTENANCE REQ Status Word 0 = OK, 1 = MAINT REQ
BI20 DRIVE READY Status Word 0 = Not Ready, 1 = Ready
BI21 AT SETPOINT Status Word 0 = No, 1 = At Setpoint
BI22 RUN ENABLED Status Word 0 = Not Enabled, 1 = Enabled
BI23 N2 LOCAL MODE Status Word 0 = Auto, 1 = N2 Local
BI24 N2 CONTROL SRC Status Word 0 = No, 1 = Yes
BI25 N2 REF1 SRC Status Word 0 = No, 1 = Yes
BI26 N2 REF2 SRC Status Word 0 = No, 1 = Yes

N2 Analog Output Objects

The following table lists the N2 Analog Output objects defined for the ACH550 drive.
N2 Analog Outputs:
Drive Scale
Number Object Units Range
Parameter Factor
AO1 REFERENCE 1 Reference 1 10 % 0…100
AO2 REFERENCE 2 Reference 2 10 % 0…100
AO3 ACCEL TIME 1 2202 10 s 0.1…1800
AO4 DECEL TIME 1 2203 10 s 0.1…1800
AO5 CURRENT LIMIT 2003 10 A 0…1.3*I2N
AO6 PID1-CONT GAIN 4001 10 % 0.1…100
AO7 PID1-CONT I-TIME 4002 10 s 0.1…600
AO8 PID1-CONT D-TIME 4003 10 s 0…10
AO9 PID1-CONT D FILTER 4004 10 s 0…10
AO10 PID2-CONT GAIN 4101 10 % 0.1…100
AO11 PID2-CONT I-TIME 4102 10 s 0.1…600
AO12 PID2-CONT D-TIME 4103 10 s 0…10
AO13 PID2-CONT D FILTER 4104 10 s 0…10
AO14 COMMAND AO 1 135 10 % 0…100
AO15 COMMAND AO 2 136 10 % 0…100
AO16 EXT PID SETPOINT 4211 10 % 0…100
AO17 SPD OUT MIN 2001/2007 10 % 0…200
AO18 SPD OUT MAX 2002/2008 10 % 0…200
A019 MAILBOX PARAMETER 1 0…65535
A020 MAILBOX DATA 1 0…65535

Embedded Fieldbus
194 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

N2 Binary Output Objects

The following table lists the N2 Binary Output objects defined for the ACH550 drive.
N2 Binary Outputs:
Number Object Drive Parameter Range
BO1 STOP/START Command Word 0 = Stop, 1 = Start to Speed
BO2 FORWARD/REVERSE Command Word 0 = Forward, 1 = Reverse
BO3 PANEL LOCK Command Word 0 = Open, 1 = Locked
BO4 RUN ENABLE Command Word 0 = Enable, 1 = Disable
BO5 REF1/REF2 SELECT Command Word 0 = Ref1, 1 = Ref2
BO6 FAULT RESET Command Word Change 0 -> 1 Resets
BO7 COMMAND RO 1 134 (bit mask 01) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO8 COMMAND RO 2 134 (bit mask 02) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO9 COMMAND RO 3 134 (bit mask 04) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO10 COMMAND RO 4 134 (bit mask 08) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO11 COMMAND RO 5 134 (bit mask 10) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO12 COMMAND RO 6 134 (bit mask 20) 0 = Off, 1 = On
BO13 RESET RUN TIME 114 (indirectly) 0 = N/A, 1 = On (Reset Run Time)
BO14 RESET KWH COUNT 115 (indirectly) 0 = N/A, 1 = On (Reset kWh Count)
BO15 PRC PID SELECT 4027 (indirectly) 0 = SET2, 1 = SET2
BO16 N2 LOCAL CTL (Note 1) Command Word 0 = Auto, 1 = N2
BO17 N2 LOCAL REF (Note 1) Command Word 0 = Auto, 1 = N2
BO18 SAVE PARAMETERS 1607 (indirectly) 0 = N/A, 1 = On (Save Parameters)
B019 READ MAILBOX 0 = No, 1 = Yes
B020 WRITE MAILBOX 0 = No, 1 = Yes

1. N2 LOCAL CTL and N2 LOCAL REF have priority over drive input terminals. Use these binary
outputs for temporary N2 control of the drive when COMM is not the selected control source.

DDL File for NCU

The listing below is the Data Definition Language (DDL) file for ACH550 drives used
with the Network Control Units.
This listing is useful when defining drive I/O objects to the Network Controller Units.
Below is the ACH550.DDL file listing.
*******************************************************************
* ABB Drives, ACH 550 Variable Frequency Drive
*******************************************************************
CSMODEL "ACH_550","VND"

AITITLE "Analog_Inputs"
BITITLE "Binary_Inputs"
AOTITLE "Analog_Outputs"
BOTITLE "Binary_Outputs"

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 195

CSAI "AI1",N,N,"FREQ_ACT","Hz"
CSAI "AI2",N,N,"PCT_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI3",N,N,"SPEED","RPM"
CSAI "AI4",N,N,"CURRENT","A"
CSAI "AI5",N,N,"TORQUE","%"
CSAI "AI6",N,N,"POWER","kW"
CSAI "AI7",N,N,"DRV_TEMP","°C"
CSAI "AI8",N,N,"ENERGY_k","kWh"
CSAI "AI9",N,N,"ENERGY_M","MWh"
CSAI "AI10",N,N,"RUN_TIME","H"
CSAI "AI11",N,N,"DC_VOLT","V"
CSAI "AI12",N,N,"VOLT_ACT","V"
CSAI "AI13",N,N,"PID1_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI14",N,N,"PID2_DEV","%"
CSAI "AI15",N,N,"PID2_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI16",N,N,"PID2_DEV","%"
CSAI "AI17",N,N,"LAST_FLT","Code"
CSAI "AI18",N,N,"PREV_FLT","Code"
CSAI "AI19",N,N,"1ST_FLT","Code"
CSAI "AI20",N,N,"AI_1_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI21",N,N,"AI_2_ACT","%"
CSAI "AI22",N,N,"AO_1_ACT","mA"
CSAI "AI23",N,N,"AO_2_ACT","mA"
CSAI "AI24",N,N,"MTR_TEMP","°C"
CSAI "AI25",N,N,"REVL_CNT",""

CSBI "BI1",N,N,"STOP/RUN","STOP","RUN"
CSBI "BI2",N,N,"FWD/REV","FWD","REV"
CSBI "BI3",N,N,"FAULT","OK","FLT"
CSBI "BI4",N,N,"RELAY_1","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI5",N,N,"RELAY_2","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI6",N,N,"RELAY_3","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI7",N,N,"RELAY_4","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI8",N,N,"RELAY_5","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI9",N,N,"RELAY_6","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI10",N,N,"INPUT_1","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI11",N,N,"INPUT_2","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI12",N,N,"INPUT_3","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI13",N,N,"INPUT_4","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI14",N,N,"INPUT_5","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI15",N,N,"INPUT_6","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI16",N,N,"EXT1/2","EXT1","EXT2"
CSBI "BI17",N,N,"HND/AUTO","HAND","AUTO"
CSBI "BI18",N,N,"ALARM","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI19",N,N,"MNTNCE_R","OFF","ON"
CSBI "BI20",N,N,"DRV_REDY","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI21",N,N,"AT_SETPT","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI22",N,N,"RUN_ENAB","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI23",N,N,"N2_LOC_M","AUTO","N2_L"
CSBI "BI24",N,N,"N2_CTRL","NO","YES"

Embedded Fieldbus
196 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

CSBI "BI25",N,N,"N2_R1SRC","NO","YES"
CSBI "BI26",N,N,"N2_R2SRC","NO","YES"
CSAO "AO1",Y,Y,"REF_1","%"
CSAO "AO2",Y,Y,"REF_2","%"
CSAO "AO3",Y,Y,"ACCEL_1","s"
CSAO "AO4",Y,Y,"DECEL_1","s"
CSAO "AO5",Y,Y,"CURR_LIM","A"
CSAO "AO6",Y,Y,"PID1_GN","%"
CSAO "AO7",Y,Y,"PID1_I","s"
CSAO "AO8",Y,Y,"PID1_D","s"
CSAO "AO9",Y,Y,"PID1_FLT","s"
CSAO "AO10",Y,Y,PID2_GN","%"
CSAO "AO11",Y,Y,"PID2_I","s"
CSAO "AO12",Y,Y,"PID2_D","s"
CSAO "AO13",Y,Y,"PID2_FLT","s"
CSAO "AO14",Y,Y,"CMD_AO_1","%"
CSAO "AO15",Y,Y,"CMD_AO_2","%"
CSAO "AO16",Y,Y,"PI2_STPT","%"
CSAO "AO17",Y,Y,"MIN_SPD","%"
CSAO "AO18",Y,Y,"MAX_SPD","%"
CSAO "AO19",Y,Y,"MB_PARAM",""
CSAO "AO20",Y,Y,"MB_DATA",""
CSBO "BO1",Y,Y,"START","STOP","START"
CSBO "BO2",Y,Y,"REVERSE","FWD","REV"
CSBO "BO3",Y,Y,"PAN_LOCK","OPEN","LOCKED"
CSBO "BO4",Y,Y,"RUN_ENAB","DISABLE","ENABLE"
CSBO "BO5",Y,Y,"R1/2_SEL","EXT_1","EXT_2"
CSBO "BO6",Y,Y,"FLT_RSET","-","RESET"
CSBO "BO7",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_1","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO8",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_2","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO9",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_3","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO10",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_4","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO11",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_5","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO12",Y,Y,"CMD_RO_6","OFF","ON"
CSBO "BO13",Y,Y,"RST_RTIM","OFF","RESET"
CSBO "BO14",Y,Y,"RST_KWH","OFF","RESET"
CSBO "BO15",Y,Y,"PID_SEL","SET1","SET2"
CSBO "BO16",Y,Y,"N2_LOC_C","AUTO","N2"
CSBO "BO17",Y,Y,"N2_LOC_R","EUTO","N2"
CSBO "BO18",Y,Y,"SAV_PRMS","OFF","SAVE"
CSBO "BO19",Y,Y,"READ_MB","NO","READ"
CSBO "BO20",Y,Y,"WRITE_MB","NO","WRITE"

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 197

FLN Protocol Technical Data

Overview
The FLN fieldbus connection to the ACH550 drives is based on an industry standard
RS-485 physical interface. The FLN (Floor Level Network) Fieldbus protocol is a
serial communication protocol, used by the Siemens APOGEE® system. The
ACH550 interface is specified in Siemens application 2734.
Supported Features
The ACH550 supports all required FLN features.

Reports
The ACH550 provides seven pre-defined reports. Using a report request generated
from the FLN fieldbus controller, select one of the following sets of points. By
providing views of selected points, these reports are often easier to work with than
views of the full point database.
ABB ACH550
FLN ABB ACH550 Report
Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
01 LAO CTLR ADDRESS Each host FLN application (e.g. CIS or Insight) controls
both the particular data reported for each point, and the
02 LAO APPLICATION report format.
20 LAO OVRD TIME
29 LDO DAY.NIGHT

Startup
FLN Startup Report
Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
21 LDI FWD.REV Each host FLN application (e.g. CIS or Insight) controls
both the particular data reported for each point, and the
22 LDO CMD FWD.REV report format.
23 LDI STOP.RUN
24 LDO CMD STP.STRT
25 LDI EXT1.2 ACT
26 LDO EXT1.2 CMD
34 LDI ENA.DIS ACT
35 LDO ENA.DIS CMD
36 LDI FLN LOC ACT
60 LAO INPUT REF1
61 LAO INPUT REF2
68 LDO FLN LOC CTL
69 LDO FLN LOC REF

Embedded Fieldbus
198 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

FLN Startup Report

Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
94 LDO RESET FAULT

Overview
FLN Overview Report
Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
03 LAI FREQ OUTPUT Each host FLN application (e.g. CIS or Insight) controls
both the particular data reported for each point, and the
04 LAI PCT OUTPUT report format.
05 LAI SPEED
06 LAI CURRENT
07 LAI TORQUE
08 LAI POWER
09 LAI DRIVE TEMP
10 LAI DRIVE KWH
11 LAI DRIVE MWH
12 LAI RUN TIME
13 LAI DC BUS VOLT
14 LAI OUTPUT VOLT
17 LAI MOTOR TEMP
18 LAI MREV COUNTER
21 LDI FWD.REV
23 LDI STOP.RUN
25 LDI EXT1.2 ACT
27 LDI DRIVE READY
28 LDI AT SETPOINT
33 LDI HANDAUTO ACT
34 LDI ENA.DIS ACT
36 LDI FLN LOC ACT

Drive I/O
FLN Drive I/O Report
Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
40 LDO RO 1 COMMAND Each host FLN application (e.g. CIS or Insight) controls
both the particular data reported for each point, and the
41 LDO RO 2 COMMAND report format.
42 LDO RO 3 COMMAND
43 LDO RO 4 COMMAND
44 LDO RO 5 COMMAND

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 199

FLN Drive I/O Report

Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
45 LDO RO 6 COMMAND
46 LAO AO 1 COMMAND
47 LAO AO 2 COMMAND
70 LDI DI 1 ACTUAL
71 LDI DI 2 ACTUAL
72 LDI DI 3 ACTUAL
73 LDI DI 4 ACTUAL
74 LDI DI 5 ACTUAL
75 LDI DI 6 ACTUAL
76 LDI RO 1 ACTUAL
77 LDI RO 2 ACTUAL
78 LDI RO 3 ACTUAL
79 LDI RO 4 ACTUAL
80 LDI RO 5 ACTUAL
81 LDI RO 6 ACTUAL
85 LAI AO 2 ACTUAL

Drive Config
FLN Drive Config. Report
Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
30 LAO CURRENT LIM Each host FLN application (e.g. CIS or Insight) controls
both the particular data reported for each point, and the
31 LAO ACCEL TIME 1 report format.
32 LAO DECEL TIME 1
48 LDO RST RUN TIME
49 LDO RESET KWH
59 LDO LOCK PANEL
66 LDO SPD OUT MIN
67 LDO SPD OUT MAX
95 LAO MBOX PARAM
96 LAO MBOX DATA
97 LDO MBOX READ
98 LDO MBOX WRITE

Embedded Fieldbus
200 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Process PID
FLN Process PID Report
Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
15 LAI PRC PID FBCK Each host FLN application (e.g. CIS or Insight) controls
both the particular data reported for each point, and the
16 LAI PRC PID DEV report format.
50 LAO PRC PID GAIN
51 LAO PRC PID ITIM
52 LAO PRC PID DTIM
53 LAO PRC PID DFIL
54 LDO PRC PID SEL
60 LAO INPUT REF1
61 LAO INPUT REF2
82 LAI AI 1 ACTUAL
83 LAI AI 2 ACTUAL
84 LAI AO 1 ACTUAL
85 LAI AO 2 ACTUAL

External PID
FLN External PID Report
Point
Subpoint Name Data
# Type
55 LAO EXT PID GAIN Each host FLN application (e.g. CIS or Insight) controls
both the particular data reported for each point, and the
56 LAO EXT PID ITIM report format.
57 LAO EXT PID DTIM
58 LAO EXT PID DFIL
62 LAO EXT PID STPT
63 LAI EXT PID FBCK
64 LAI EXT PID DEV
82 LAI AI 1 ACTUAL
83 LAI AI 2 ACTUAL
84 LAI AO 1 ACTUAL
85 LAI AO 2 ACTUAL

Scaling Drive Feedback Values

Feedback values are provided with units of percent, where 0% and 100%
correspond to the range of the sensor being used to measure the control variable.
These points have default units in Hz. If other units are required:
• Unbundle these points with appropriate slopes and intercepts.
• The new intercept equals the lowest value of the desired range.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 201

• Calculate the new slope as follows:

(Desired Range, i.e. high - low values) x (Slope of Existing Point)
New Slope =
Range of Existing Point
(60 Hz - 0 Hz) x (0.01)
= = 0.006
100% - 0%

Example – You are controlling water temperature from a cooling tower using the
ACH550 to control a fan. The temperature sensor has a range of 30 to 250 degrees
Fahrenheit.
To unbundle the set point (INPUT REF 2), for commanding in degrees Fahrenheit,
where 0…60 Hz is equal to 30…250° F:
New Intercept = 30 (the temperature that corresponds to 0%)

(Desired Range) x (Slope of Existing Point)

New Slope =
Range of Existing Point
(250° F - 30° F) x (0.1)
= = 0.22
100% - 0%

To unbundle the feedback (PRC PID FBCK) for monitoring in degrees Fahrenheit:
New Intercept = 30

(Desired Range) x (Slope of Existing Point)

New Slope =
Range of Existing Point
(250° F - 30° F) x (0.01)
= = 0.022
100% - 0%

Loop Gains
PRC PID GAIN (Point 50) and PRC PID ITIM (Point 51) are PID parameters similar
to the P and I gains in the APOGEE TECs. Because the ABB PI loop and the
Siemens loop are structured differently, there is no a one-to-one correspondence
between the gains. The following formulas allow translation from ABB gains to
Siemens gains and vice versa:
• To convert from ABB PI gains to Siemens P and I gains:
P GAINSiemens = PI GAINABB x 0.0015

PI GAINABB
I GAINSiemens= x 0.0015
PI GAINABB

• To convert from Siemens P and I gains to ABB PI gains:

P GAINABB = PI GAINSiemens x 667

PI GAINSiemens
I GAINABB = x 667
PI GAINSiemens

Embedded Fieldbus
202 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Point Database
The following table lists the point database for FLN / ACH550 (Application 2734).
FLN Point Database
Factory Engr.
Point Slope Intercept
Subpoint Name Default Units On Text Off Text
# Type (SI Units)
01 LAO CTLR ADDRESS 99 - 1 0 - -
02 LAO APPLICATION 2734 - 1 - -
{03} LAI FREQ OUTPUT 0 Hz 0.1 0 - -
{04} LAI PCT OUTPUT 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -
{05} LAI SPEED 0 RPM 1 0 - -
{06} LAI CURRENT 0 A 0.1 - -
{07} LAI TORQUE 0 PCT 0.1 -200 - -
{08} LAI POWER 0 HP 0.134 0 - -
(0) (KW) 0.1 0
{09} LAI DRIVE TEMP 77 °F 0.18 32 - -
(25) (° C) (0.1) 0
{10} LAI DRIVE KWH 0 KWH 1 - -
{11} LAI DRIVE MWH 0 MWH 1 - -
{12} LAI RUN TIME 0 HRS 1 - -
{13} LAI DC BUS VOLT 0 V 1 - -
{14} LAI OUTPUT VOLT 0 V 1 - -
{15} LAI PRC PID FBCK 0 PCT 0.1 - -
{16} LAI PRC PID DEV 0 PCT 0.1 - -
{17} LAI MOTOR TEMP 77(25) ° F (° C) 1.8 (1) 32 0 - -
{18} LAI MREV 0 MREV 1 0 - -
COUNTER
20 LAO OVRD TIME 1 hrs 1 0 - -
{21} LDI FWD.REV FWD - 1 0 REV FWD
{22} LDO CMD FWD.REV FWD - 1 0 REV FWD
{23} LDI STOP.RUN STOP - 1 0 RUN STOP
{24} LDO CMD STP.STRT STOP - 1 0 RUN STOP
{25} LDI EXT1.2 ACT EXT1 - 1 0 EXT2 EXT1
{26} LDO EXT1.2 CMD EXT1 - 1 0 EXT2 EXT1
{27} LDI DRIVE READY NOTRDY - 1 0 READY NOTRDY
{28} LDI AT SETPOINT NO - 1 0 YES NO
{29} LDO DAY.NIGHT DAY - 1 0 NIGHT DAY
30 LAO CURRENT LIM 0 A 0.1 0 - -
31 LAO ACCEL TIME 1 300 sec 0.1 0 - -
32 LAO DECEL TIME 1 300 sec 0.1 0 - -
{33} LDI HANDAUTO AUTO - 1 0 HAND AUTO
ACT

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 203

FLN Point Database

Factory Engr.
Point Slope Intercept
Subpoint Name Default Units On Text Off Text
# Type (SI Units)
{34} LDI ENA.DIS ACT DISABL - 1 0 ENABLE DISABL
{35} LDO ENA.DIS CMD DISABL - 1 0 ENABLE DISABL
{36} LDI FLN LOC ACT AUTO - 1 0 FLN AUTO
{37} LDI CTL SRC NO - 1 0 YES NO
{38} LDI FLN REF1 SRC NO - 1 0 YES NO
{39} LDI FLN REF2 SRC NO - 1 0 YES NO
{40} LDO RO 1 OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
COMMAND
{41} LDO RO 2 OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
COMMAND
{42} LDO RO 3 OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
COMMAND
{43} LDO RO 4 OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
COMMAND
{44} LDO RO 5 OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
COMMAND
{45} LDO RO 6 OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
COMMAND
{46} LAO AO 1 PCT PCT 0.1 0 - -
COMMAND
{47} LAO AO 2 PCT PCT 0.1 0 - -
COMMAND
48 LDO RST RUN TIME NO - 1 0 RESET NO
49 LDO RESET KWH NO - 1 0 RESET NO
50 LAO PRC PID GAIN 10 PCT 0.1 0 - -
51 LAO PRC PID ITIM 600 SEC 0.1 0 - -
52 LAO PRC PID DTIM 0 SEC 0.1 0 - -
53 LAO PRC PID DFIL 10 SEC 0.1 0 - -
54 LDO PRC PID SEL SET1 - 1 0 SET2 SET1
55 LAO EXT PID GAIN 10 PCT 0.1 0 - -
56 LAO EXT PID ITIM 600 SEC 0.1 0 - -
57 LAO EXT PID DTIM 0 SEC 0.1 0 - -
58 LAO EXT PID DFIL 10 SEC 0.1 0 - -
59 LDO LOCK PANEL UNLOCK - 1 0 LOCK UNLOCK
{60} LAO INPUT REF1 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -
{61} LAO INPUT REF2 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -
{62} LAO EXT PID STPT 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -
{63} LAI EXT PID FBCK 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -
{64} LAI EXT PID DEV 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -

Embedded Fieldbus
204 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

FLN Point Database

Factory Engr.
Point Slope Intercept
Subpoint Name Default Units On Text Off Text
# Type (SI Units)
66 LDO SPD OUT MIN 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -
67 LDO SPD OUT MAX 1000 PCT 0.1 0 - -
{68} LDO FLN LOC CTL AUTO - 1 0 FLN AUTO
{69} LDO FLN LOC REF AUTO - 1 0 FLN AUTO
{70} LDI DI 1 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{71} LDI DI 2 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{72} LDI DI 3 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{73} LDI DI 4 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{74} LDI DI 5 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{75} LDI DI 6 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{76} LDI RO 1 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{77} LDI RO 2 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{78} LDI RO 3 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{79} LDI RO 4 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{80} LDI RO 5 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{81} LDI RO 6 ACTUAL OFF - 1 0 ON OFF
{82} LAI AI 1 ACTUAL 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -
{83} LAI AI 2 ACTUAL 0 PCT 0.1 0 - -
{84} LAI AO 1 ACTUAL 0 MA 0.1 0 - -
{85} LAI AO 2 ACTUAL 0 MA 0.1 0 - -
{86} LDI OK.ALARM OK - 1 0 ALARM OK
{87} LDI OK.MAINT OK - 1 0 MAINT OK
{88} LAI ALARM WORD 1 - - 1 0 - -
{89} LAI ALARM WORD 2 - - 1 0 - -
{90} LAI LAST FAULT - - 1 0 - -
{91} LAI PREV FAULT 1 - - 1 0 - -
{92} LAI PREV FAULT 2 - - 1 0 - -
{93} LDI OK.FAULT OK - 1 0 FAULT OK
{94} LDO RESET FAULT NO - 1 0 RESET NO
{95} LAO MBOX PARAM - - 1 0 - -
{96} LAO MBOX DATA - - 1 0 - -
{97} LDO MBOX READ DONE - 1 0 READ DONE
{98} LDO MBOX WRITE DONE - 1 0 WRITE DONE
{99} LAO ERROR STATUS - - 1 0 - -

a. Points not listed are not used in this application.

b. A single value in a column means that the value is the same in English units and in SI units.
c. Point numbers that appear in brackets { } may be unbundled at the field panel.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 205

Detailed Point Descriptions

FLN Detailed Point Descriptions
Drive
Point Description
Parameter
1 CTRL ADDRESS The FLN address of the drive. It can be set by FLN and by 5302
the panel.
2 APPLICATION The Application ID for FLN on the ACH550. This ID is
assigned by Siemens for each unique application. It
correlates directly to a particular point list approved at the
time of release. Therefore, this point list shall remain fixed
once approval is granted. Any changes to the point list shall
require a new Application ID and re-approval by Siemens.
The Application ID assigned to ACH550 is 2934.
3 FREQ OUTPUT The output frequency applied to the motor, in Hertz. 0103
4 PCT OUTPUT The ratio of output frequency or speed to the corresponding None. This
maximum rating, depending on control mode. ratio is
• For scalar mode, it is the ratio of Output Frequency calculated
(parameter 0103) to Maximum Frequency (parameter by the FLN
2008). application.
• For speed mode, it is the ratio Speed (parameter 0102) to
Maximum Speed (2002).
5 SPEED The calculated speed of the motor, in RPM. 0102
6 CURRENT The measured output current. 0104
7 TORQUE The calculated output torque of the motor as a percentage of 0105
nominal torque.
8 POWER The measured output power in KW. The FLN point definition 0106
also supports horsepower by selecting English units.
DRIVE TEMP The measured heatsink temperature, in ° C. The FLN point 0110
definition also supports ° F by selecting English units.
10 DRIVE KWH The drive's cumulative power consumption in kilowatt-hours. 0115
This value may be reset by commanding FLN point 49,
RESET KWH.
11 DRIVE MWH The drive's cumulative power consumption in megawatt 0141
hours. This value cannot be reset.
12 RUN TIME The drive's cumulative run time in hours. This value may be 0114
reset by commanding FLN point 48, RESET RUN TIME.
13 DC BUS VOLT The DC bus voltage level of the drive. 0107
14 OUTPUT VOLT The AC output voltage applied to the motor. 0109
15 PRC PID FBCK The Process PID feedback signal. 0130
16 PRC PID DEV The deviation of the Process PID output signal from its 0132
setpoint.
17 MOTOR TEMP The measured motor temperature as set up in Group 35. 0145
18 ROTATION CNT The motor's cumulative revolution count, in mega- 0142
revolutions.
19 N/A
20 OVRD TIME 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility None
with Siemens control systems. It has no functionality in the
drive application.

Embedded Fieldbus
206 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

FLN Detailed Point Descriptions

Drive
Point Description
Parameter
21 FWD.REV ACT Indicates the rotational direction of the motor, regardless of
control source (1 = REV, 0 = FWD).
22 FWD.REV CMD Commanded by FLN to change the rotational direction of the
drive.
• Parameter 1001 must be set to COMM for FLN to control
the direction of the motor by EXT1.
• Parameter 1002 must be set to COMM for FLN to control
the direction of the motor by EXT2.
23 RUN.STOP ACT Indicates the drive's run status, regardless of control source
(1 = RUN, 0 = STOP).
24 RUN.STOP CMD Commanded by FLN to start the drive.
• Parameter 1001 must be set to COMM for FLN to control
the run state of the drive by EXT1.
• Parameter 1002 must be set to COMM for FLN to have
this control.
25 EXT1.2 ACT Indicates whether External 1 or External 2 is the active
control source (1 = EXT2, 0 = EXT1).
26 EXT1.2 CMD Commanded by FLN to select External 1 or External 2 as the
active control source (1 = EXT2, 0 = EXT1).
Parameter 1102 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this
control.
27 DRIVE READY Indicates the drive is ready to accept a run command
(1 = READY, 0 = NOTRDY).
28 AT SETPOINT Indicates the drive has reached its commanded setpoint
(1 = YES, 0 = NO)
29 DAY.NIGHT 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility None
with Siemens control systems. It has no functionality in the
drive application.
30 CURRENT LIM Sets the output current limit of the drive. 2003
31 ACCEL TIME 1 Sets the acceleration time for Ramp 1. 2202
32 DECEL TIME 1 Sets the deceleration time for Ramp 1. 2203
33 HANDAUTO Indicates whether the drive is in Hand or Auto control
ACT (1 = HAND, 0 = AUTO).
34 ENA.DIS ACT Indicates the status of the Run Enable command, regardless
of its source (1 = ENABLE, 0 = DISABL).
35 ENA.DIS CMD Commanded by FLN to assert the Run Enable command
(1 = ENABLE, 0 = DISABL).
Parameter 1601 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this
control.
36 FLN LOC ACT Indicates if the drive has been placed in “FLN LOCAL” mode
by commanding either point 68 (FLN LOC CTL) or point 69
(FLN LOC REF). Commanding either of these points to FLN
(1) “steals” control from its normal source and places in under
FLN control.
Note that the HAND mode of the panel has priority over FLN
local control.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 207

FLN Detailed Point Descriptions

Drive
Point Description
Parameter
37 FLN CTL SRC Indicates if FLN is a source for control inputs
(1 = YES, 0 = NO).
Note that this status point is true if any of the following control
inputs are from FLN: Run/Stop, Ext1/2 Select or Run Enable.
38 FLN REF1 SRC Indicates if FLN is the source for speed reference 1
(1 = YES, 0 = NO).
39 FLN REF2 SRC Indicates if FLN is the source for speed reference 2
(1 = YES, 0 = NO).
40 RO1 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 1. 0134, bit 0
Parameter 1401 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this
control (1 = ON, 0 = OFF).
41 RO2 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 2. 0134, bit 1
Parameter 1402 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this
control (1 = ON, 0 = OFF).
42 RO3 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 3. 0134, bit 2
Parameter 1403 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this
control (1 = ON, 0 = OFF).
43 RO4 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 4. Access to relay 4 require 0134, bit 3
ACH550 option OREL.
Parameter 1410 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this
control (1 = ON, 0 = OFF).
44 RO5 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 5. Access to relay 5 require 0134, bit 4
ACH550 option OREL.
Parameter 1411 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this
control (1 = ON, 0 = OFF).
45 RO6 COMMAND Controls the output state of Relay 6. Access to relay 6 require 0134, bit 5
ACH550 option OREL.
Parameter 1412 must be set to COMM for FLN to have this
control (1 = ON, 0 = OFF).
46 AO1 COMMAND Controls Analog Output 1. 0135
Parameter 1501 must be set to this value for FLN to have this (COMM
control. VALUE 1)

47 AO2 COMMAND Controls Analog Output 2. 0136

Parameter 1507 must be set to this value for FLN to have this (COMM
control. VALUE 2)

48 RESET RUN Commanded by FLN to reset the cumulative run timer (1 =

TIME RESET, 0 = NO).
The control input is rising-edge sensitive, so, once the
command is issued, this point automatically returns to its
inactive state. This “momentary” operation avoids any need
for an explicit command to clear the point before a
subsequent reset can be issued.
49 RESET KWH Commanded by FLN to reset the cumulative kilowatt-hour
counter (1 = RESET, 0 = NO).
The control input is rising-edge sensitive, so, once the
command is issued, this point automatically returns to its
inactive state. This “momentary” operation avoids any need
for an explicit command to clear the point before a
subsequent reset can be issued.

Embedded Fieldbus
208 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

FLN Detailed Point Descriptions

Drive
Point Description
Parameter
50 PRC PID GAIN Sets the proportional gain of the active Process PID set, as 4001 (SET1)
selected by Point 54, PRC PID SEL (1 = SET2, 0 = SET1). 4101 (SET2)
51 PRC PID ITIM Sets the integration time of the active Process PID set, as 4002 (SET1)
selected by Point 54, PRC PID SEL (1 = SET2, 0 = SET1). 4102 (SET2)
52 PRC PID DTIM Sets the derivation time of the active Process PID set, as 4001 (SET1)
selected by Point 54, PRC PID SEL (1 = SET2, 0 = SET1). 4101 (SET2)
53 PRC PID DFIL Sets the time constant for the error-derivative of the active 4004 (SET1)
Process PID set, as selected by Point 54, PRC PID SEL 4104 (SET2)
(1 = SET2, 0 = SET1).
54 PRC PID SEL Selects the active Process PID set (1 = SET2, 0 = SET1). 4027
55 EXT PID GAIN Sets the proportional gain of the External PID controller. 4201
56 EXT PID ITIM Sets the integration time of the External PID controller. 4202
57 EXT PID DTIM Sets the derivation time of the External PID controller. 4203
58 EXT PID DFIL Sets the time constant for the error-derivative of the External 4204
PID controller.
59 LOCK PANEL Command by FLN to lock the panel and prevent parameter 1602
changes (1 = LOCK, 0 = UNLOCK).
60 INPUT REF 1 Sets Input Reference 1.
Parameter 1102 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this
value.
61 INPUT REF 2 Sets Input Reference 2.
Parameter 1106 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this
value.
62 EXT PID STPT The setpoint for the External PID controller. 4211
The function of this point requires parameter 4210, PID
Setpoint Select, to be set to 19 (Internal).
63 EXT PID FBCK The External PID feedback signal. 0131
64 EXT PID DEV The deviation of the External PID output signal from its 0133
setpoint.
65 N/A
66 SPD OUT MIN Sets the minimum output speed of the drive as a percentage 2007
of the motor nominal rating. (SCALAR)
2001
(SPEED)
67 SPD OUT MAX Sets the maximum output speed of the drive as a percentage 2008
of the motor nominal rating. (SCALAR)
2002
(SPEED)
68 FLN LOC CTL Commanded by FLN to temporarily “steal” start/stop control
of the drive from its normal source and place it under FLN
control. This functionality is analogous to placing the drive in
HAND mode at the panel, with the control being taken by
FLN instead. HAND mode at the panel has priority over this
point. Thus, this point is only effective in temporarily taking
control from the digital inputs or some other internal control
functionality.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 209

FLN Detailed Point Descriptions

Drive
Point Description
Parameter
69 FLN LOC REF Commanded by FLN to temporarily “steal” input reference
control of the drive from its normal source and place it under
FLN control. This functionality is analogous to placing the
drive in HAND mode at the panel, with the reference control
being taken by FLN instead. HAND mode at the panel has
priority over this point. Thus, this point is only effective in
temporarily taking control from the analog inputs or some
other internal control functionality.
70 DI 1 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 1 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0118, bit 2
71 DI 2 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 2 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0118, bit 1
72 DI 3 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 3 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0118, bit 0
73 DI 4 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 4 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0119, bit 2
74 DI 5 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 5 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0119, bit 1
75 DI 6 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Digital Input 6 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0119, bit 0
76 RO 1 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 1 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0122, bit 2
77 RO 2 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 2 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0122, bit 1
78 RO 3 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 3 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0122, bit 0
79 RO 4 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 4 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0123, bit 2
80 RO 5 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 5 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0123, bit 1
81 RO 6 ACTUAL Indicates the status of Relay Output 6 (1 = ON, 0 = OFF). 0123, bit 0
82 AI 1 ACTUAL Indicates the input level of Analog Input 1. 0120
83 AI 2 ACTUAL Indicates the input level of Analog Input 2. 0121
84 AO 1 ACTUAL Indicates the output level of Analog Output 1. 0124
85 AO 2 ACTUAL Indicates the output level of Analog Output 2. 0125
86 OK.ALARM Indicates the current alarm state of the drive
(1 = ALARM, 0 = OK).
87 OK.MAINT Indicates the current maintenance state of the drive
(1 = MAINT, 0 = OK).
Maintenance triggers are configured in drive parameter
Group 29.
88 ALARM WORD1 This point is a bit-field indicating active alarms in the drive. 0308
89 ALARM WORD2 This point is a bit-field indicating active alarms in the drive. 0309
90 LAST FAULT This point is first in the drive's fault log and indicates the most 0401
recent fault declared.
91 PREV FAULT 1 This point is second in the drive's fault log and indicates the 0412
previous fault declared.
92 PREV FAULT 2 This point is last in the drive's fault log and indicates the 0413
oldest fault in the log.
93 OK.FAULT Indicates the current fault state of the drive
(1 = FAULT, 0 = OK).

Embedded Fieldbus
210 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

FLN Detailed Point Descriptions

Drive
Point Description
Parameter
94 RESET FAULT Command by FLN to reset a faulted drive
(1 = RESET, 0 = NO).
Parameter 1604 must be set to COMM for FLN to control this
state.
The control input is rising-edge sensitive, so, once the
command is issued, this point automatically returns to its
inactive state. This “momentary” operation avoids any need
for an explicit command to clear the point before a
subsequent reset can be issued.
95 MBOX PARAM Sets the parameter to be used by the mailbox function.
96 MBOX DATA Sets or indicates the data value of the mailbox function.
97 MBOX READ Command by FLN to read the parameter value specified by
Point 95, MBOX PARAM. The parameter value is returned in
Point 96, MBOX DATA.
The control input is rising-edge sensitive, so, once the
command is issued, this point automatically returns to its
inactive state. This “momentary” operation avoids any need
for an explicit command to clear the point before a
subsequent reset can be issued.
98 MBOX WRITE Command by FLN to write the data value specified by Point
96, MBOX DATA, to the parameter value specified by Point
95, MBOX PARAM.
The control input is rising-edge sensitive, so, once the
command is issued, this point automatically returns to its
inactive state. This “momentary” operation avoids any need
for an explicit command to clear the point before a
subsequent reset can be issued.
99 ERROR STATUS 1 of the 5 mandatory FLN points required for compatibility None
with Siemens control systems. It has no functionality in the
drive application.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 211

BACnet Technical Data

Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement (PICS)

PICS Summary
BACnet Standard Device Profile. This version of ACH550 BACnet fully conforms
to the 'Application-Specific Controller' standard device profile (B-ASC).
Services Supported. The following services are supported by the ACH550:
• I-Am (Response to Who-Is, also broadcast on power-up & other reset)
• I-Have (Response to Who-Has)
• ReadProperty
• WriteProperty
• DeviceCommunicationControl
• ReinitializeDevice
Data Link Layer. The ACH550 implements MS/TP (Master) Data Link Layer. All
standard MS/TP baud rates are supported (9600, 19200, 38400 & 76800).
MAC ID / Device Object Instance. The ACH550 supports separate MAC ID and
Device Object Instance parameters:
• Set the MAC ID using drive parameter 5302. Default: 5302 = 1.
• Set the Device Object Instance using drive parameters 5311 and 5317. Default:
Both 5311 and 5317 = 0, which causes the MAC ID to “double” as the Device
Object Instance. For Device Object Instance values not linked to the MAC ID, set
ID values using 5311 and 5317:
– For IDs in the range 1 to 65,535: Parameter 5311sets the ID directly (5317
must be 0). For example, the following values set the ID to 49,134:
5311 = 49134 and 5317 = 0.
– For IDs > 65,335: The ID equals 5311’s value plus 10,000 times 5317’s value.
For example, the following values set the ID to 71,234:
5311 = 1234 and 5317 = 7.
Automatic Baud Rate Detection. Set the communication baud rate using drive
parameter 5303. However, this value is “overridden” if automatic baud rate detection
is enabled and a different baud rate is detected. By default, autobaud detection is
disabled – enable by setting drive parameter 5314 to 1. When autobaud detection is
enabled, drive parameter 5315 displays the detected baud rate.

Note! Autobaud detection samples for, and adjusts to, only the standard MS/TP
baud rates (9600, 19200, 38400 & 76800).

Max Info Frames Property. Configure the Device Object Max Info Frames property
using drive parameter 5312. Default: 5312 = 1.
Max Master Property. Configure the Device Object Max Master property using drive
parameter 5313. Default: 5313 = 127.

Embedded Fieldbus
212 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

MS/TP Token Counter

Parameter 5316 stores the count of MS/TP tokens passed to the associated node.

Statement
This statement is part of this Standard and is required for its use.
BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement
Date: December 1, 2005
Vendor Name: ABB, Inc
Product Name: Low Voltage AC Motor Drive
Product Model Number: ACH550
Applications Software Version: 0504
Firmware Revision: 206D
BACnet Protocol Revision: 2
The ACH550 is a high-performance adjustable frequency drive
specifically designed for commercial automation applications. This
product supports native BACnet, connecting directly to the MS/TP LAN.
Product Description: All standard MS/TP baud rates are supported, as well as master mode
functionality. Over BACnet, the drive can be fully controlled as a standard
adjustable frequency drive. In addition, up to 16 configurable I/O ports
are available over BACnet for user applications.
BACnet Operator Workstation (B-OWS)
BACnet Building Controller (B-BC)
BACnet Standardized Device Profile BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC)
(Annex L): ⌧ BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC)
BACnet Smart Sensor (B-SS)
BACnet Smart Actuator (B-SA)
List all BACnet Interoperability Building DS-RP-B, DS-WP-B, DM-DDB-B, DM-DOB-B, DM-DCC-B, DM-RD-B.
Blocks Supported (Annex K):
Segmented requests supported. Window Size ____
Segmentation Capability:
Segmented responses supported. Window Size ____
Standard Object Types Supported: See table at "Object/Property Support Matrix" on page 214.
An object type is supported if it may be
present in the device. For each standard
Object Type supported provide the following
data:
1) Whether objects of this type are
dynamically creatable using the
CreateObject service
2) Whether objects of this type are
dynamically detectable using the
DeleteObject service
3) List of the optional properties supported
4) List of all properties that are writable
where not otherwise required by this
standard
5) List of proprietary properties and for each
its property identifier, datatype, and
meaning
6) List of any property range restrictions

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 213

BACnet Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement

BACnet IP, (Annex J)
BACnet IP, (Annex J), Foreign Device
ISO 8802-3, Ethernet (Clause 7)
ANSI/ATA 878.1, 2.5 Mb. ARCNET (Clause 8)
ANSI/ATA 878.1, RS-485 ARCNET (Clause 8), baud rate(s) ___
Data Link Layer Options: ⌧ MS/TP master (Clause 9), baud rate(s): 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800
MS/TP slave (Clause 9), baud rate(s): ___
Point-To-Point, EIA 232 (Clause 10), baud rate(s): ___
Point-To-Point, modem, (Clause 10), baud rate(s): ___
LonTalk, (Clause 11), medium: __________
Other: __________
Device Address Binding: Yes
Is static device binding supported? (This is ⌧ No
currently necessary for two-way
communication with MS/TP slaves and
certain other devices.)
Router, Clause 6 - List all routing configurations,
e.g., ARCNET-Ethernet, Ethernet-MS/TP, etc.
Networking Options:
Annex H, BACnet Tunneling Router over IP
BACnet/IP Broadcast Management Device (BBMD)
Does the BBMD support registrations by Yes
Foreign Devices? No
⌧ ANSI X3.4
Character Sets Supported: IBM™/Microsoft™ DBCS
Indicating support for multiple character sets ISO 8859-1
does not imply that they can all be supported ISO 10646 (UCS-2)
simultaneously. ISO 10646 (UCS-4)
JIS C 6226
If this product is a communication
gateway, describe the types of non-
BACnet equipment/network(s) that the
gateway supports:

Embedded Fieldbus
214 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

BACnet Object Definitions

Object/Property Support Matrix

The following table summarizes the Object Types/Properties Supported:
Object Type
Property Binary Binary Binary Analog Analog Analog
Device
Input Output Value Input Output Value
Object Identifier
Object Name
Object Type
System Status
Vendor Name
Vendor Identifier
Model Name
Firmware Revision
Appl Software Revision
Protocol Version
Protocol Revision
Services Supported
Object Types Supported
Object List
Max APDU Length
Segmentation Support
APDU Timeout
Number APDU Retries
Max Master
Max Info Frames
Device Address Binding
Database Revision
Present Value
Status Flags
Event State
Out-of-Service
Units
Priority Array * *
Relinquish Default * *
Polarity
Active Text
Inactive Text

* For commandable values only.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 215

Binary Input Object Instance Summary

The following table summarizes the Binary Input Objects supported:
Instance Object Active/ Present Value
Description
ID Name Inactive Text Access Type
BI0 RO 1 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 1.
BI1 RO 2 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 2.
BI2 RO 3 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 3.
BI3 RO 4 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 4 (requires OREL-01 option).
BI4 RO 5 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 5 (requires OREL-01 option)
BI5 RO 6 ACT This object indicates the status of Relay ON/OFF R
Output 6 (requires OREL-01 option)
BI6 DI 1 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 1.
BI7 DI 2 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 2.
BI8 DI 3 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 3.
BI9 DI 4 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 4.
BI10 DI 5 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 5.
BI11 DI 6 ACT This object indicates the status of Digital ON/OFF R
Input 6.

Note! For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays & relinquish
defaults.

Binary Output Object Instance Summary

The following table summarizes the Binary Output Objects supported:
Instance Active/ Present Value
Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BO0 RO1 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of Relay 1. This control requires
that parameter 1401 value = COMM.
BO1 RO2 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of Relay 2. This control requires
that parameter 1402 value = COMM.
BO2 RO3 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of Relay 3. This control requires
that parameter 1403 value = COMM.

Embedded Fieldbus
216 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Instance Active/ Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Inactive Text Access Type
BO3 RO4 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of Relay 4. This control requires
that parameter 1410 value = COMM
(also requires OREL-01 option).
BO4 RO5 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of Relay 5. This control requires
that parameter 1411 value = COMM
(also requires OREL-01 option).
BO5 RO6 COMMAND This object controls the output state ON/OFF C
of Relay 6. This control requires
that parameter 1412 value = COMM
(also requires OREL-01 option).

Note! For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays & relinquish
defaults.

Binary Value Object Instance Summary

The following table summarizes the Binary Value Objects supported:
Instance Active/Inactive Present Value
Object Name Description
ID Text Access Type
BV0 RUN/STOP ACT This object indicates the drive RUN/STOP R
Run Status, regardless of the
control source.
BV1 FWD/REV ACT This object indicates the REV/FWD R
motor’s rotation direction,
regardless of the control
source.
BV2 FAULT ACT this object indicates the FAULT/OK R
drive’s fault status.
BV3 EXT 1/2 ACT This object indicates which EXT2/EXT1 R
control source is active:
External 1 or External 2.
BV4 HAND/AUTO ACT This object indicates whether HAND/AUTO R
the drive is under Hand or
Auto control.
BV5 ALARM ACT This object indicates the ALARM/OK R
drive’s alarm status.
BV6 MAINT REQ This object indicates the MAINT/OK R
drive’s maintenance status.
Refer to Group 29 in the
drive’s parameter
descriptions.
BV7 DRIVE READY This object indicates whether READY/NOT R
the drive is ready to accept a READY
run command.
BV8 AT SETPOINT This object indicates whether YES/NO R
the drive is at the
commanded setpoint.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 217

Instance Active/Inactive Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Text Access Type
BV9 RUN ENA ACT This object indicates the Run ENABLE/ R
Enable command status, DISABLE
regardless of the control
source.
BV10 RUN/STOP CMD This object commands a drive RUN/STOP C
start. Control requires either:
• Parameter 1001 value =
COMM for control by EXT1
or
• Parameter 1002 value =
COMM for control by EXT2.

BV11 FWD/REV CMD This object commands a REV/FWD C

motor rotation direction
change. Control requires
1003 = REQUEST and either:
• Parameter 1001 value =
COMM for control by EXT1
or
• Parameter 1002 value =
COMM for control by EXT2.

BV12 RUN ENA CMD This object commands Run ENABLE/ C

Enable. Control requires DISABLE
parameter 1601 value =
COMM.

BV13 EXT 1/2 CMD This object selects ext1 or EXT2/EXT1 C

ext2 as the active control
source. Control requires
parameter 1102 value =
COMM.

BV14 FAULT RESET This object resets a faulted RESET/NO C

drive. The command is rising-
edge triggered. Control
requires parameter 1604
value = COMM.
BV15 MBOX READ This object reads a parameter READ/RESET W
(defined by AV25 MBOX
PARAM) and returns it in AV26
MBOX DATA.

BV16 MBOX WRITE This object writes the data WRITE/RESET W

value specified by AV26,
MBOX DATA, to a parameter
(defined by AV25, MBOX
PARAM).

BV17 LOCK PANEL This object locks the panel LOCK/UNLOCK W

and prevents parameter
changes. The corresponding
drive parameter is 1602.
BV18 CTL OVERRIDE This object commands the ON/OFF C
CMD drive into BACnet Control
Override. In this mode,
BACnet takes drive control
from the normal source.
However, the control panel’s
HAND mode has priority over
BACnet Control Override.

Embedded Fieldbus
218 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Instance Active/Inactive Present Value

Object Name Description
ID Text Access Type
BV19 CTL OVERRIDE This object indicates whether ON/OFF R
ACT the drive is in BACnet Control
Override. (See BV18.)
BV20 START ENABLE 1 This object commands start ENABLE/ C
enable1. Control requires DISABLE
param 1608 value = COMM.
BV21 START ENABLE 2 This object commands start ENABLE/ C
enable1. Control requires DISABLE
param 1609 value = COMM.

Note! For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays & relinquish
defaults.

Analog Input Object Instance Summary

The following table summarizes the Analog Input Objects supported:
Instance Present Value
Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AI0 ANALOG INPUT 1 This object indicates the value of Percent R
Analog Input 1. The corresponding
drive parameter is 0120.
AI1 ANALOG INPUT 2 This object indicates the value of Percent R
Analog Input 2. The corresponding
drive parameter is 0121.

Note! For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays & relinquish
defaults.

Analog Output Object Instance Summary

The following table summarizes the Analog Output Objects supported:
Instance Present Value
Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AO0 AO 1 This object controls Analog Output 1. The Percent C
COMMAND corresponding drive parameter is 0135,
COMM VALUE 1. Control requires parameter
1501 value = 135.
AO1 AO 2 This object controls Analog Output 2. The Percent C
COMMAND corresponding drive parameter is 0136,
COMM VALUE 2. Control requires parameter
1507 value = 136.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 219

Note! For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays & relinquish
defaults.

Analog Value Object Instance Summary

The following table summarizes the Analog Value Objects supported:
Instance Present Value
Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AV0 OUTPUT This object indicates the calculated motor RPM R
SPEED speed in RPM. The corresponding drive
parameter is 0102.
AV1 OUTPUT FREQ This object indicates the output Hertz R
frequency applied to the motor in Hz. The
corresponding drive parameter is 0103.
AV2 DC BUS VOLT This object indicates the drive’s DC bus Volts R
voltage level. The corresponding drive
parameter is 0107.
AV3 OUTPUT VOLT This object indicates the AC output Volts R
voltage applied to the motor. The
corresponding drive parameter is 0109.
AV4 CURRENT This object indicates the measured Amps R
output current. The corresponding drive
parameter is 0104.
AV5 TORQUE This object indicates the calculated motor Percent R
output torque as a percentage of nominal
torque. The corresponding drive
parameter is 0105.
AV6 POWER This object indicates the measured Kilowatts R
output power in kW. The corresponding
drive parameter is 0106.
AV7 DRIVE TEMP This object indicates the measured °C R
heatsink temperature in °C. The
corresponding drive parameter is 0110.
AV8 KWH (R) This object indicates, in kW hours, the kWh W
drive’s accumulated energy usage since
the last reset. The value can be reset to
zero. The corresponding drive parameter
is 0115.
AV9 KWH (NR) This object indicates the drive’s kWh R
accumulated energy usage in kW hours.
The value cannot be reset.
AV10 PRC PID FBCK This object is the Process PID feedback Percent R
signal. The corresponding drive
parameter is 0130.
AV11 PRC PID DEV This object is the Process PID output Percent R
signal’s deviation from its setpoint. The
corresponding drive parameter is 0132.
AV12 EXT PID FBCK This object is the External PID feedback Percent R
signal. The corresponding drive
parameter is 0131.

Embedded Fieldbus
220 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Instance Present Value

Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AV13 EXT PID DEV This object is the External PID output Percent R
signal’s deviation from its setpoint. The
corresponding drive parameter is 0133.
AV14 RUN TIME (R) This object indicates, in hours, the drive’s Hours W
accumulated run time since the last reset.
The value can be reset to zero. The
corresponding drive parameter is 0114.
AV15 MOTOR TEMP This object indicates the drive’s motor °C R
temperature, as set up in parameter
Group 35. The corresponding drive
parameter is 0145.
AV16 INPUT REF 1 This object sets Input Reference 1. Percent C
Control requires parameter 1103 value =
COMM.

AV17 INPUT REF 2 This object sets either: Percent C

• Input Reference 2. Control requires
parameter 1106 value = COMM.
• Process PID setpoint. Control requires
parameter 1106 value = PID1 OUT and
parameter 4010 value = COMM.
AV18 LAST FLT This object indicates the most recent fault None R
entered in the drive’s fault log. The
corresponding drive parameter is 0401.
AV19 PREV FLT 1 This object indicates the second most None R
recent fault entered in the drive’s fault
log. The corresponding drive parameter
is 0412.
AV20 PREV FLT 2 This object indicates the third most recent None R
fault entered in the drive’s fault log. The
corresponding drive parameter is 0413.
AV21 AO 1 ACT This object indicates Analog Output 1’s Milliamps R
level. The corresponding drive parameter
is 0124.
AV22 AO 2 ACT This object indicates Analog Output 2’s Milliamps R
level. The corresponding drive parameter
is 0125.
AV23 ACCEL1 TIME This object sets the Ramp1 acceleration Seconds W
time. The corresponding drive parameter
is 2202.
AV24 DECEL1 TIME This object sets the Ramp1 deceleration Seconds W
time. The corresponding drive parameter
is 2203.
AV25 MBOX PARAM This object defines the parameter to be None W
read or written to by the mailbox function.
See BV15 and BV16.
AV26 MBOX DATA This object holds the mailbox function’s None W
parameter value – a value that was read,
or is to be written. See BV15 and BV16.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 221

Instance Present Value

Object Name Description Units
ID Access Type
AV27 EXT PID STPT This object sets the External PID Percent C
controller setpoint. The corresponding
drive parameter is 4211. Control requires
parameter 4210, PID SETPOINT SEL, value
= 19 (INTERNAL).

Note! For Present Value Access Types, R = Read-only, W = Writeable,

C = Commandable. Commandable values support priority arrays & relinquish
defaults.

BACnet Quick-Start Sequence

The following steps summarize the process for enabling and configuring BACnet on
the ACH550:
1. Enable BACnet protocol: Set drive parameter 9802, COMM PROTOCOL SEL = BACNET
(5).

Note! If you cannot see the desired selection on the panel, your drive does not have
that protocol software in the application memory.

• To confirm this selection, read drive parameter 5301, EFB PROTOCOL ID. It should
read x5xx (where “x” is any value).
2. Place the BACnet channel in “reset”: Set drive parameter 5302, EFB STATION ID = 0.
• This setting holds the BACnet communication channel in reset while remaining
settings are completed.
3. Define the MS/TP baud rate.
• If MS/TP baud rate is known: Set drive parameter 5303, EFB BAUD RATE =
appropriate value.
• If MS/TP baud rate is unknown: Set drive parameter 5314, EFB PAR 14 = 1 to
enable autobaud detection.
4. Define the Device Object instance.
• To define a specific device object instance value, use drive parameters 5311 and
5317 (object instance values must be unique and in the range 1 to 4,194,303).
• To use the drive’s MS/TP MAC ID as the device object instance value, set drive
parameter 5311 and 5317 = 0.
5. Define a unique MS/TP MAC ID. Set drive parameter 5302, EFB STATION ID =
appropriate value.
• Once this parameter is set to a non-zero value, current BACnet settings are
“latched” and used for communication until the channel is reset.
• In order to participate in MS/TP token passing, the MAC ID used must be within
the limits defined by other masters’ “Max Master” property.

Embedded Fieldbus
222 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

6. Confirm proper BACnet communication.

• When BACnet communication is operating properly, drive parameter 5316, EFB
PAR 16 (the MS/TP token counter), should be continually increasing.

• Drive parameter 5306, UART ERRORS, should be stable. (With autobaud detection,
this parameter may increase until the proper baud rate is detected.)
• With autobaud detection, once the proper baud rate is detected, drive parameter
5315 EFB PAR 15, shows the active baud rate.

Embedded Fieldbus
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 223

Fieldbus Adapter

Overview
The ACH550 can be set up to accept control from an external system using standard
serial communication protocols. When using serial communication, the ACH550 can
either:
• Receive all of its control information from the fieldbus, or
• Be controlled from some combination of fieldbus control and other available
control locations, such as digital or analog inputs, and the control panel.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus

Other Devices

Connect using either:

• Standard embedded fieldbus (EFB) at
terminals X1:28…32
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) module
mounted in slot 2 (option Rxxx)

Two basic serial communications configurations are available:

• Embedded fieldbus (EFB) – See "Embedded Fieldbus" on page 153.
• Fieldbus adapter (FBA) – With one of the optional FBA modules in the drive’s
expansion slot 2, the drive can communicate to a control system using one of the
following protocols:
– Profibus-DP®
– LonWorks®
– CANopen®
– DeviceNet®
– ControlNet®
– Ethernet®
The ACH550 detects automatically which communication protocol is used by the
plug-in fieldbus adapter. The default settings for each protocol assume that the
profile used is the protocol’s industry-standard drive profile (e.g. PROFIdrive for
PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet). All of the FBA protocols can also be
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Configuration details depend on the protocol and profile used.These details are
provided in a user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

Fieldbus Adapter
224 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Details for the ABB Drives profile (which apply for all protocols) are provided in "ABB
Drives Profile Technical Data" on page 233.

Control Interface
In general, the basic control interface between the fieldbus system and the drive
consists of:
• Output Words:
– CONTROL WORD
– REFERENCE (speed or frequency)
– Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 output words. Protocols limits
may further restrict the total.
• Input Words:
– STATUS WORD
– Actual Value (speed or frequency)
– Others: The drive supports a maximum of 15 input words. Protocols limits may
further restrict the total.

Note! The words “output” and “input” are used as seen from the fieldbus controller
point of view. For example an output describes data flow from the fieldbus controller
to the drive and appears as an input from the drive point of view.

The meanings of the controller interface words are not restricted by the ACH550.
However, the profile used may set particular meanings.
Fieldbus Controller
Fieldbus

Control Word (CW)

References
Process I/O
(cyclic) Status Word (SW)
Actual Values

Service
Messages Parameter R/W Requests/Responses
(Acyclic)

Control Word
The CONTROL WORD is the principal means for controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The fieldbus controller sends the CONTROL WORD to the drive. The drive
switches between states according to the bit-coded instructions in the CONTROL
WORD. Using the CONTROL WORD requires that:

• The drive is in remote (REM) control.

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 225

• The serial communication channel is defined as the source for controlling

commands from EXT1 (set using parameters 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS and 1102
EXT1/EXT2 SEL).
• The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is activated:
– Parameter 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 4 (EXT FBA).
– The external plug-in fieldbus adapter is configured to use the drive profile
mode or drive profile objects.
The content of the CONTROL WORD depends on the protocol/profile used. See the
user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or the "ABB Drives Profile
Technical Data".

Status Word
The STATUS WORD is a 16-bit word containing status information, sent by the drive to
the fieldbus controller. The content of the STATUS WORD depends on the protocol/
profile used. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA module and/or the "ABB
Drives Profile Technical Data" section.

Reference
The contents of each REFERENCE word:
• Can be used, as speed or frequency reference.
• Is a 16-bit word comprised of a sign bit and a 15-bit integer.
• Negative references (indicating reversed rotation direction) are indicated by the
two’s complement of the corresponding positive reference value.
The use of a second reference (REF2) is supported only when a protocol is
configured for the ABB Drives profile.
Reference scaling is fieldbus type specific. See the user’s manual provided with the
FBA module and/or the following sections as appropriate:
• "ABB Drives Profile Technical Data"
• "Generic Profile Technical Data"

Actual Values
Actual Values are 16-bit words containing information on selected operations of the
drive. Drive Actual Values (for example, group 01 parameters) can be mapped to
Input Words using group 51 parameters (protocol-dependent, but typically
parameters 5104…5126).

Planning
Network planning should address the following questions:
• What types and quantities of devices must be connected to the network?
• What control information must be sent down to the drives?
• What feedback information must be sent from the drives to the controlling
system?

Fieldbus Adapter
226 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Mechanical and Electrical Installation – FBA

Warning! Connections should be made only while the drive is disconnected

from the power source.

Overview
The FBA (fieldbus adapter) is a plug-in module that fits in the drive’s expansion slot
2. The module is held in place with plastic retaining clips and two screws. The
screws also ground the shield for the module cable, and connect the module GND
signals to the drive control board.
On installation of the module, electrical connection to the drive is automatically
established through the 34-pin connector.
Mounting Procedure
1
Note! Install the input power and motor cables first.

2
1. Insert the module carefully into the drive expansion slot 2
until the retaining clips lock the module into position.
2. Fasten the two screws (included) to the stand-offs.

Note! Correct installation of the screws is essential for

fulfilling the EMC requirements and for proper operation of
the module.
7 X00301
3. Open the appropriate knockout in the conduit box and
install the cable clamp for the network cable.
4. Route the network cable through the cable clamp.
5. Connect the network cable to the module’s network 5
connector.
6
6. Tighten the cable clamp.
3
7. Install the conduit box cover (1 screw).
4
8. For configuration information see the following: X00302

• "Communication Set-up – FBA" below.

• "Activate Drive Control Functions – FBA" on page 227.
• The protocol specific documentation provided with the module.

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 227

Communication Set-up – FBA

Serial Communication Selection

To activate the serial communication, use parameter 9802 COMM PROTOCOL SEL. Set
9802 = 4 (EXT FBA).

Serial Communication Configuration

Setting 9802, together with mounting a particular FBA module, automatically sets the
appropriate default values in parameters that define the communication process.
These parameters and descriptions are defined in the user’s manual supplied with
the FBA module.
• Parameter 5101 is automatically configured.
• Parameters 5102…5126 are protocol-dependent and define, for example, the
profile used, and additional I/O words. These parameters are referred to as the
fieldbus configuration parameters. See the user’s manual provided with the FBA
module for details on the fieldbus configuration parameters.
• Parameter 5127 forces the validation of changes to parameters 5102…5126. If
parameter 5127 is not used, changes to parameters 5102…5126 take affect only
after the drive power is cycled.
• Parameters 5128…5133 provide data about the FBA module currently installed
(e.g. component versions and status).
The Parameters Description section lists the group 51 parameters.

Activate Drive Control Functions – FBA

Fieldbus control of various drive functions requires configuration to:
• Tell the drive to accept fieldbus control of the function.
• Define as a fieldbus input, any drive data required for control.
• Define as a fieldbus output, any control data required by the drive.
The following sections describe, at a general level, the configuration required for
each control function. The last column in each table below is deliberately blank. See
the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module for the appropriate entry.

Start/Stop Direction Control

Using the fieldbus for start/stop/direction control of the drive requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied command(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
1001 EXT1 10 (COMM) Start/Stop controlled by fieldbus with
COMMANDS Ext1 selected.

Fieldbus Adapter
228 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
1002 EXT2 10 (COMM) Start/Stop by controlled fieldbus with
COMMANDS Ext2 selected.
1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Direction controlled by fieldbus.

Input Reference Select

Using the fieldbus to provide input reference to the drive requires:
• Drive parameter value set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied reference word(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
1102 EXT1/EXT2 SEL 8 (COMM) Ref. selected by fieldbus.
(Required only if 2 references used.)
1103 REF1 SEL 8 (COMM) Input reference 1supplied by fieldbus.
9 (COMM+AI1)
10 (COMM*AI1)
1106 REF2 SEL 8 (COMM) Input reference 1 supplied by fieldbus.
9 (COMM+AI) (Required only if 2 references used.)
10 (COMM*AI)

Note! Multiple references are supported only when using the ABB Drives profile.

Scaling
Where required, REFERENCES can be scaled. See the "Reference Scaling" in the
following sections, as appropriate:
• "ABB Drives Profile Technical Data"
• "Generic Profile Technical Data"

System Control
Using the fieldbus for miscellaneous drive control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller command(s) in the appropriate location. (The location is
defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
1601 RUN ENABLE 7 (COMM) Run enable by fieldbus.
1604 FAULT RESET SEL 8 (COMM) Fault reset by fieldbus.
1607 PARAM SAVE 1 (SAVE) Saves altered parameters to memory (then
value returns to 0).

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 229

Relay Output Control

Using the fieldbus for relay output control requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied, binary coded, relay command(s) in the appropriate
location. (The location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol
dependent.)
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 35 (COMM) Relay Output 1 controlled by fieldbus.
1402 RELAY OUTPUT 2 36 (COMM(-1)) Relay Output 2 controlled by fieldbus.

1403 RELAY OUTPUT 3 Relay Output 3 controlled by fieldbus.

1
1410 RELAY OUTPUT 4 Relay Output 4 controlled by fieldbus.
14111 RELAY OUTPUT 5 Relay Output 5 controlled by fieldbus.
14121 RELAY OUTPUT 6 Relay Output 6 controlled by fieldbus.

1. More than 3 relays requires the addition of a relay extension module.

Note! Relay status feedback occurs without configuration as defined below.

Drive Parameter Value Protocol Reference

0122 RO 1-3 STATUS Relay 1…3 status.
0123 RO 4-6 STATUS Relay 4…6 status.

Analog Output Control

Using the fieldbus for analog output control (e.g. PID setpoint) requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied analog value(s) in the appropriate location. (The
location is defined by the Protocol Reference, which is protocol dependent.)
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
1501 AO1 CONTENT SEL 135 (COMM VALUE 1) Analog Output 1 controlled by –
writing to parameter 0135.
0135 COMM VALUE 1 –
1502 AO1 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling –
… … values.
1505 MAXIMUM AO1

1506 FILTER AO1 Filter time constant for AO1. –

1507 AO2 CONTENT SEL 136 (COMM VALUE 2) Analog Output 2 controlled by –
writing to parameter 0136.
0136 COMM VALUE 2 –
1508 AO2 CONTENT MIN Set appropriate Used for scaling –
… … values.
1511 MAXIMUM AO2

1512 FILTER AO2 Filter time constant for AO2. –

Fieldbus Adapter
230 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

PID Control Setpoint Source

Using the fieldbus for the PID control setpoint requires:
• Drive parameter values set as defined below.
• Fieldbus controller supplied setpoint value in the appropriate location. (As defined
in "Analog Output Control" above.)
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
4010 SETPOINT SEL 8 (COMM VALUE 1) Setpoint is 0135 value (+/-/* AI1) –
9 (COMM + AI1)
10 (COMM*AI1)

Communication Fault
When using fieldbus control, specify the drive’s action if serial communication is lost.
Protocol
Drive Parameter Value Description
Reference
3018 COMM FAULT 0 (NOT SEL) Set for appropriate drive –
FUNC 1 (FAULT) response.
2 (CONST SP7)
3 (LAST SPEED)
3019 COMM FAULT Set time delay before acting on a communication –
TIME loss.

Feedback from the Drive – FBA

Inputs to the controller (drive outputs) have pre-defined meanings established by the
protocol. This feedback does not require drive configuration. The following table lists
a sample of feedback data. For a complete listing, see all parameters listed in
"Parameter Descriptions".
Drive Parameter Protocol Reference
0102 SPEED
0103 FREQ OUTPUT
0104 CURRENT
0105 TORQUE
0106 POWER
0107 DC BUS VOLT
0109 OUTPUT VOLTAGE
0301 FB STATUS WORD – bit 0 (STOP)
0301 FB STATUS WORD – bit 2 (REV)
0118 DI1-3 STATUS – bit 1 (DI3)

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 231

Scaling
To scale the drive parameter values see the "Actual Value Scaling" in the following
sections, as appropriate:
• "ABB Drives Profile Technical Data"
• "Generic Profile Technical Data"

Diagnostics – FBA

Fault Handling
The ACH550 provides fault information as follows:
• The control panel display shows a fault code and text. See "Diagnostics" starting
on page 243 for a complete description.
• Parameters 0401 LAST FAULT, 0402 PREVIOUS FAULT1 and 0403 PREVIOUS FAULT2
store the most recent faults.
• For fieldbus access, the drive reports faults as a hexadecimal value, assigned
and coded according to the DRIVECOM specification. See table below. Not all
profiles support requesting fault codes using this specification. For profiles that
support this specification, the profile documentation defines the proper fault
request process.
Fieldbus Fault Code
Drive Fault Code
(DRIVECOM specification)
1 OVERCURRENT 2310h
2 DC OVERVOLT 3210h
3 DEV OVERTEMP 4210h
4 SHORT CIRC 2340h
5 Reserved FF6Bh
6 DC UNDERVOLT 3220h
7 AI1 LOSS 8110h
8 AI2 LOSS 8110h
9 MOT TEMP 4310h
10 PANEL LOSS 5300h
11 ID RUN FAIL FF84h
12 MOTOR STALL 7121h
14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 9000h
15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 9001h
16 EARTH FAULT 2330h
17 UNDERLOAD FF6Ah
18 THERM FAIL 5210h
19 OPEX LINK 7500h
20 OPEX PWR 5414h
21 CURR MEAS 2211h

Fieldbus Adapter
232 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Fieldbus Fault Code

Drive Fault Code
(DRIVECOM specification)
22 SUPPLY PHASE 3130h
23 ENCODER ERR 7301h
24 OVERSPEED 7310h
25 Reserved FF80h
26 DRIVE ID 5400h
27 CONFIG FILE 630Fh
28 SERIAL 1 ERR 7510h
29 EFB CONFIG FILE 6306h
30 FORCE TRIP FF90h
31 EFB 1 FF92h
32 EFB 2 FF93h
33 EFB 3 FF94h
34 MOTOR PHASE FF56h
35 OUTPUT WIRING FF95h
36 INCOMP SWTYPE 630Fh
101 SERF CORRUPT FF55h
102 Reserved FF55h
103 SERF MACRO FF55h
104 Reserved FF55h
105 Reserved FF55h
201 DSP T1 OVERLOAD 6100h
202 DSP T2 OVERLOAD 6100h
203 DSP T3 OVERLOAD 6100h
204 DSP STACK ERROR 6100h
205 Reserved 5000h
206 OMIO ID ERROR 5000h
207 EFB LOAD ERR 6100h
1000 PAR HZRPM 6320h
1001 PAR PFAREFNG 6320h
1002 Reserved (obsolete) 6320h
1003 PAR AI SCALE 6320h
1004 PAR AO SCALE 6320h
1005 PAR PCU 2 6320h
1006 EXT ROMISSING 6320h
1007 PAR FBUSMISSING 6320h
1008 PAR PFAWOSCALAR 6320h
1009 PAR PCU 1 6320h
1010 PAR PFA OVERRIDE 6320h

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 233

Fieldbus Fault Code

Drive Fault Code
(DRIVECOM specification)
1011 PAR OVERRIDE PARS 6320h
1012 PAR PFC IO 1 6320h
1013 PAR PFC IO 2 6320h
1014 PAR PFC IO 3 6320h

Serial Communication Diagnostics

Besides the drive fault codes, the FBA module has diagnostic tools. Refer to the
user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

ABB Drives Profile Technical Data

Overview
The ABB Drives profile provides a standard profile that can be used on multiple
protocols, including protocols available on the FBA module. This section describes
the ABB Drives profile implemented for FBA modules.

Control Word
As described earlier in "Control Interface" the CONTROL WORD is the principal means
for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system.
The following table and the state diagram later in this sub-section describe the
CONTROL WORD content for the ABB Drives profile.

ABB Drives Profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
0 OFF1 1 READY TO OPERATE Enter READY TO OPERATE
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive ramps to stop according to currently
active deceleration ramp (2203 or 2205)
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF1 ACTIVE
• Proceed to READY TO SWITCH ON,
unless other interlocks (OFF2, OFF3) are
active.
1 OFF2 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF2 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY OFF Drive coasts to stop.
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF2 ACTIVE
• Proceed to SWITCHON INHIBITED

Fieldbus Adapter
234 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

ABB Drives Profile (FBA) CONTROL WORD

Commanded
Bit Name Value Comments
State
2 OFF3 1 OPERATING Continue operation (OFF3 inactive)
CONTROL
0 EMERGENCY STOP Drive stops within in time specified by
parameter 2208.
Normal command sequence:
• Enter OFF3 ACTIVE
• Proceed to SWITCH ON INHIBITED
WARNING! Be sure motor and driven
equipment can be stopped using this
mode.
3 INHIBIT 1 OPERATION Enter OPERATION ENABLED (Note the Run
OPERATION ENABLED enable signal must be active. See 1601. If
1601 is set to COMM, this bit also actives
the Run Enable signal.)
0 OPERATION Inhibit operation. Enter OPERATION
INHIBITED INHIBITED

4 RAMP_OUT_ 1 NORMAL OPERATION Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:

ZERO ACCELERATION ENABLED

0 RFG OUT ZERO Force ramp function generator output to

Zero. Drive ramps to stop (current and DC
voltage limits in force).
5 RAMP_HOLD 1 RFG OUT ENABLED Enable ramp function.
Enter RAMP FUNCTION GENERATOR:
ACCELERATOR ENABLED

0 RFG OUT HOLD Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator

output held)
6 RAMP_IN_ 1 RFG INPUT ENABLED Normal operation. Enter OPERATING
ZERO
0 RFG INPUT ZERO Force Ramp Function Generator input to
zero.
7 RESET 0=>1 RESET Fault reset if an active fault exists (Enter
SWITCH-ON INHIBITED). Effective if 1604 =
COMM.

0 OPERATING Continue normal operation

8…9 Unused
10 REMOTE_CMD 1 Fieldbus control enabled
0 • CW =/ 0 or Ref =/ 0: Retain last CW and
Ref.
• CW = 0 and Ref = 0: Fieldbus control
enabled.
• Ref and deceleration/acceleration ramp
are locked.
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 EXT2 SELECT Select external control location 2 (EXT2).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
0 EXT1 SELECT Select external control location 1 (EXT1).
Effective if 1102 = COMM.
12…15 Unused

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 235

Status Word
As described earlier in "Control Interface", the contents of the STATUS WORD is status
information, sent by the drive to the master station. The following table and the state
diagram later in this sub-section describe the status word content.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA) STATUS WORD
Description
Bit Name Value
(Correspond to states/boxes in the state diagram)
0 RDY_ON 1 READY TO SWITCH ON

0 NOT READY TO SWITCH ON

1 RDY_RUN 1 READY TO OPERATE

0 OFF1 ACTIVE

2 RDY_REF 1 OPERATION ENABLED

0 OPERATION INHIBITED

3 TRIPPED 0…1 FAULT

0 No fault
4 OFF_2_STA 1 OFF2 inactive
0 OFF2 ACTIVE

5 OFF_3_STA 1 OFF3 inactive

0 OFF3 ACTIVE

6 SWC_ON_INHIB 1 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT ACTIVE

0 SWITCH-ON INHIBIT NOT ACTIVE

7 ALARM 1 Warning/alarm (See "Alarm Listing" in the "Diagnostics"

section for details on alarms.)
0 No warning/alarm
8 AT_SETPOINT 1 OPERATING. Actual value equals (within tolerance limits) the
reference value.
0 Actual value is outside tolerance limits (not equal to
reference value).
9 REMOTE 1 Drive control location: REMOTE (EXT1 or EXT2)
0 Drive control location: LOCAL
10 ABOVE_LIMIT 1 Supervised parameter’s value > supervision high limit.
Bit remains “1” until supervised parameter’s value <
supervision low limit.
See group 32, Supervision
0 Supervised parameter’s value < supervision low limit.
Bit remains “0” until supervised parameter’s value >
supervision high limit.
See group 32, Supervision
11 EXT CTRL LOC 1 External control location 2 (EXT2) selected
0 External control location 1 (EXT1) selected
12 EXT RUN ENABLE 1 External Run Enable signal received
0 No External Run Enable signal received
13… 15 Unused

Fieldbus Adapter
236 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

The state diagram below describes the start-stop function of CONTROL WORD (CW)
and STATUS WORD (SW) bits.
From any state From any state From any state

Emergency Stop Emergency Off Fault

OFF3 (CW Bit2=0) OFF2 (CW Bit1=0)

OFF3 OFF2 FAULT (SW Bit3=1)

(SW Bit5=0) (SW Bit4=0)
ACTIVE ACTIVE
(CW Bit7=1)
n(f)=0 / I=0

From any state

OFF1 (CW Bit0=0)
SWITCH-ON
OFF1 MAINS OFF INHIBITED (SW Bit6=1)
(SW Bit1=0)
ACTIVE
n(f)=0 / I=0 Power ON (CW Bit0=0)

A B C D NOT READY
(SW Bit0=0)
TO SWITCH ON

(CW Bit3=0) (CW xxxx x1xx xxxx x110)

OPERATION READY TO (SW Bit0=1)

(SW Bit2=0)
INHIBITED SWITCH ON

OPERATION INHIBITED (CW= xxxx x1xx xxxx x111)

B C D READY TO
(SW Bit1=1)
OPERATE
(CW Bit4=0) (CW Bit3=1 and
SW Bit12=1)

C D OPERATION
(SW Bit2=1)
ENABLED
A
(CW Bit5=0) (CW=xxxx x1xx xxx1 1111)

RFG OUTPUT
D ENABLED
B
(CW Bit6=0)
KEY (CW=xxxx x1xx xx11 1111)
State
State change RFG: ACCELERATOR
CW = CONTROL WORD ENABLED
SW = STATUS WORD C
RFG = Ramp Function Generator (CW=xxxx x1xx x111 1111)
I = Param. 0104 CURRENT
OPERATING (SW Bit8=1)
f = Param. 0103 OUTPUT FREQ
n = Speed
D

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 237

Reference
As described earlier in "Control Interface", the REFERENCE word is a speed or
frequency reference.

Reference Scaling
The following table describes REFERENCE scaling for the ABB Drives profile.
ABB Drives Profile (FBA)
Reference
Reference Range Scaling Remarks
Type
REF1 -32767… Speed or -20000 = -(par. 1105) Final reference limited by
+32767 frequency 0=0 1104/1105. Actual motor
+20000 = (par. 1105) speed limited by 2001/2002
(20000 corresponds to 100%) (speed) or 2007/2008
(frequency).
REF2 -32767… Speed or -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
+32767 frequency 0=0 1107/1108. Actual motor
+10000 = (par. 1108) speed limited by 2001/2002
(10000 corresponds to 100%) (speed) or 2007/2008
(frequency).
Torque -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
0=0 2015/2017 (torque1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 2016/2018 (torque2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)
PID -10000 = -(par. 1108) Final reference limited by
Reference 0=0 4012/4013 (PID set1) or
+10000 = (par. 1108) 4112/4113 (PID set2).
(10000 corresponds to 100%)

Note! The setting of parameter 1104 REF1 MIN and 1107 REF2 MIN has no effect on
the scaling of references.

When parameter 1103 REF1 SELECT or 1106 REF2 SELECT is set to COMM+AI1 or
COMM*AI1, the reference is scaled as follows:

ABB Drives Profile (FBA)

Reference Value Setting AI Reference Scaling
REF1 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) +(AI (%) - 0.5*REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
(100 + 0.5 * (Par. 1105)%

100%

AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%

Fieldbus Adapter
238 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

ABB Drives Profile (FBA)

Reference Value Setting AI Reference Scaling
REF1 COMM*AI1 COMM (%) * (AI (%) / 0.5*REF1 MAX (%))
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
200%

100%

AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1105))%
0% 50% 100%

REF2 COMM+AI1 COMM (%) + (AI (%) - 0.5*REF2 MAX (%))

Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
(100 + 0.5 * (Par. 1108)%

100%

AI1 Input Signal

(100 - 0.5 * (par. 1108)%
0% 50% 100%
REF2 COMM*AI1 COMM (%) * (AI (%) / 0.5*REF2 MAX (%))
Fieldbus Reference
Correction Coefficient
200%

100%

AI1 Input Signal

0%
0% 50% 100%

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 239

Reference Handling
Use group 10 parameters to configure for control of rotation direction for each control
location (EXT1 and EXT2). The following diagrams illustrate how group 10 parameters
and the sign of the fieldbus reference interact to produce REFERENCE values (REF1
and REF2). Note, fieldbus references are bipolar, that is they can be positive or
negative.
ABB Drives Profile
Parameter Value Setting AI Reference Scaling
1003 DIRECTION 1 (FORWARD) Resultant Ref.
Max. Ref

Fieldbus
Reference -163% -100% 100% 163%

-(Max. Ref.)
1003 DIRECTION 2 (REVERSE) Max. Ref
Resultant Ref.

Fieldbus -163% -100% 100% 163%

Reference

-(Max. Ref.)

1003 DIRECTION 3 (REQUEST) Resultant Ref.

Max. Ref

Fieldbus -163% -100%

Reference 100% 163%

-(Max. Ref.)

Fieldbus Adapter
240 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Actual Value
As described earlier in "Control Interface", Actual Values are words containing drive
values.

Actual Value Scaling

The scaling of the integers sent to the fieldbus as Actual Values depends on the
resolution of the selected drive parameter. Except as noted for Data Words 5 and 6
below, scale the feedback integer using the resolution listed for the parameter in the
"Parameter Descriptions" section. For example:
Feedback Integer Parameter Resolution Scaled Value
1 0.1 mA 1 * 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 * 0.1% = 1%

Data words 5 and 6 are scaled as follows:

ABB Drives Profile
Data Word Contents Scaling
5 ACTUAL SPEED -20000 … +20000 = -(par. 1105) … +(par. 1105)
6 TORQUE -10000 … +10000 = -100% … +100%

Actual Value Mapping

See the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 241

Generic Profile Technical Data

Overview
The generic profile aims to fulfill the industry-standard drive profile for each protocol
(e.g. PROFIdrive for PROFIBUS, AC/DC Drive for DeviceNet).

Control Word
As described earlier in "Control Interface" the CONTROL WORD is the principal means
for controlling the drive from a fieldbus system. For specific CONTROL WORD content,
see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.

Status Word
As described earlier in "Control Interface", the contents of the STATUS WORD is status
information, sent by the drive to the master station. For specific STATUS WORD
content, see the user’s manual provided with the FBA module.

Reference
As described earlier in "Control Interface", the REFERENCE word is a speed or
frequency reference.

Note! REF2 is not supported by the Generic Drive profiles.

Reference Scaling
REFERENCE scaling is fieldbus type specific. However, at the drive, the meaning of a
100% REFERENCE value is fixed as described in the table below. For a detailed
description on the range and scaling of the REFERENCE, see the user’s manual
supplied with the FBA module.
Generic Profile
Reference
Reference Range Scaling Remarks
Type
REF Fieldbus Speed -100% = -(par. 9908) Final reference limited by
specific 0=0 1104/1105.
+100 = (par. 9908) Actual motor speed limited by 2001/
2002 (speed).
Frequency -100% = -(par. 9907) Final reference limited by
0=0 1104/1105.
+100 = (par. 9907) Actual motor speed limited by 2007/
2008 (frequency).

Fieldbus Adapter
242 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Actual Values
As described earlier in "Control Interface", Actual Values are words containing drive
values.

Actual Value Scaling

For Actual Values, scale the feedback integer using the parameter’s resolution. (See
"Parameter Descriptions" section for parameter resolutions.) For example:
Feedback Parameter (Feedback Integer) * (Parameter Resolution) =
Integer Resolution Scaled Value
1 0.1 mA 1 * 0.1 mA = 0.1 mA
10 0.1% 10 * 0.1% = 1%

Where parameters are in percent, the "Parameter Descriptions" section specifies

what parameter corresponds to 100%. In such cases, to convert from percent to
engineering units, multiply by the value of the parameter that defines 100% and
divide by 100%. For example:
Value of the (Feedback Integer) * (Parameter Resolution) *
Feedback Parameter
Parameter that (Value of 100% Ref.) / 100% =
Integer Resolution
defines 100% Scaled Value
10 0.1% 1500 rpm1 10 * 0.1% * 1500 RPM / 100% = 15 rpm
100 0.1% 500 Hz2 100 * 0.1% * 500 Hz / 100% = 50 Hz

1. Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9908 MOT NOM SPEED
as the 100% reference, and that 9908 = 1500 rpm.
2. Assuming, for the sake of this example, that the Actual Value uses parameter 9907 MOT NOM FREQ
as the 100% reference, and that 9907 = 500 Hz.

Actual Value Mapping

See the user’s manual supplied with the FBA module.

Fieldbus Adapter
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 243

Diagnostics

Warning! Do not attempt any measurement, parts replacement or other service

procedure not described in this manual. Such action will void the warranty,
may endanger correct operation, and increase downtime and expense.

Warning! All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this

chapter should only be undertaken by qualified service personnel. The Safety
instructions on the first pages of this manual must be followed.

Diagnostic Displays
The drive detects error situations and reports them using:
• The green and red LED on the body of the drive
• The status LED on the control panel (if the HVAC control panel is attached to the
drive)
• The control panel display (if the HVAC control panel is attached to the drive)
• The Fault Word and Alarm Word parameter bits (parameters 0305 to 0309). See
"Group 03: Actual Signals" on page 66.
The form of the display depends on the severity of the error. You can specify the
severity for many errors by directing the drive to:
• Ignore the error situation.
• Report the situation as an alarm.
• Report the situation as a fault.

Red – Faults
The drive signals that it has detected a severe error, or fault, by:
• Enabling the red LED on the drive (LED is either steady on or blinking).
• Setting an appropriate bit in a Fault Word parameter (0305 to 0307).
• Overriding the control panel display with the display of a fault code.
• Stopping the motor (if it was on).
The fault code on the control panel display is temporary. Pressing any of the
following buttons removes the fault message: MENU, ENTER, UP button or DOWN
button. The message reappears after a few seconds if the control panel is not
touched and the fault is still active.

Diagnostics
244 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Flashing Green – Alarms

For less severe errors, called alarms, the diagnostic display is advisory. For these
situations, the drive is simply reporting that it had detected something “unusual.” In
these situations, the drive:
• Flashes the green LED on the drive (does not apply to alarms that arise from
control panel operation errors).
• Sets an appropriate bit in an Alarm Word parameter (0308 or 0309). See "Group
03: Actual Signals" on page 66 for the bit definitions.
• Overrides the control panel display with the display of an alarm code and/or
name.
Alarm messages disappear from the control panel display after a few seconds. The
message returns periodically as long as the alarm condition exists.

Correcting Faults
The recommended corrective action for faults is:
• Use the "Fault Listing" table below to find and address the root cause of the
problem.
• Reset the drive. See "Fault Resetting" on page 249.

Fault Listing

Fault Fault Name In

Description and Recommended Corrective Action
Code Panel
1 OVERCURRENT Output current is excessive. Check for and correct:
• Excessive motor load.
• Insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and
2205 ACCELER TIME 2).
• Faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
2 DC OVERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is excessive. Check for and correct:
• Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply.
• Insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and
2206 DECELER TIME 2).
• Verify that overvoltage controller is ON (using parameter 2005).
3 DEV OVERTEMP Drive heatsink is overheated. Temperature is at or above limit.
R1…R4 & R7/R8: 115 °C (239 °F)
R5/R6: 125 °C (257 °F)
Check for and correct:
• Fan failure.
• Obstructions in the air flow.
• Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink.
• Excessive ambient temperature.
• Excessive motor load.
4 SHORT CIRC Fault current. Check for and correct:
• A short-circuit in the motor cable(s) or motor.
• Supply disturbances.

Diagnostics
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 245

Fault Fault Name In

Description and Recommended Corrective Action
Code Panel
5 RESERVED Not used.
6 DC UNDERVOLT Intermediate circuit DC voltage is not sufficient. Check for and correct:
• Missing phase in the input power supply.
• Blown fuse.
• Undervoltage on mains.
7 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 loss. Analog input value is less than AI1FLT LIMIT (3021).
Check for and correct:
• Source and connection for analog input.
• Parameter settings for AI1FLT LIMIT (3021) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
8 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 loss. Analog input value is less than AI2FLT LIMIT (3022).
Check for and correct:
• Source and connection for analog input.
• Parameter settings for AI2FLT LIMIT (3022) and 3001 AI<MIN FUNCTION.
9 MOT TEMP Motor is too hot, based on either the drive’s estimate or on temperature
feedback.
• Check for overloaded motor.
• Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005…3009).
• Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters.
10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
• Drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays HAND), or
• Drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to accept
start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
• Communication lines and connections
• Parameter 3002 PANEL COMM ERROR.
• Parameters in Group 10: Command Inputs and Group 11: Reference
Select (if drive operation is REM).
11 ID RUN FAIL The motor ID run was not completed successfully. Check for and correct:
• Motor connections
• Motor parameters 9905…9909
12 MOTOR STALL Motor or process stall. Motor is operating in the stall region. Check for and
correct:
• Excessive load.
• Insufficient motor power.
• Parameters 3010…3012.
14 EXTERNAL FLT 1 Digital input defined to report first external fault is active. See parameter
3003 EXTERNAL FAULT 1.
15 EXTERNAL FLT 2 Digital input defined to report second external fault is active. See parameter
3004 EXTERNAL FAULT 2.

Diagnostics
246 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Fault Fault Name In

Description and Recommended Corrective Action
Code Panel
16 EARTH FAULT Possible ground fault detected in the motor or motor cables. The drive
monitors for ground faults while the drive is running and while the drive is
not running. Detection is more sensitive when the drive is not running and
can produce false positives.
Possible corrections:
• Check for/correct faults in the input wiring.
• Verify that motor cable does not exceed maximum specified length.
• A delta grounded input power supply and motor cables with high
capacitance may result in erroneous error reports during non-running
tests. To disable response to fault monitoring when the drive is not
running, use parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT. To disable response to all
ground fault monitoring, use parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT.
17 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected. Check for and correct:
• Disconnected load.
• Parameters 3013 UNDERLOAD FUNCTION…3015 UNDERLOAD CURVE.
18 THERM FAIL Internal fault. The thermistor measuring the internal temperature of the
drive is open or shorted. Contact your local ABB sales representative.
19 OPEX LINK Internal fault. A communication-related problem has been detected on the
fiber optic link between the OITF and OINT boards. Contact your local ABB
sales representative.
20 OPEX PWR Internal fault. Low voltage condition detected on OINT power supply.
Contact your local ABB sales representative.
21 CURR MEAS Internal fault. Current measurement is out of range. Contact your local ABB
sales representative.
22 SUPPLY PHASE Ripple voltage in the DC link is too high. Check for and correct:
• Missing mains phase.
• Blown fuse.
23 ENCODER ERR Not used (Available only with encoder and parameter group 50).
23 ENCODER ERR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal. Check for and correct:
• Encoder presence and proper connection (reverse wired, loose
connection, or short circuit).
• Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range.
• A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module,
OTAC-01.
• Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR. A wrong value will
only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is greater
than 4 times the rated slip of the motor.
• Encoder is not being used, but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE = 1
(ENABLED).
24 OVERSPEED Motor speed is greater than 120% of the larger (in magnitude) of 2001
MINIMUM SPEED or 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED. Check for and correct:
• Parameter settings for 2001 and 2002.
• Adequacy of motor braking torque.
• Applicability of torque control.
• Brake chopper and resistor.
25 RESERVED Not used as of the publication of this manual.
26 DRIVE ID Internal fault. Configuration Block Drive ID is not valid. Contact your local
ABB sales representative.

Diagnostics
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 247

Fault Fault Name In

Description and Recommended Corrective Action
Code Panel
27 CONFIG FILE Internal configuration file has an error. Contact your local ABB sales
representative.
28 SERIAL 1 ERR Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for and correct:
• Fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME).
• Communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate).
• Poor connections and/or noise on line.
29 EFB CONFIG Error in reading the configuration file for the embedded fieldbus.
FILE

30 FORCE TRIP Fault trip forced by the fieldbus. See the fieldbus User’s Manual.
31 EFB 1 Fault code reserved for the embedded fieldbus (EFB) protocol application.
These codes are not used as of the publication of this manual.
32 EFB 2
33 EFB 3
34 MOTOR PHASE Fault in the motor circuit. One of the motor phases is lost. Check for and
correct:
• Motor fault.
• Motor cable fault.
• Thermal relay fault (if used).
• Internal fault.
35 OUTPUT WIRING Possible power wiring error detected. When the drive is not running it
monitors for an improper connection between the drive input power and the
drive output. Check for and correct:
• Proper input wiring – line voltageis NOT connected to drive output.
• The fault can be erroneously declared if the input power is a delta
grounded system and motor cable capacitance is large. This fault can be
disabled using parameter 3023 WIRING FAULT.
36 INCOMP The drive cannot use the software.
SWTYPE • Internal Fault.
• The loaded software is not compatible with the drive.
• Call support representative.
37 CB OVERTEMP Drive control board is overheated.
Check for and correct:
• Excessive ambient temperatures
• Fan failure.
• Obstructions in the air flow.
101 SERF CORRUPT Error internal to the drive. Contact your local ABB sales representative and
report the error number.
102 RESERVED

103 SERF MACRO

104 RESERVED

105 RESERVED

Diagnostics
248 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Fault Fault Name In

Description and Recommended Corrective Action
Code Panel
201 DSP T1 Error in the system. Contact your local ABB sales representative and report
OVERLOAD the error number.
202 DSP T2
OVERLOAD

203 DSP T3
OVERLOAD

204 DSP STACK

ERROR

205 RESERVED
(obsolete)
206 OMIO ID ERROR

207 EFB LOAD ERR

1000 PAR HZRPM Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
LIMITS • 2001 MINIMUM SPEED > 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED.
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ > 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ.
• 2001 MINIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range
(> 50)
• 2002 MAXIMUM SPEED / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED is outside proper range
(> 50)
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range
(> 50)
• 2008 MAXIMUM FREQ / 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ is outside proper range
(> 50)
1001 PAR PFAREFNG Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for the following:
• 2007 MINIMUM FREQ is negative, when 8123 PFA ENABLE is active.
1002 RESERVED
(Obsolete)
1003 PAR AI SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
• 1301 AI 1 MIN > 1302 AI 1 MAX.
• 1304 AI 2 MIN > 1305 AI 2 MAX.
1004 PAR AO SCALE Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for any of the following:
• 1504 AO 1 MIN > 1505 AO 1 MAX.
• 1510 AO 2 MIN > 1511 AO 2 MAX.
1005 PAR PCU 2 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor
nominal kVA or motor nominal power. Check for the following:
• 1.1 < (9906 MOTOR NOM CURR * 9905 MOTOR NOM VOLT * 1.73 / PN) < 3.0
• Where: PN = 1000 * 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are kW)
or PN = 746 * 9909 MOTOR NOM POWER (if units are HP, e.g. in US)
1006 EXT ROMISSING Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for the following:
• Extension relay module not connected and
• 1410…1412 RELAY OUTPUTS 4…6 have non-zero values.
1007 PAR Parameter values are inconsistent. Check for and correct:
FBUSMISSING • A parameter is set for fieldbus control (e.g. 1001 EXT1 COMMANDS = 10
(COMM)), but 9802 COMM PROT SEL = 0.
1008 PAR Parameter values are inconsistent – 9904 MOTOR CTRL MODE must be = 3
PFAWOSCALAR (SCALAR: SPEED), when 8123 PFA ENABLE is activated.

Diagnostics
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 249

Fault Fault Name In

Description and Recommended Corrective Action
Code Panel
1009 PAR PCU1 Parameter values for power control are inconsistent: Improper motor
nominal frequency or speed. Check for both of the following:
• 1 < (60 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED < 16
• 0.8 < 9908 MOTOR NOM SPEED /
(120 * 9907 MOTOR NOM FREQ / Motor Poles) < 0.992
1010 PAR PFA Both the override mode and PFA are activated at the same time. These
OVERRIDE modes are mutually incompatible, because PFA interlocks cannot be
observed in the override mode.
1011 PAR OVERRIDE Overeride is enabled, but parameters are incompatible. Verify that1701 is
PARS not zero, and (depending on 9904 value) 1702 or 1703 is not zero.
1012 PAR PFC IO 1 IO configuration is not complete – not enough relays are parameterized to
PFC. Or, a conflict exists between Group 14, parameter 8117, NR OF AUX
MOT, and parameter 8118, AUTOCHNG INTERV.

1013 PAR PFC IO 2 IO configuration is not complete – the actual number of PFC motors
(parameter 8127, MOTORS) does not match the PFC motors in Group 14
and parameter 8118 AUTOCHNG INTERV.
1014 PAR PFC IO 3 IO configuration is not complete – the drive is unable to allocate a digital
input (interlock) for each PFC motor (parameters 8120 INTERLOCKS and
8127 MOTORS).

Fault Resetting
The ACH550 can be configured to automatically reset certain faults. Refer to
parameter Group 31: Automatic Reset.

Warning! If an external source for start command is selected and it is active,

the ACH550 may start immediately after fault reset.

Flashing Red LED

To reset the drive for faults indicated by a flashing red LED:
• Turn off the power for 5 minutes.
Red LED
To reset the drive for faults indicated by a red LED (on, not flashing), correct the
problem and do one of the following:
• From the control panel, press RESET
• Turn off the power for 5 minutes.
Depending on the value of 1604, FAULT RESET SELECT, the following could also be
used to reset the drive:
• Digital input
• Serial communication
When the fault has been corrected, the motor can be started.

Diagnostics
250 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

History
For reference, the last three fault codes are stored into parameters 0401, 0412,
0413. For the most recent fault (identified by parameter 0401), the drive stores
additional data (in parameters 0402…0411) to aid in troubleshooting a problem. For
example, parameter 0404 stores the motor speed at the time of the fault.
To clear the fault history (all of the Group 04, Fault History parameters):
1. Using the control panel in Parameters mode, select parameter 0401.
2. Press EDIT.
3. Press UP and Down simultaneously.
4. Press SAVE.

Correcting Alarms
The recommended corrective action for alarms is:
• Determine if the Alarm requires any corrective action (action is not always
required).
• Use "Alarm Listing" below to find and address the root cause of the problem.

Alarm Listing
The following table lists the alarms by code number and describes each.
Alarm
Display Description
Code
2001 OVERCURRENT Current limiting controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Excessive motor load.
• Insufficient acceleration time (parameters 2202 ACCELER TIME 1 and
2205 ACCELER TIME 2).
• Faulty motor, motor cables or connections.
2002 OVERVOLTAGE Over voltage controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Static or transient overvoltages in the input power supply.
• Insufficient deceleration time (parameters 2203 DECELER TIME 1 and
2206 DECELER TIME 2).
2003 UNDERVOLTAGE Under voltage controller is active. Check for and correct:
• Undervoltage on mains.
2004 DIR LOCK The change in direction being attempted is not allowed. Either:
• Do not attempt to change the direction of motor rotation, or
• Change parameter 1003 DIRECTION to allow direction change (if
reverse operation is safe).
2005 I/O COMM Fieldbus communication has timed out. Check for and correct:
• Fault setup (3018 COMM FAULT FUNC and 3019 COMM FAULT TIME).
• Communication settings (Group 51 or 53 as appropriate).
• Poor connections and/or noise on line.

Diagnostics
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 251

Alarm
Display Description
Code
2006 AI1 LOSS Analog input 1 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting.
Check:
• Input source and connections
• Parameter that sets the minimum (3021)
• Parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001)
2007 AI2 LOSS Analog input 2 is lost, or value is less than the minimum setting.
Check:
• Input source and connections
• Parameter that sets the minimum (3022)
• Parameter that sets the Alarm/Fault operation (3001)
2008 PANEL LOSS Panel communication is lost and either:
• Drive is in local control mode (the control panel displays LOC), or
• Drive is in remote control mode (REM) and is parameterized to
accept start/stop, direction or reference from the control panel.
To correct check:
• Communication lines and connections
• Parameter 3002 PANEL LOSS.
• Parameters in groups 10 COMMAND INPUTS and 11 REFERENCE
SELECT (if drive operation is REM).

2009 DEVICE Drive heatsink is hot. This alarm warns that a DEVICE OVERTEMP fault
OVERTEMP may be near.
R1…R4 & R7/R8: 100 °C (212 °F)
R5/R6: 110 °C (230 °F)
Check for and correct:
• Fan failure.
• Obstructions in the air flow.
• Dirt or dust coating on the heat sink.
• Excessive ambient temperature.
• Excessive motor load.
2010 MOT OVERTEMP Motor is hot, based on either the drive’s estimate or on temperature
feedback. This alarm warns that a Motor Underload fault trip may be
near. Check:
• Check for overloaded motor.
• Adjust the parameters used for the estimate (3005…3009).
• Check the temperature sensors and Group 35 parameters.
2011 UNDERLOAD Motor load is lower than expected. This alarm warns that a Motor
Underload fault trip may be near. Check:
• Motor and drive ratings match (motor is NOT undersized for the
drive)
• Settings on parameters 3013 to 3015
2012 MOTOR STALL Motor is operating in the stall region. This alarm warns that a Motor
Stall fault trip may be near.
2013 AUTORESET This alarm warns that the drive is about to perform an automatic fault
(note 1) reset, which may start the motor.
• To control automatic reset, use parameter group 31 AUTOMATIC
RESET.
2014 AUTOCHANGE This alarm warns that the PFA autochange function is active.
(note 1) • To control PFA, use parameter group 81 PFA CONTROL

Diagnostics
252 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Alarm
Display Description
Code
2015 PFA INTERLOCK This alarm warns that the PFA interlocks are active, which means that
the drive cannot start the following:
• Any motor (when Autochange is used),
• The speed regulated motor (when Autochange is not used).
2016 Reserved
2017 OFF BUTTON Note 1.
2018 PID SLEEP This alarm warns that the PID sleep function is active, which means
(note 1) that the motor could accelerate when the PID sleep function ends.
• To control PID sleep, use parameters 4022…4026 or 4122…4126.
2019 ID RUN Performing ID run.
2020 RESERVED
2021 START ENABLE 1 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 1 signal is missing.
MISSING • To control Start Enable 1 function, use parameter 1608.
To correct, check:
• Digital input configuration.
• Communication settings.
2022 START ENABLE 2 This alarm warns that the Start Enable 2 signal is missing.
MISSING • To control Start Enable 2 function, use parameter 1609.
To correct, check:
• Digital input configuration.
• Communication settings.
2023 EMERGENCY Emergency stop activated.
STOP

2024 ENCODER ERROR The drive is not detecting a valid encoder signal. Check for and
correct:
• Encoder presence and proper connection (reverse wired, loose
connection, or short circuit).
• Voltage logic levels are outside of the specified range.
• A working and properly connected Pulse Encoder Interface Module,
OTAC-01.
• Wrong value entered in parameter 5001 PULSE NR. A wrong value
will only be detected if the error is such that the calculated slip is
greater than 4 times the rated slip of the motor.
• Encoder is not being used, but parameter 5002 ENCODER ENABLE =
1 (ENABLED).
2025 FIRST START Signals that a the drive is performing a First Start evaluation of motor
characteristics. This is normal the first time the motor is run after motor
parameters are entered or changed. See parameter 9910 (MOTOR ID
RUN) for a description of motor models.

Note 1. Even when the relay output is configured to indicate alarm conditions (e.g. parameter
1401 RELAY OUTPUT 1 = 5 (ALARM) or 16 (FLT/ALARM)), this alarm is not indicated by a relay output.

Diagnostics
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 253

Maintenance

Warning! Read "Safety" on page 3 before performing any maintenance on the

equipment. Ignoring the safety instructions can cause injury or death.

Maintenance Intervals
If installed in an appropriate environment, the drive requires very little maintenance.
This table lists the routine maintenance intervals recommended by ABB.
Maintenance Application Interval Instruction
Check/replace R7/R8 R7/R8 UL type 12 Check every 3 “Frame Sizes R7/R8 – UL
enclosure inlet air filter enclosures months. Replace as type 12 Enclosure Inlet Air
needed. Filter” on page 257
Check/replace R7/R8 R7/R8 UL type 12 Check every 6 “Frame Sizes R7/R8 – UL
enclosure exhaust air enclosures months. Replace as type 12 Enclosure Exhaust
filter. needed. Filters” on page 258
Check and clean All Depends on the See “Heatsink” on
heatsink. dustiness of the page 253.
environment (every
6…12 months)
Replace drive module All Every six years See “Drive Module Fan
fan. Replacement” on
page 254.
Replace drive module UL type 12 Every three years. See “Enclosure Fan
fan. enclosures Replacement – UL Type
12 Enclosures” on
page 255.
Change capacitor. Frame sizes R5 Every ten years See “Capacitors” on
and R6 page 260.
Replace battery in the All Every ten years See “Control Panel” on
Assistant control panel page 260.

Heatsink
The heatsink fins accumulate dust from the cooling air. Since a dusty heatsink is less
efficient at cooling the drive, overtemperature faults become more likely. In a
“normal” environment (not dusty, not clean) check the heatsink annually, in a dusty
environment check more often.
Clean the heatsink as follows (when necessary):
1. Remove power from drive.
2. Remove the cooling fan (see section "Drive Module Fan Replacement" on page
254).
3. Blow clean compressed air (not humid) from bottom to top and simultaneously use a
vacuum cleaner at the air outlet to trap the dust.

Maintenance
254 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Note: If there is a risk of the dust entering adjoining equipment, perform the cleaning
in another room.

4. Replace the cooling fan.

5. Restore power.

Drive Module Fan Replacement

The drive module fan cools the heatsink. Fan failure can be predicted by the
increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature
in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the drive is operated in a critical part of a process, fan
replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing. Replacement
fans are available from ABB. Do not use other than ABB specified spare parts.
To monitor the running time of the cooling fan, see “Group 29: Maintenance Trig” on
page 106.

Frame Sizes R1…R4

To replace the fan: 3
1. Remove power from drive.
4
2. Remove drive cover.
3. For Frame Size: 2
• R1, R2: Press together the retaining clips on the fan
cover sides, and lift.
• R3, R4: Press in on the lever located on the left side
of the fan mount, and rotate the fan up and out.
4. Disconnect the fan cable.
5. Install the fan in reverse order. X0021

6. Restore power.

Maintenance
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 255

Frame Sizes R5 and R6

Bottom View (R5)
To replace the fan:
1. Remove power from drive. 3
2
2. Remove the screws attaching the fan.
3. Remove the fan: X5023

• R5: Swing the fan out on its hinges. Bottom View (R6) 4
• R6: Pull the fan out.
4. Disconnect the fan cable.
2
5. Install the fan in reverse order.
6. Restore power.
X0022

Frame Sizes R7 and R8

Refer to the installation instructions supplied with the fan kit.

Enclosure Fan Replacement – UL Type 12 Enclosures

UL type 12 enclosures include an additional fan (or fans) to move air through the
enclosure.

Frame Sizes R1 to R4
To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R1 to R4:
1. Remove power from drive.
4
2. Remove the front cover. 3
3. The housing that holds the fan in place has barbed 5
retaining clips at each corner. Press all four clips toward
the center to release the barbs.
4. When the clips/barbs are free, pull the housing up to
remove from the drive.
5. Disconnect the fan cable.
6. Install the fan in reverse order, noting that:
• The fan air flow is up (refer to arrow on fan). FM

• The fan wire harness is toward the front.

• The notched housing barb is located in the right-rear corner.
• The fan cable connects just forward of the fan at the top of the drive.

Frame Sizes R5 and R6

To replace the internal enclosure fan in frame sizes R5 or R6:
• Remove power from drive.

Maintenance
256 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

• Remove the front cover.

• Lift the fan out and disconnect the cable.
• Install the fan in reverse order.
• Restore power.

Frame Sizes R7/R8 – UL type 12 Enclosures

The enclosure fan is located in the exhaust box on top of
the UL type 12 enclosure.
1. Remove the left and right filter frames of the exhaust fan
box by lifting them upwards.
PC00021

2. Disconnect the fan’s electrical connector from the

cabinet roof (top right Inside the cabinet).

PC00018

3. Undo the four fastening screws at the corners of the fan frame. The screws are
through bolts with nuts on the inside of the cabinet. (Do not drop the hardware into
the drive).

PC00014 PC00018

PC00017

4. Remove the fan and fan frame as one unit.

PC00014

5. Disconnect the fan wiring and capacitor from the fan

frame. Then remove the four screws attaching the
fan to the fan frame. Remove the old fan.

PC00020

Maintenance
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 257

6. Install the new fan and capacitor

with the replacement part for ABB Capacitor
in the reverse order of the above.
Ensure the fan is centered on the Velocity
velocity stack and rotates freely. Stack

PC00014

Enclosure Air Filter Replacement – UL Type 12 Enclosures

Frame Sizes R7/R8 – UL type 12 Enclosure Inlet Air Filter

The inlet air filter for the R7/R8 UL type 12
enclosure is located in the enclosure front
door.
1. While holding the top of the filter frame, pull
up on the bottom of the frame. The filter
frame will slide up approximately 3/4 inch
and can then safely removed by tilting
away from the cabinet and lifting up.

PC00015 PC00010

2. Lay the filter frame on a flat work

surface. Remove the 3 retaining
brackets by squeezing the tabbed
corners in towards the middle of
each bracket until the bracket
clears the filter frame. Save these
brackets for replacement. Remove
and inspect the filter.
PC00009 PC00007

3. Install the replacement filter. Be

sure to tuck the filter into the grove
around the entire filter frame. This
is very important for proper
installation.
PC00013

Maintenance
258 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

4. Reinstall the 3 filter restraining

brackets. These will prevent the
filter from being pulled out of the
filter frame.
• Install the center bracket first.
• Install the 2nd bracket
overlapping the center bracket
by ½ to the left. PC00007 PC00009

• Install the 3nd bracket

overlapping the center bracket by ½ to the right.

1st filter retaining bracket

1st and 2nd filter retaining brackets

All 3 filter retaining brackets

5. Install the filter frame back to the cabinet door.

Carefully align the mounting hooks to the slots
in the cabinet door. The hooks should be
pointing down. Press in at the center of the
filter frame with your knee and gently press
down with your hands at the top of the frame.
The filter frame will slide down approximately ¾
inch and should be sealed securely to the door
around the entire filter frame.

PC00006 PC00008

Frame Sizes R7/R8 – UL type 12 Enclosure Exhaust Filters

The exhaust filters in the R7/R8 UL type 12 enclosure are located in the exhaust box
at the top of the enclosure.
There are 2 filter frames attached to the exhaust
box.
1. Remove each filter frame:
• Lift up on the filter frame until it slides
approximately ¾ inch.
• Pull away from the exhaust box to remove. PC00021

Maintenance
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 259

2. For each filter frame, remove the

wire retainers that hold the filters
in place:
• Lay the filter frames on a flat
work surface.
• The wire retainers have a
square “U” shape. Remove by
squeezing the open end of the PC00001 PC00019
“U” towards the middle of the
“square” until the retainer top (open end of “U”) clears the filter frame.
• Save the retainers for reinstallation.
3. Remove and inspect the filter.
4. Install clean filters.

Note! When installing DUSTLOK® filter media, the white side

must face to outside of the cabinet, and the orange side
faces in.
Be sure to tuck the filter edges into the groove around the
entire filter frame. This detail is very important for proper
operation.
PC00022

5. Reinstall the filter restrainers.

• Insert the base of a retainer
(bottom of “U” shape) into a
filter frame channel.
• Squeeze the open end of the
“U” until it clears the filter
frame.
• Seat the open end of the “U” PC00019 PC00001

in the filter frame channel.

• Release the retainer to its relaxed, square shape.
6. Install each filter frame to the bonnet on top
of the cabinet.
• Carefully align the frame’s mounting
hooks with the slots in the bonnet. (The
hooks should be pointing down.)
• Press down at the top of the filter frame.
(The filter frame slides down
approximately ¾ inch). PC00011
PC00012

• Check all around the filter frame for a

secure seal to the exhaust box.

Maintenance
260 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Capacitors
The drive intermediate circuit employs several electrolytic capacitors. Their life span
is from 35,000…90,000 hours depending on drive loading and ambient temperature.
Capacitor life can be prolonged by lowering the ambient temperature.
It is not possible to predict a capacitor failure. Capacitor failure is usually followed by
a input power fuse failure or a fault trip. Contact ABB if capacitor failure is suspected.
Replacements for frame size R5 and R6 are available from ABB. Do not use other
than ABB specified spare parts.

Control Panel

Cleaning
Use a soft damp cloth to clean the control panel. Avoid harsh cleaners which could
scratch the display window.

Battery
A battery is only used in Assistant control panels that have the clock function
available and enabled. The battery keeps the clock operating in memory during
power interruptions.
The expected life for the battery is greater than ten years. To remove the battery, use
a coin to rotate the battery holder on the back of the control panel. Replace the
battery with type CR2032.

Note! The battery is NOT required for any control panel or drive function, except the
clock.

Maintenance
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 261

Technical Data

Ratings
By type code, the table below provides ratings for the ACH550 adjustable speed AC
drive, including:
• IEC ratings
• NEMA ratings (shaded columns)
• Frame size

Ratings, 208…240 Volt Drives

Abbreviated column headers are described in “Symbols” on page 263.
Valid up to 40°C
Type Code
(104 °F)
Frame Size
I2N PN
ACH550-xx-see below
A HP
Three-phase supply voltage, 208…240 V
-04A6-2 4.6 1.0 R1
-06A6-2 6.6 1.5 R1
-07A5-2 7.5 2.0 R1
-012A-2 11.8 3.0 R1
-017A-2 16.7 5.0 R1
-024A-2 24.2 7.5 R2
-031A-2 30.8 10.0 R2
-046A-2 46.2 15.0 R3
-059A-2 59.4 20.0 R3
-075A-2 74.8 25.0 R4
-088A-2 88.0 30.0 R4
-114A-2 114 40.0 R4
-143A-2 143 50.0 R6
-178A-2 178 60.0 R6
-221A-2 221 75.0 R6
-248A-2 248 100 R6

Technical Data
262 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Ratings, 380…480 Volt Drives

Abbreviated column headers are described in “Symbols” on page 263.
Valid up to 40°C
Type Code
(104 °F)
Frame Size
ACH550-xx-see I2N PN
below A HP
Three-phase supply voltage, 380…480 V
-03A3-4 3.3 1.5 R1
-04A1-4 4.1 2 R1
-06A9-4 6.9 3 R1
-08A8-4 8.8 5 R1
-012A-4 11.9 7.5 R1
-015A-4 15.4 10 R2
-023A-4 23 15 R2
-031A-4 31 20 R3
-038A-4 38 25 R3
-045A-4 (Note 1) 44 30 R3
-044A-4 (Note 1) 44 30 R4
-059A-4 59 40 R4
-072A-4 72 50 R4
-078A-4 (Note 1) 77 60 R4
-097A-4 (Note 1) 96 75 R4
-077A-4 (Note 1) 77 60 R5
-096A-4 (Note 1) 96 75 R5
-125A-4 (Note 1) 124 100 R5
-124A-4 (Note 1) 124 100 R6
-157A-4 157 125 R6
-180A-4 180 150 R6
-245A-4 245 200 R7
-316A-4 316 250 R8
-368A-4 368 300 R8
-414A-4 414 350 R8
-486A-4 486 400 R8
-526A-4 526 450 R8
-602A-4 602 500 R8
-645A-4 645 550 R8

1. The ACH550-xx-045A-4 (an R3 frame size) replaces the ACH550-xx-044A-4, similarly,

ACH550-xx-078A-4 (an R4 frame size) replaces the ACH550-xx-077A-4, the
ACH550-xx-097A-4 (an R4 frame size) replaces the ACH550-xx-096A-4, and the
ACH550-xx-124A-4 (an R4 frame size) replaces the ACH550-xx-124A-4

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 263

Ratings, 500…600 Volt Drives

Abbreviated column headers are described in “Symbols” on page 263.
Type Code Normal Use
ACH550-xx- I2N PN Frame Size
see below A HP
Three-phase supply voltage, 500…600 V
-02A7-6 2.7 2 R2
-03A9-6 3.9 3 R2
-06A1-6 6.1 5 R2
-09A0-6 9 7.5 R2
-011A-6 11 10 R2
-017A-6 17 15 R2
-022A-6 22 20 R3
-027A-6 27 25 R3
-032A-6 32 30 R4
-041A-6 41 40 R4
-052A-6 52 50 R4
-062A-6 62 60 R4
-077A-6 77 75 R6
-099A-6 99 100 R6
-125A-6 125 125 R6
-144A-6 144 150 R6

Symbols
Typical ratings:
Normal use (10% overload capability)
I2N continuous rms current. 10% overload is allowed for one minute in ten minutes.
1,1x IN
IN
1 min. 9 min. 1 min.
PN typical motor power in normal use. The kilowatt power ratings apply to most IEC, 4-pole
motors. The Horsepower ratings apply to most 4-pole NEMA motors.

Sizing
The current ratings are the same regardless of the supply voltage within one voltage
range. To achieve the rated motor power given in the table, the rated current of the
drive must be higher than or equal to the rated motor current.
Note 1: The ratings apply in ambient temperature of 40 °C (104 °F).

Technical Data
264 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Derating
The load capacity (current and power) decreases for certain situations, as defined
below. In such situations, where full motor power is required, oversize the drive so
that the derated value provides sufficient capacity.
For example, if your application requires 15.4 A of motor current and a 8 kHz
switching frequency, calculate the appropriate drive size requirement as follows:
The minimum size required = 15.4 A / 0.80 = 19.25 A
Where: 0.80 is the derating for 8 kHz switching frequency (see "Switching Frequency Derating"
below).
Referring to I2N in the ratings tables (page 261), the following drives exceed the I2N
requirement of 19.25 A: ACH550-UH-023A-4, or ACH550-UH-024A-2
Temperature Derating
In the temperature range +40 °C…50 °C (+104 °F…122 °F) the rated output current
is decreased 1% for every 1 °C (1.8 °F) above +40 °C (+104 °F). Calculate the
output current by multiplying the current given in the rating table by the derating
factor.
Example If the ambient temperature is 50 °C (+122 °F) the derating factor is
100% - 1%/°C x 10 °C = 90% or 0.90.
The output current is then 0.90 x I2N.
Altitude Derating
In altitudes from 1000…4000 m (3300…13,200 ft) above sea level, the derating is 1%
for every 100 m (330 ft). If the installation site is higher than 2000 m (6600 ft) above
sea level, please contact your local ABB distributor or office for further information.
Single Phase Supply Derating
For 208…240 Volt series drives, a single phase supply can be used. In that case, the
derating is 50%.
Switching Frequency Derating
When using the 8 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606) is used, either:
• Derate PN and I2N to 80% or
• Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL = 1 (ON) which allows the drive to reduce the
switching frequency if/when the drive’s internal temperature exceeds 90 °C. See
the parameter description for 2607 for details.
When using the 12 kHz switching frequency (parameter 2606) is used, either:
• Derate:
– PN and I2N to 65% (to 50% for 600 V R4 frame sizes, that is for
ACH550-xx-032A-6…ACH550-xx-062A-6), and
– Ambient temperature maximum to 30 °C (86 °F), or
• Set parameter 2607 SW FREQ CTRL = 1 (ON) which allows the drive to reduce the
switching frequency if/when the drive’s internal temperature exceeds 80 °C. See
the parameter description for 2607 for details.

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 265

Input Power Connections

Warning! Do not operate the drive outside the nominal input line voltage
range. Over-voltage can result in permanent damage to the drive.

Input Power Specifications

Input Power Connection Specifications
208/220/230/240 VAC 3-phase (or 1-phase) -15%…+10% for
ACH550-xx-xxxx-2 units.
Voltage (U1) 400/415/440/460/480 VAC 3-phase -15%…+10% for
ACH550-xx-xxxx-4 units.
500/525/575/600 VAC 3-phase -15%…+10% for ACH550-xx-xxxx-6 units.
Prospective short- Maximum allowed prospective short-circuit current in the supply is 100 kA
circuit current in a second providing that the drive’s input power is protected with
(IEC 629) appropriate fuses. US: 100,000 AIC.
Frequency 48…63 Hz
Imbalance Max. ± 3% of nominal phase to phase input voltage
Fundamental power 0.98 (at nominal load)
factor (cos ϕ)
Cable Temperature 90 °C (194 °F) rating minimum.
Rating

Branch Circuit Protection

The ACH550 does not include a disconnect device. A means to disconnect input
power must be installed between the AC power source and the ACH550. This
branch circuit protection must:
• Be sized to conform to applicable safety regulations, including, but not limited to,
both National and local electrical codes.
• Be locked in the open position during installation and maintenance work.
The disconnect device must not be used to control the motor. Instead use the control
panel, or commands to the I/O terminals for motor control.

Fuses
The following tables provide fuse recommendations for short circuit protection on the
drive’s input power. These recommendations are not requirements if branch circuit
protection is otherwise provided per NEC. UL508A manufacturers are not required to
use the recommended fuses for the purpose of UL listing a panel that includes the
ACH550.

Technical Data
266 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

208…240 Volt, Fuses

ACH550-UH- Input Current Input Fuses

see below A IEC269 gG (A) UL Class T (A) Bussmann Type
-04A6-2 4.6 10 10 JJS-10
-06A6-2 6.6
-07A5-2 7.5
-012A-2 11.8 16 15 JJS-15
-017A-2 16.7 25 25 JJS-25
-024A-2 24.2 30 JJS-30
-031A-2 30.8 40 40 JJS-40
-046A-2 46.2 63 60 JJS-60
-059A-2 59.4 80 JJS-80
-075A-2 74.8 80 100 JJS-100
-088A-2 88.0 100 110 JJS-110
-114A-2 114 125 150 JJS-150
-143A-2 143 200 200 JJS-200
-178A-2 178 250 250 JJS-250
-221A-2 221 315 300 JJS-300
-248A-2 248 350 JJS-350

380…480 Volt, Fuses

ACH550-UH- Input Fuses

Input Current (A)
see below IEC269 gG (A) UL Class T (A) Bussmann Type
-03A3-4 3.3 10 10 JJS-10
-04A1-4 4.1
-06A9-4 6.9
-08A8-4 8.8 15 JJS-15
-012A-4 11.9 16
-015A-4 15.4 20 JJS-20
-023A-4 23 25 30 JJS-30
-031A-4 31 35 40 JJS-40
-038A-4 38 50 50 JJS-50
-044A-4 44 60 JJS-60
-045A-4 44
-059A-4 59 63 80 JJS-80
-072A-4 72 80 90 JJS-90
-077A-4 77 100 JJS-100
-078A-4 77
-096A-4 96 125 125 JJS-125
-097A-4 96

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 267

ACH550-UH- Input Fuses

Input Current (A)
see below IEC269 gG (A) UL Class T (A) Bussmann Type
-124A-4 124 160 175 JJS-175
-125A-4 124
-157A-4 157 200 200 JJS-200
-180A-4 180 250 250 JJS-250
-245A-4 245 Does Not Apply 400 JJS-400
-316A-4 316 400 JJS-400
-368A-4 368 400 JJS-400
-414A-4 414 600 JJS-600
-486A-4 486 600 JJS-600
-526A-4 526 800 JJS-800
-602A-4 602 800 JJS-800
-645A-4 645 800 JJS-800

Fuses, 500…600 Volt, Fuses

ACH550-xx- Input Current Mains Fuses

see below A IEC269 gG (A) UL Class T (A) Bussmann Type
-02A7-6 2.7 10 10 JJS-10
-03A9-6 3.9
-06A1-6 6.1
-09A0-6 9 16 15 JJS-15
-011A-6 11
-017A-6 17 25 25 JJS-25
-022A-6 22
-027A-6 27 35 40 JJS-40
-032A-6 32
-041A-6 41 50 50 JJS-50
-052A-6 52 60 60 JJS-60
-062A-6 62 80 80 JJS-80
-077A-6 77 100 JJS-100
-099A-6 99 125 150 JJS-150
-125A-6 125 160 175 JJS-175
-144A-6 144 200 200 JJS-200

Emergency Stop Devices

The overall design of the installation must include emergency stop devices and any
other safety equipment that may be needed. Pressing STOP on the drive’s control
panel does NOT:
• Generate an emergency stop of the motor.
• Separate the drive from dangerous potential.

Technical Data
268 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Input Power Cables/ Wiring

Input wiring can be either:
• A four conductor cable (three phases and ground/protective earth) routed through
conduit.
• Four insulated conductors routed through conduit.
Size wiring according to local safety regulations, appropriate input voltage and the
drive’s load current. In any case, the conductor must be less than the maximum limit
defined by the terminal size (see "Drive’s Power Connection Terminals" on page
271).
The table below lists copper and aluminum cable types for different load currents.
These recommendations apply only for the conditions listed at the top of the table.
IEC NEC
Based on: Based on:
• EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2/2001 • NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires
• PVC insulation • 90 °C (194 °F) wire insulation
• 30 °C (86 °F) ambient temperature • 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature
• 70 °C (158 °F) surface temperature • Not more than three current-carrying
• Cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable, or earth
(directly buried).
• Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder
side by side. • Copper cables with concentric copper shield

Max Max
Max Load
Load Cu Cable Load Al Cable Cu Wire Size
Current
Current (mm2) Current (mm2) (AWG/kcmil)
(A)
(A) (A)
14 3x1.5 Do not use aluminum 22.8 14
cable with frame sizes
20 3x2.5 R1…R4 27.3 12
27 3x4 36.4 10
34 3x6 50.1 8
47 3x10 68.3 6
62 3x16 86.5 4
79 3x25 100 3
98 3x35 91 3x50 118 2
119 3x50 117 3x70 137 1
153 3x70 143 3x95 155 1/0
186 3x95 165 3x120 178 2/0
215 3x120 191 3x150 205 3/0
249 3x150 218 3x185 237 4/0
284 3x185 257 3x240 264 250 MCM or 2 x 1
274 3x (3x50) 291 300 MCM or 2 x 1/0
285 2x (3x95) 319 350 MCM or 2 x 2/0
345 400 MCM or 2 x 2/0
391 500 MCM or 2 x 3/0
410 2 x 3/0

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 269

IEC NEC
Based on: Based on:
• EN 60204-1 and IEC 60364-5-2/2001 • NEC Table 310-16 for copper wires
• PVC insulation • 90 °C (194 °F) wire insulation
• 30 °C (86 °F) ambient temperature • 40 °C (104 °F) ambient temperature
• 70 °C (158 °F) surface temperature • Not more than three current-carrying
• Cables with concentric copper shield conductors in raceway or cable, or earth
(directly buried).
• Not more than nine cables laid on cable ladder
side by side. • Copper cables with concentric copper shield

Max Max
Max Load
Load Cu Cable Load Al Cable Cu Wire Size
Current
Current (mm2) Current (mm2) (AWG/kcmil)
(A)
(A) (A)
465 2x4/0
474 2x250
534 2x300
615 2x350
711 2x500

Ground Connections
For personnel safety, proper operation and to reduce electromagnetic emission/pick-
up, the drive and the motor must be grounded at the installation site.
• Conductors must be adequately sized as required by safety regulations.
• Power cable shields must be connected to the drive PE terminal in order to meet
safety regulations.
• Power cable shields are suitable for use as equipment grounding conductors only
when the shield conductors are adequately sized as required by safety
regulations.
• In multiple drive installations, do not connect drive terminals in series.
Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks

Warning! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1 or EM3 screws while power
is applied to the drive’s input terminals.

Unsymmetrically grounded networks are defined in the following table. In such

networks, the internal connection provided by the EM3 screw (on frame sizes
R1…R4 only) must be disconnected by removing EM3. If the grounding
configuration of the network is unknown, remove EM3.

Technical Data
270 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Note! ACH550-UH drives are shipped with the screw removed (but included in the
conduit box).

Unsymmetrically Grounded Networks – EM3 Must Be Out

Grounded at the L1 Grounded at the L1
corner of the mid point of a
delta delta leg

L2 L2
L3 L3
Single phase, L1 Three phase L1
grounded at an “Variac” without L1
end point solidly grounded
neutral
L2
N L2

L3
L3

EM3 (an M4x16 screw) makes an internal ground connection L1

that reduces electro-magnetic emission. Where EMC (electro-
magnetic compatibility) is a concern, and the network is
symmetrically grounded, EM3 may be installed. For
reference, the diagram at right illustrates a symmetrically
grounded network. L2
L3
Floating Networks

Warning! Do not attempt to install or remove EM1, EM3, F1 or F2 screws while

power is applied to the drive’s input terminals.

For floating networks (also known as IT, ungrounded, or impedance/resistance

grounded networks):
• Disconnect the ground connection to the internal RFI filters:
– Frame sizes R1…R4: Remove the EM1 screw (unit is shipped with EM3
removed, see “Connection Diagrams” on page 17).
– Frame sizes R5…R6: Remove both the F1 and F2 screws (see page 18).
• Where EMC requirements exist, check for excessive emission propagated to
neighboring low voltage networks. In some cases, the natural suppression in
transformers and cables is sufficient. If in doubt, use a supply transformer with
static screening between the primary and secondary windings.
• Do NOT install an external RFI/EMC filter, such as one of the kits listed in
"EN 61800-3 Compliant Motor Cables" on page 276. Using an RFI filter grounds
the input power through the filter capacitors, which could be dangerous and could
damage the unit.

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 271

Drive’s Power Connection Terminals

The following table provides specifications for the drive’s power connection
terminals.
U1, V1, W1
Frame U2, V2, W2 Earthing PE Terminal
Size BRK+, UDC+ Terminals
Min. Wire Size Max. Wire Size Torque Max. Wire Size Torque
2 2 2
mm AWG mm AWG Nm lb-ft mm AWG Nm lb-ft
Note 1
R1 0.75 18 16 6 1.3 1 16 6 1.3 1
R2Note 1 0.75 18 16 6 1.3 1 16 6 1.3 1
Note 1
R3 2.5 14 25 3 2.7 2 25 3 2.7 2
Note 1
R4 10 8 50 1/0 5.6 4 50 1/0 5.6 4
R5 16 6 70 2/0 15 11 70 2/0 15 11
R6 95Note 2 3/0 185 350 MCM 40 30 185 350 MCM 40 30
R7 16 6 185 350 MCM 40 30 Attach appropriate ring lugs to
ground wires and mount with,
R8 16 6 2x240 2x500 MCM 57 42 up to five 13/32 bolts.

1. Do not use aluminum cable with frame sizes R1…R4.

2. See the following section for smaller wire sizes on frame size R6.

Power Terminal Considerations – R6 Frame Size

Warning! For R6 power terminals, if 4

compression lugs are supplied, they can only 2
be used for wire sizes that are 95 mm2 (3/0 3
AWG) or larger. Smaller wires will loosen and
may damage the drive, and require ring lugs as
described below.

Ring Lugs
On the R6 frame size, if the cable size used is less
than 95 mm2 (3/0 AWG) or if no compression lugs X60002

are supplied, use ring lugs according to the following procedure.

1. Select appropriate ring lugs from the following table.
2. Attach the supplied terminal lugs to the drive end of the cables.
3. Isolate the ends of the ring lugs with insulating tape or shrink tubing.

Technical Data
272 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

4. Attach terminal lug to the drive.

Wire Size
Crimping No. of
kcmil/ Manufacturer Ring Lug
mm2 Tool Crimps
AWG
Burndy YAV6C-L2 MY29-3 1
16 6
Ilsco CCL-6-38 ILC-10 2
Burndy YA4C-L4BOX MY29-3 1
25 4
Ilsco CCL-4-38 MT-25 1
Burndy YA2C-L4BOX MY29-3 2
35 2 Ilsco CRC-2 IDT-12 1
Ilsco CCL-2-38 MT-25 1
Burndy YA1C-L4BOX MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRA-1-38 IDT-12 1
50 1
Ilsco CCL-1-38 MT-25 1
Thomas & Betts 54148 TBM-8 3
Burndy YA25-L4BOX MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRB-0 IDT-12 1
55 1/0
Ilsco CCL-1/0-38 MT-25 1
Thomas & Betts 54109 TBM-8 3
Burndy YAL26T38 MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRA-2/0 IDT-12 1
70 2/0
Ilsco CCL-2/0-38 MT-25 1
Thomas & Betts 54110 TBM-8 3
Burndy YAL27T38 MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRA-3/0 IDT-12 1
95 3/0
Ilsco CCL-3/0-38 MT-25 1
Thomas & Betts 54111 TBM-8 3
Burndy YA28R4 MY29-3 2
Ilsco CRA-4/0 IDT-12 1
95 3/0
Ilsco CCL-4/0-38 MT-25 2
Thomas & Betts 54112 TBM-8 4

Compression Lugs
Use the following procedure to attach cables 2
if compression lugs are supplied and can be 1
used.
1. Attach the supplied compression lugs to the
drive end of the cables.
X60003
2. Attach compression lug to the drive.

X60001

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 273

Motor Connections

Warning! Never connect line power to the drive output terminals: U2, V2 or W2.
Line voltage applied to the output can result in permanent damage to the unit.
If frequent bypassing is required, use mechanically interlocked switches or
contactors.

Warning! Do not connect any motor with a nominal voltage less than one half
of the drive’s nominal input voltage.

Warning! Disconnect the drive before conducting any voltage tolerance (Hi-
Pot) test or insulation resistance (Megger) test on the motor or motor cables.
Do not conduct these tests on the drive.

Motor Connection Specifications

Motor Connection Specifications
Voltage (U2) 0…U1, 3-phase symmetrical, Umax at the field weakening point
Frequency 0…500 Hz
Frequency Resolution 0.01 Hz
Current See "Ratings" on page 261.
Field Weakening Point 10…500 Hz
Selectable: 1, 4, 8, or 12 kHz
Switching Frequency (1, 4, or 8 kHz for 600 V, R6 frame size, that is for
ACH550-xx-077A-6 … ACH550-xx-144A-6)
Cable Temperature Rating 90 °C (194 °F) rating minimum.
Max. Motor Cable Length*
Frame Size
fsw = 1 or 4 kHz fsw = 8 kHz or 12 kHz
R1 100 m 330 ft 100 m 330 ft
Maximum Motor Cable R2 (most) 200 m 650 ft 100 m 330 ft
Length R6 (600 V) 100 m 330 ft 100 m 330 ft
R3…R4 200 m 650 ft 100 m 330 ft
R5…R6 300 m 980 ft 150 m 490 ft
R7…R8 300 m 980 ft Does not apply
* Warning! Using a motor cable longer than specified in the
chart above may cause permanent damage to the drive.

Technical Data
274 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Ground Fault Protection

ACH550 internal fault logic detects ground faults in the drive, motor, or motor cable.
This fault logic:
• Is NOT a personal safety or fire protection feature.
• Can be set to trigger only a warning using parameter 3017 EARTH FAULT.
• Could be tripped by leakage currents (input power to ground) associated with the
use of an optional RFI/EMC filter.

Grounding and Routing

Background
Motor cables require extra care in grounding and routing. The reasons have to do
with the following factors:
• Parasitic capacitance – Capacitors are, essentially, conductors that don’t touch,
but are in close proximity to each other. So, for example, there is a weak
capacitive connection between cables and any conductors they are near. Such
unintentional, but inevitable conductive paths are called parasitic capacitors.
Currents flowing through these paths often create problems. For example, current
leaks to control cables can create noise interference, leaks to the motor can
damage bearings, and leaks to the drive or other electronic cabinets can damage
components.
• Proximity – As the conductors get closer together, capacitance increases.
• Proximal area – As the area in close proximity increases, the capacitance
increases, e.g. close parallel paths increase parasitic capacitance between
conductors.
• AC frequency – For a given capacitance, increased AC frequency increases
current conductance. Hence, capacitive paths that are negligible at 50/60 Hz can
be very significant conductors at 8,000 Hz. Motor cable signals are pulses at up to
8,000 Hz and the common mode frequency can reach 48,000 Hz (8k Hz x 3
phases x 2 pulse edges).
• Alternate paths – Where multiple paths exist, the most conductive path draws the
most current. So, the ground wiring must be a significantly better path, in order to
reduce the current in the alternate paths, the paths through parasitic capacitors.
The high frequencies associated with motor cables also increase the potential for
electromagnetic noise radiation. See "Motor Cable Requirements for CE & C-Tick
Compliance" below.

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 275

Motor Cable Shielding

Motor cables require shielding using conduit, armored cable or shielded cable.
• Conduit – When using conduit:
– Bridge joints with a ground conductor bonded to the conduit on each side of
the joint.
– Bond conduit run to the drive enclosure.
– Use a separate conduit run for motor cables (also separate input power and
control cables).
– Use a separate conduit run for each drive.
• Armored Cable – When using armored cable:
– Use six-conductor (3 phases and 3 grounds), type MC continuous corrugated
aluminum armor cable with symmetrical grounds.
– Armored motor cable can share a cable tray with input power cables, but not
with control cables.
• Shielded Cable – For shielded cable details, see "Motor Cable Requirements for
CE & C-Tick Compliance" below.
Grounding
See "Ground Connections" in "Input Power Connections" above.
For CE compliant installations and installations where EMC emissions must be
minimized, see "Effective Motor Cable Screens" below.

Drive’s Motor Connection Terminals

The drive’s motor and input power terminals have the same specifications. See
"Drive’s Power Connection Terminals" above.

Motor Cable Requirements for CE & C-Tick Compliance

The requirements in this section apply for CE or C-Tick compliance.
Minimum Requirement (CE & C-Tick)
The motor cable must be a symmetrical three conductor cable with a concentric PE
conductor or a four conductor cable with a concentric shield, however, a symmetrical
constructed PE conductor is always recommended. The following figure shows the
minimum requirement for the motor cable screen (for example, MCMK, NK Cables).
Copper Wire Screen Helix of Copper Tape Inner Insulation
Insulation Jacket

Cable Core

* Input filters designed for ACH550 cannot be used in an isolated, or high impedance earthed
industrial distribution network.

Technical Data
276 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Recommendation for Conductor Layout

The following figure compares conductor layout features in motor cables.
Recommended (CE & C-Tick) Allowed (CE & C-Tick)
Symmetrical shielded cable: three phase A separate PE conductor is required if the
conductors and a concentric or otherwise conductivity of the cable shield is < 50% of the
symmetrically constructed PE conductor, and a conductivity of the phase conductor.
shield
Shield
PE Shield
Conductor
and Shield PE

Shield
Not allowed for motor cables (CE & C-Tick)
A four-conductor system: three phase
conductors and a protective conductor, without a
shield.
Allowed for motor cables with phase
PE conductor cross section up to 10 mm2.

Effective Motor Cable Screens

The general rule for cable screen effectiveness is: the better and tighter the cable’s
screen, the lower the radiated emission level. The following figure shows an
example of an effective construction (for example Ölflex-Servo-FD 780 CP,
Lappkabel or MCCMK, NK Cables).
Insulation Jacket Inner Insulator L2

L1
Braided Metallic Screen L3

EN 61800-3 Compliant Motor Cables

To comply with EN 61800-3 requirements:
• Motor cables must have an effective screen as described in "Effective Motor
Cable Screens" on page 276.
• Motor cable screen wires must be twisted together into a bundle (the bundle
length must be less than five times its width) and connected it to the terminal
marked (at the bottom right-hand corner of the drive).
• Motor cables must be grounded, at the motor end, with an EMC cable gland. The
ground must contact the cable screen all the way around the cable.
• For EN 61800-3 First Environment, Restricted Distribution (CISPR11 Class A),
and EN 61800-3 Second Environment compliance, the drive includes an internal
filter that provides compliance for at least 30 m (100 ft.) motor cable lengths. For
some drives, longer cable lengths require an additional, external RFI/EMC filter
as specified in the table below. The RFI/EMC filters are separate options and

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 277

installation must conform to the instructions in the filter package for all cable
screen connections.
Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800-3 First Environment, Restricted Distribution
(CISPR11 Class A) Compliance (Radiated and Conducted Emissions)
Switching Frequency (Parameter 2606)
1 or 4 kHz (2606 = 1 or 4) 8 kHz (2606 = 8)
Drive Type
Max. Length / Max. Length / Max. Length / Max. Length /
Internal Filter RFI/EMC Filter Internal Filter RFI/EMC Filter
ACH550-xx-03A3-4 R1 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1
Internal Internal
ACH550-xx-04A1-4
ACH550-xx-06A9-4
ACH550-xx-08A8-4
ACH550-xx-012A-4
ACH550-xx-015A-4 R2 30 m (100 ft) / 100 m (330 ft) / 30 m (100 ft) / 100 m (330 ft) /
Internal ACS400-IF21-3 Internal ACS400-IF21-3
ACH550-xx-023A-4
ACH550-xx-031A-4 R3 30 m (100 ft) / 100 m (330 ft) / 30 m (100 ft) / 100 m (330 ft) /
Internal ACS400-IF31-3 Internal ACS400-IF31-3
ACH550-xx-038A-4
ACH550-xx-045A-4
ACH550-xx-044A-4 R4 30 m (100 ft) / 100 m (330 ft) / 30 m (100 ft) / 100 m (330 ft) /
Internal ACS400-IF41-3 Internal ACS400-IF41-3
ACH550-xx-059A-4
ACH550-xx-072A-4
ACH550-xx-078A-4 Note 2 Note 2
ACH550-xx-097A-4
ACH550-xx-077A-4 R5 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1
Internal Internal
ACH550-xx-096A-4
ACH550-xx-125A-4 Note 2 Note 2
ACH550-xx-124A-4 R6 100 m (330 ft) /
Internal
ACH550-xx-157A-4
ACH550-xx-180A-4
ACH550-xx-245A-4 R7 100 m (330 ft) / Note 1
Internal
ACH550-xx-316A-4 R8
ACH550-xx-368A-4
ACH550-xx-414A-4 Does Not Apply
ACH550-xx-486A-4 --
ACH550-xx-526A-4
ACH550-xx-602A-4
ACH550-xx-645A-4

1. For any motor cable length (up to the100 m maximum length limit) compliance does not require an
additional filter.
2. Data not available at time of publication.

Technical Data
278 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Warning! Do not use RFI/EMC filters in a floating, or impedance grounded

network.

• For EN 61800-3 First Environment, Unrestricted Distribution, (CISPR11 Class B)

compliance with conducted emission limits, all drives require an additional,
external RFI/EMC filter, and cable lengths are limited as specified in the table
below. The RFI/EMC filters are separate options and installation must conform to
the instructions in the filter package for all cable screen connections.

Note! The filter does not assure compliance with radiated emissions limits.

Maximum Cable Length for EN 61800-3 CE First Environment, Unrestricted Distribution

(CISPR11 Class B) Compliance (Conducted Emissions Only)
Switching Frequency (Parameter 2606)
Drive Type 1 or 4 kHz (2606 = 1 or 4) 8 kHz (2606 = 8)
Max. Length / RFI/EMC Filter Max. Length / RFI/EMC Filter
ACH550-xx-03A3-4 R1 10 m (33 ft) / 10 m (33 ft) /
ACS400-IF11-3 ACS400-IF11-3
ACH550-xx-04A1-4
ACH550-xx-06A9-4
ACH550-xx-08A8-4
ACH550-xx-012A-4
ACH550-xx-015A-4 R2 10 m (33 ft) / 10 m (33 ft) /
ACS400-IF21-3 ACS400-IF21-3
ACH550-xx-023A-4
ACH550-xx-031A-4 R3 10 m (33 ft) / 10 m (33 ft) /
ACS400-IF31-3 ACS400-IF31-3
ACH550-xx-038A-4
ACH550-xx-045A-4
ACH550-xx-044A-4 R4 10 m (33 ft) / 10 m (33 ft) /
ACS400-IF41-3 ACS400-IF41-3
ACH550-xx-059A-4
ACH550-xx-072A-4
ACH550-xx-078A-4
ACH550-xx-097A-4

Warning! Do not use RFI/EMC filters in a floating, or impedance grounded

network.

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 279

Control Connections

Control Connection Specifications

Control Connection Specifications
Analog Inputs and See table heading "Drive Control Terminal Description" on page 281.
Outputs
Digital Inputs Digital input impedance 1.5 kΩ. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V.
• Max. contact voltage: 30 V DC, 250 V AC
• Max. contact current / power: 6 A, 30 V DC; 1500 VA, 250 V AC
Relays • Max. continuous current: 2 A rms (cos ϕ = 1), 1 A rms (cos ϕ = 0.4)
(Digital Outputs) • Minimum load: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
• Contact material: Silver-nickel (AgN)
• Isolation between relay digital outputs, test voltage: 2.5 kV rms, 1 minute

Control Cables
General Recommendations
Use multi-core cables with a braided copper wire screen, temperature rated at 60 °C
(140 °F) or above:

Double Shielded Single Shielded

Example: JAMAK by Draka NK Cables Example: NOMAK by Draka NK Cables

At the drive end, twist the screen together into a bundle not longer than five times its
width and connected to terminal X1-1 (for digital and analog I/O cables) or to either
X1-28 or X1-32 (for RS485 cables).
Route control cables to minimize radiation to the cable:
• Route as far away as possible from the input power and motor cables (at least
20 cm (8 in)).
• Where control cables must cross power cables make sure they are at an angle as
near 90° as possible.
• Stay at least 20 cm (8 in) from the sides of the drive.
Use care in mixing signal types on the same cable:
• Do not mix analog and digital input signals on the same cable.
• Run relay-controlled signals as twisted pairs (especially if voltage > 48 V). Relay-
controlled signals using less than 48 V can be run in the same cables as digital
input signals.

Note! Never mix 24 VDC and 115/230 VAC signals in the same cable.

Technical Data
280 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Note! Triacs used as sources for drive inputs, may have

excessive leakage current in the OFF state, enough to Triac
Drive
1.0 uF
read as ON to drive inputs. Driving two or more inputs, 250 V Inputs
divides the leakage current, reducing or eliminating the
problem. An alternative is to add a small capacitive load
– see figure.

WARNING! Relay coils generate noise

0.47 uF Drive
spikes in response to steps in applied AC Coil Inputs
power. To avoid drive damage from such 33 Ohm
spikes, all AC relay coils mounted across Typical R-C
Snubber
drive inputs require R-C snubbers, and all
DC relay coils mounted across drive + Drive
DC Coil Diode
outputs require diodes – see figure. - Outputs

Analog Cables
Recommendations for analog signal runs:
• Use double shielded, twisted pair cable.
• Use one individually shielded pair for each signal.
• Do not use a common return for different analog signals.
Digital Cables
Recommendation for digital signal runs: A double shielded cable is the best
alternative, but single-shielded, twisted, multi-pair cable is also usable.
Control Panel Cable
If the control panel is connected to the drive with a cable, use only Category 5 Patch
ethernet cable.

Drive’s Control Connection Terminals

The following table provides specifications for the drive’s control terminals
Control
Frame Size
Maximum Wire Size Torque
mm2 AWG Nm lb-ft
All 1.5 16 0.4 0.3

Control Terminal Descriptions

The following full-page diagram provides a general description of the control
terminals on the drive. For specific application details, see the "Application Macros"
on page 44.

Note! Terminals 3, 6, and 9 are at the same potential.

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 281

Note! For safety reasons the fault relay signals a “fault” when the ACH550 is
powered down.

X1 Drive Control Terminal Description

1 SCR Terminal for signal cable screen. (Connected internally to chassis ground.)
2 AI1 Analog input channel 1, programmable. Default2 = external reference. Resolution
0.1%, accuracy ±1%.
ON ON
J1:AI1 OFF: 0(2)…10 V (Ri = 312 kΩ)

ON
or, for OFF for ON
J1:AI1 ON: 0(4)…20 mA (Ri = 100 Ω)

ON
1 2 1 2

3 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 MΩ).
4 +10 V Potentiometer reference source: 10 V ±2%, max. 10 mA (1kΩ < R < 10kΩ).
Analog I/O

5 AI2 Analog input channel 2, programmable. Default2 = PID feedback. Resolution 0.1%,
accuracy ±1%.
ON ON
J1:AI2 OFF: 0(2)…10 V (Ri = 312 kΩ)

ON
or, for OFF for ON
J1:AI2 ON: 0(4)…20 mA (Ri = 100 Ω)

ON
1 2 1 2

6 AGND Analog input circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 MΩ).
7 AO1 Analog output, programmable. Default2 = frequency. 0…20 mA (load < 500 Ω).
8 AO2 Analog output, programmable. Default2 = current. 0…20 mA (load < 500 Ω).
9 AGND Analog output circuit common (connected internally to chassis gnd. through 1 MΩ).
10 +24V Auxiliary voltage output 24 VDC / 250 mA (reference to GND), short circuit
protected.
11 GND Auxiliary voltage output common (connected internally as floating).
12 DCOM Digital input common. To activate a digital input, there must be ≥+10 V
(or ≤-10 V) between that input and DCOM. The 24 V may be provided by the
Digital Inputs1

ACH550 (X1-10) or by an external 12…24 V source of either polarity.

13 DI1 Digital input 1, programmable. Default2 = start/stop.
14 DI2 Digital input 2, programmable. Default2 = not configured.
15 DI3 Digital input 3, programmable. Default2 = constant (preset) speed.
16 DI4 Digital input 4, programmable. Default2 = safety interlock.
17 DI5 Digital input 5, programmable. Default2 = not configured.
18 DI6 Digital input 6, programmable. Default2 = not configured.
19 RO1C Relay output 1, programmable. Default2 = Ready
20 RO1A Maximum: 250 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A
Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
21 RO1B
Relay Outputs

22 RO2C Relay output 2, programmable. Default2 = Running

23 RO2A Maximum: 250 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A
Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
24 RO2B
25 RO3C Relay output 3, programmable. Default2 = Fault (-1)
26 RO3A Maximum: 250 VAC / 30 VDC, 2 A
Minimum: 500 mW (12 V, 10 mA)
27 RO3B

1 Digital input impedance 1.5 kΩ. Maximum voltage for digital inputs is 30 V.

Technical Data
282 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

2 Default values depend on the macro used. Values specified are for the HVAC default macro. See
"Application Macros" on page 44.
You can wire the digital input terminals in either a PNP or NPN configuration.
PNP connection (source) NPN connection (sink)
X1 X1
10 +24V 10 +24V
11 GND 11 GND
12 DCOM 12 DCOM
13 DI1 13 DI1
14 DI2 14 DI2
15 DI3 15 DI3
16 DI4 16 DI4
17 DI5 17 DI5
18 DI6 18 DI6

Serial Communications
Terminals 28…32 provide RS485 serial communication connections used to control
or monitor the drive from a fieldbus controller. See "Embedded Fieldbus" on page
153 for details.

Efficiency
Approximately 98% at nominal power level.

Cooling
Cooling Specifications
Method Internal fan, flow direction from bottom to top.
• R1…R6: Free space above and below ACH550 drive: 200 mm (8 in).
• R7/R8: Free space in front of enclosure: 152 mm (6 in).
• R7/R8: Free space above enclosure: None required for cooling.
Requirement
• R7/R8: Free space at sides of enclosure: None required for cooling – ACH550
enclosures can be mounted side-by-side.
• R7/R8: Also see “Additional Free Space Recommendations” on page 288.

Air Flow, 208…240 Volt Drives

The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 208…240 Volt drives.
Drive Heat Loss Air Flow
ACH550-xx- Frame Size W BTU/Hr m3/h ft3/min
-04A6-2 R1 55 189 44 26
-06A6-2 R1 73 249 44 26
-07A5-2 R1 81 276 44 26
-012A-2 R1 116 404 44 26
-017A-2 R1 161 551 44 26
-024A-2 R2 227 776 88 52
-031A-2 R2 285 373 88 52
-046A-2 R3 420 1434 134 79

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 283

Drive Heat Loss Air Flow

3
ACH550-xx- Frame Size W BTU/Hr m /h ft3/min
-059A-2 R3 536 1829 134 79
-075A-2 R4 671 2290 280 165
-088A-2 R4 786 2685 280 165
-114A-2 R4 1014 3463 280 165
-143A-2 R6 1268 4431 405 238
-178A-2 R6 1575 5379 405 238
-221A-2 R6 1952 6666 405 238
-248A-2 R6 2189 7474 405 238

Air Flow, 380…480 Volt Drives

The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 380…480 Volt drives.
Drive Heat Loss Air Flow
ACH550-xx- Frame Size W BTU/Hr m3/h ft3/min
-03A3-4 R1 40 137 44 26
-04A1-4 R1 52 177 44 26
-06A9-4 R1 97 331 44 26
-08A8-4 R1 127 433 44 26
-012A-4 R1 172 587 44 26
-015A-4 R2 232 792 88 52
-023A-4 R2 337 1150 88 52
-031A-4 R3 457 1560 134 79
-038A-4 R3 562 1918 134 79
-045A-4 R3 667 2276 134 79
-044A-4 R4 667 2276 280 165
-059A-4 R4 907 3096 280 165
-072A-4 R4 1120 3820 280 165
-078A-4 R4 1295 4420 280 165
-097A-4 R4 1440 4915 280 165
-077A-4 R5 1295 4420 168 99
-096A-4 R5 1440 4915 168 99
-125A-4 R5 1940 6621 168 99
-124A-4 R6 1940 6621 405 238
-157A-4 R6 2310 7884 405 238
-180A-4 R6 2810 9590 405 238
-245A-4 R7 3850 13000 300 540
-316A-4 R8 5300 18000 700 1220
-368A-4 R8 6850 23000 700 1220
-414A-4 R8 7000 24000 700 1220

Technical Data
284 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Drive Heat Loss Air Flow

3
ACH550-xx- Frame Size W BTU/Hr m /h ft3/min
-486A-4 R8 7600 26000 700 1220
-526A-4 R8 7800 27000 700 1220
-602A-4 R8 8100 28000 700 1220
-645A-4 R8 9100 31000 700 1220

Air Flow, 500…600 Volt Drives

The following table lists heat loss and air flow data for 500…600 Volt drives.
Type Code Heat Loss Air Flow
ACH550-UH- Frame Size
W BTU/Hr m3/h ft3/min
see below
Three-phase supply voltage, 500…600 V
-02A7-6 R2 46 157 88 52
-03A9-6 R2 68 232 88 52
-06A1-6 R2 124 423 88 52
-09A0-6 R2 170 581 88 52
-011A-6 R2 232 792 88 52
-017A-6 R2 337 1150 88 52
-022A-6 R3 457 1560 134 79
-027A-6 R3 562 1918 134 79
-032A-6 R4 667 2256 280 165
-041A-6 R4 907 3096 280 165
-052A-6 R4 1120 3820 280 165
-062A-6 R4 1295 4420 280 165
-077A-6 R6 1504 5136 405 238
-099A-6 R6 1821 6219 405 238
-125A-6 R6 2442 8339 405 238
-144A-6 R6 2813 9607 405 238

Dimensions and Weights

The dimensions and mass for the ACH550 depend on the frame size and enclosure
type. If unsure of frame size, first, find the “Type” code on the drive labels. Then look
up that type code in the "Technical Data" on page 261, to determine the frame size.
A complete set of dimensional drawings for ACH550 drives is located in the ACH550
Technical Reference manual.

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 285

Mounting Dimensions
R1…R6 Mounting Dimensions
W1
W2

See Detail A

H1

a
c

See Detail B b d
Detail A Detail B X0032

UL type 1 and UL type 12 – Dimensions for each Frame Size

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Ref.
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
W1* 98.0 3.9 98.0 3.9 160 6.3 160 6.3 238 9.4 263 10.4
W2* -- -- -- -- 98.0 3.9 98.0 3.9 -- -- -- --
H1* 318 12.5 418 16.4 473 18.6 578 22.8 588 23.2 675 26.6
a 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 6.5 0.25 9.0 0.35
b 10.0 0.4 10.0 0.4 13.0 0.5 13.0 0.5 14.0 0.55 14.0 0.55
c 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 8.0 0.3 8.0 0.3 8.5 0.3 8.5 0.3
d 5.5 0.2 5.5 0.2 6.5 0.25 6.5 025 6.5 0.25 9.0 0.35
Mounting Hardware
M5 #10 M5 #10 M5 #10 M5 #10 M6 1/4 M8 5/16

* Center to center dimension.

Technical Data
286 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

R7…R8 Mounting Dimensions

UL type 1 and UL type 12 – Dimensions for each Frame Size
R7 & R8
Ref. Top View
mm in
W 806 31.7
D 659 25.9
a 675 26.6 a

b 474.5 18.7 d
b D
D
c 61 2.4
d 65.5 2.6 c
Mounting Hardware
11 mm 13/32 W

Weight
The following table lists typical maximum weights for each frame size. Variations
within each frame size (due to components associated with voltage/current ratings,
and options) are minor.
R1…R6
Weight
Enclosure R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
kg lb. kg lb. kg lb. kg lb. kg lb. kg lb.
UL type 1 6.5 14.3 9.0 19.8 16 35.0 24 53.0 34 75 69 152
UL type 12 8.2 18.1 11.2 24.7 18.5 40.8 26.5 58.4 38.5 84.9 86 190

R7…R8
Weight
Enclosure R7 R8
kg lb. kg lb.
UL type 1 224 490 354 776
UL type 12 245 535 354 776

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 287

Outside Dimensions – R1…R6

Outside dimensions depend on frame size and enclosure type, as defined below.
D W

H H2
H3

X0031

UL type 1 – Outside Dimensions by Frame Size (R1…R6)

R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
Ref.
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
W 125 4.9 125 4.9 203 8.0 203 8.0 265 10.4 300 11.8
H 330 13.0 430 16.9 490 19.2 596 23.4 602 23.7 700 27.6
H3 369 14.5 469 18.5 583 23.0 689 27.1 736 29.0 880 34.6
D 212 8.3 222 8.7 231 9.1 262 10.3 286 11.3 400 15.8

W2

H3

W D

UL type 12 – Outside Dimensions by Frame Size (R1…R6)

Ref. R1 R2 R3 R4 R5 R6
mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in mm in
W 213 8.4 213 8.4 257 10.1 257 10.1 369 14.5 410 16.1
W2 222 8.7 222 8.7 267 10.5 267 10.5 369 14.5 410 16.1
H3 461 18.2 561 22.1 629 24.8 760 29.9 776 30.5 924 36.4
D 234 9.2 246 9.7 254 10.0 285 11.2 309 12.2 423 16.6

Technical Data
288 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Outside Dimensions – R7…R8

Outside dimensions for the R7 and R8 cabinets are defined below.

D BP0017

Outside Dimensions by Frame Size

R7 R8
Enclosure Ref.
mm in mm in
W 806 31.7 806 31.7
UL type 1 H 2065 81.3 2065 81.3
D 659 25.9 659 25.9
W 806 31.7 806 31.7
UL type 12 H 2318 91.3 2318 91.3
D 659 25.9 659 25.9

Additional Free Space Recommendations

In addition to the free space requirements for cooling (“Cooling” on page 282), allow:
• 800 mm (31.5 in) in front of R7/R8 enclosures – room for the cabinet door to
swing open.
• 305 mm (12 in) above R7/R8, IP54 / UL type 12 enclosures – room for fan
replacement.

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 289

Degrees of Protection
Available enclosures:
• UL type 1 (NEMA 1 / IP 21) enclosure. The site must be free of airborne dust,
corrosive gases or liquids, and conductive contaminants such as condensation,
carbon dust, and metallic particles.
• UL type 12 (NEMA 12 / IP 54) enclosure. This enclosure provides protection from
airborne dust and light sprays or splashing water from all directions.

Compared to the UL type 1 enclosure, the UL type 12 enclosure has:

• The same internal plastic shell as the UL type 1 enclosure
• A different outer plastic cover
• An additional internal fan to improve cooling.
• Larger dimensions
• The same rating (does not require a derating).

Plenum Rating: ACH550 drives (UL type 1 & 12) have been evaluated in accordance
with the requirements of UL508, meets all of the requirements for plenum rated
drives, and is “Suitable for Installation in a Compartment Handling Conditioned Air”.

Technical Data
290 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Ambient Conditions
The following table lists the ACH550 environmental requirements.
Ambient Environment Requirements
Storage and Transportation in the
Installation Site
protective package
• 0…1000 m (0…3,300 ft)
Altitude • 1000…2000 m (3,300…6,600 ft) if
PN and I2 derated 1% every 100 m
above 1000 m (300 ft above 3,300 ft)
• Min. -15 ºC (5 ºF) – no frost allowed -40…70 ºC (-40…158 ºF)
• Max. (fsw = 1 or 4) 40 ºC (104 ºF);
50 ºC (122 ºF) if
PN and I2 derated to 90%
Ambient • Max. (fsw = 8) 40 ºC (104 ºF) if
temperature PN and I2 derated to 80%
• Max. (fsw = 12) 30 ºC (86 ºF) if
PN and I2 derated to 65% (to 50% for
600 V, R4 frame sizes, that is for
ACH550-xx-032A-6…Ach550-xx-
062A-6).
Relative < 95% (non-condensing)
humidity
• No conductive dust allowed. Storage
• The ACH550 should be installed in • No conductive dust allowed.
clean air according to enclosure • chemical gases: Class 1C2
Contamination classification.
• solid particles: Class 1S2
levels • Cooling air must be clean, free from
(IEC 721-3-3) corrosive materials and free from Transportation
electrically conductive dust. • No conductive dust allowed.
• Chemical gases: Class 3C2 • Chemical gases: Class 2C2
• Solid particles: Class 3S2 • Solid particles: Class 2S2

The following table lists the standard stress testing that the ACH550 passes.
Stress Tests
Without Shipping Package Inside Shipping Package
Mechanical conditions: In accordance In accordance with ISTA 1A and 1B
Sinusoidal with IEC 60721-3-3, Class 3M4 specifications.
vibration • 2…9 Hz 3.0 mm (0.12 in)
• 9…200 Hz 10 m/s2 (33 ft/s2)
Not allowed In accordance with IEC 68-2-29:
Shock
max. 100 m/s2 (330 ft/s2), 11ms (36 fts)
Not allowed • 76 cm (30 in), frame size R1
• 61cm (24 in), frame size R2
• 46 cm (18 in), frame size R3
Free fall
• 31 cm (12 in), frame size R4
• 25 cm (10 in), frame size R5
• 15 cm (6 in), frame size R6

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 291

Materials
Material Specifications
R1…R6:
• PC/ABS 2.5 mm, color NCS 1502-Y (RAL 90021 / PMS 420 C and 425 C)
• Hot-dip zinc coated steel sheet 1.5…2 mm, thickness of coating 100
Drive enclosure micrometers
• Cast aluminium AlSi
• Extruded aluminium AlSi
R7…R8: Sheet metal
R1…R6: Corrugated board, expanded polystyrene, plywood, raw wood (heat
dried). Package wrap consists of one or more of the following: PE-LD plastic
Package wrap, PP or steel bands.
R7…R8: Wood pallet
The drive contains raw materials that should be recycled to preserve energy
and natural resources. The package materials are environmentally compatible
and recyclable. All metal parts can be recycled. The plastic parts can either be
recycled or burned under controlled circumstances, according to local
regulations. Most recyclable parts are marked with recycling marks.
If recycling is not feasible, all parts excluding electrolytic capacitors and printed
Disposal
circuit boards can be landfilled. The DC capacitors contain electrolyte and the
printed circuit boards contain lead, both of which will be classified as hazardous
waste within the EU. They must be removed and handled according to local
regulations.
For further information on environmental aspects and more detailed recycling
instructions, please contact your local ABB distributor.

Technical Data
292 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Applicable Standards
Drive compliance with the following standards is identified by the standards “marks”
on the type code label.
Mark Applicable Standards
EN 50178 (1997) Electronic equipment for use in power installations
EN 60204-1 (1997 + Safety of machinery. Electrical equipment of machines. Part 1:
corrigendum Sep. 1998) General requirements. Provisions for compliance: The final
assembler of the machine is responsible for installing:
• An emergency-stop device
• A supply disconnecting device
EN 60529 (1991 + Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP code)
corrigendum May 1993 +
amendment A1:2000)
EN 61800-3 (1996) + EMC product standard including specific test methods
Amendment A11 (2000)
EN 61800-3 (1996) + EMC product standard including specific test methods
Amendment A11 (2000)

UL 508C and UL Standard for Safety, Power Conversion Equipment, second

C22.2 No. 14 edition and CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment

C22.2 No. 14 CSA Standard for Industrial Control Equipment

Compliance is valid with the following provisions:

• The motor and control cables are chosen as specified in this manual.
• The installation rules of this manual are followed.

UL Markings
When a UL mark is attached to the ACH550 AC drive, it verifies that the drive follows
the provisions of UL 508C.
When a CSA mark is attached to the ACH550 AC drive, it verifies that the drive
follows the provisions of C22.2 No. 14.
The ACH550 is UL and CSA listed to 100 KAIC without use of input fuses or circuit
breaker. For end-users convenience, the section "Fuses" provides fuse
recommendations. Branch circuit protection must to be provided per local code.

Note! UL508A manufactures are not required to use the fuse recommendations for
the purpose of UL Listing a panel with an ACH550 AFD.

The ACH550 has an electronic motor protection feature that complies with the
requirements of UL 508C and CSA C22.2 No. 14. When this feature is selected and
properly adjusted, additional overload protection is not required unless more than
one motor is connected to the drive or unless additional protection is required by
applicable safety regulations. See parameters 3005 (MOT THERM PROT) and 3006
(MOT THERM TIME).

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 293

The drives are to be used in a controlled environment. See section "Ambient

Conditions" on page 290 for specific limits.
For open type enclosures, units must be mounted inside an enclosure per National
Electrical Code and local electrical codes. Open type enclosures are IP21 / UL type
1 units without the conduit box and/or cover, or IP54 / UL type 12 units without the
conduit plate and/or top cover.

EMC (Europe, Australia, and New Zealand)

This section describes conformance with EMC requirements (in Europe, Australia,
and New Zealand).

CE Marking
When a CE mark is attached to the ACH550 AC drive, it verifies that the drive follows
the provisions of the European Low Voltage and EMC Directives (Directive
73/23/EEC, as amended by 93/68/EEC and Directive 89/336/EEC, as amended by
93/68/EEC). The corresponding declarations are available on request and can be
found using the internet at: http://www.abb.com.
The EMC Directive defines the requirements for immunity and emissions of electrical
equipment used in European Economic Area. The EMC product standard
EN 61800-3 covers the requirements stated for drives, such as the ACH550. The
drive complies with the First environment (restricted distribution) and Second
Environment limits of EN/IEC 61800-3.

C-Tick Marking
When a C-Tick mark is attached to the ACH550 drive, it verifies compliance with the
relevant standard, IEC 61800-3 (1996) – Adjustable speed electrical power drive
systems – Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods, mandated
by the Trans-Tasman Electromagnetic Compatibility Scheme. The drive complies
with the First environment (restricted distribution) and Second Environment limits of
EN/IEC 61800-3.

Electromagnetic Environments
Product standard EN 61800-3 (Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems -
Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods) defines First
Environment as environment that includes domestic premises. It also includes
establishments directly connected without intermediate transformers to a low voltage
power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Second Environment includes establishments other than those directly connected
to a low voltage power supply network which supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.

Technical Data
294 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

Liability Limits
The manufacturer is not responsible for:
• Any costs resulting from a failure if the installation, commissioning, repair,
alteration, or ambient conditions of the drive do not fulfil the requirements
specified in the documentation delivered with the unit and other relevant
documentation.
• Units subjected to misuse, negligence or accident.
• Units comprised of materials provided or designs stipulated by the purchaser.
In no event shall the manufacturer, its suppliers or subcontractors be liable for
special, indirect, incidental or consequential damages, losses or penalties.
If you have any questions concerning your ABB drive, please contact the local
distributor or ABB office. The technical data, information and specifications are valid
at the time of printing. The manufacturer reserves the right to modifications without
prior notice.

Technical Data
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 295

Index

Numerics analog input

BACnet object listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
0xxxx register
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 fault limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 filter, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1xxxx register less than min. auto. reset, parameter. . . . . . 111
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 less than min., fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 107
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 loss, fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
3xxxx register maximum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 minimum, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 N2 object listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
4xxxx register parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
EFB function codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 ref. correction formula . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
EFB mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 analog I/O
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
A specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
acceleration analog output
at aux. stop (PFA), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 150 BACnet object listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
compensation, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 content max., parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ramp select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 content min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ramp shape, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 current max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ramp time (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 current min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
ramp zero select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 data content, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
/deceleration, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . 99 filter, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
activate (external PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 134 N2 object listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
actual input (PID), parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
actual max. (PID), parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 application block output, data parameter . . . . . . . 62
actual min. (PID), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 application macro, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
actual signals, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 applications
actual value see macros
mapping, FBA, generic profile. . . . . . . . . . . 242 autochange
actual values interval, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
scaling, EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 level, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
scaling, FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
scaling, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . 240 starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
scaling, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 automatic reset
scaling, FLN fieldbus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 see reset, automatic
air flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 auxiliary motor
alarm see motor, auxiliary
codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
enable display, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 B
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 backing up parameters (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . 36
altitude backup
environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 drive parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
altitude derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
analog cable
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280

Index
296 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

BACnet comm (EFB)

autobaud detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
data link layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
mac id . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 also see RS232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
max info frame property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 analog output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . 163
MS/TP token counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 comm fault response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
object, analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 config file, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
object, analog outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
object, analog values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 configure for loss of communication. . . . . . . 167
object, binary inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
object, binary outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 control word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
object, binary values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
object, definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 drive control of functions, activate . . . . . . . . 159
pics, statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 exception codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
pics, summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 fault code 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
services supported . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 fault code 31. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167, 168
support, matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 fault code 32. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
battery, assistant control panel fault code 33. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
baud rate detection, BACnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 fault tracing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
baud rate (RS232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 fault, duplicate stations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
binary input fault, intermittent off-line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
BACnet object listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 fault, no master station on line . . . . . . . . . . . 167
N2 object listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 fault, swapped wires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
feedback from drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
binary output
feedback from drive, mailbox . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
BACnet object listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 input ref. sel., activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
N2 object listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
branch circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 mailbox, param. read/write. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
break point frequency, fault parameter . . . . . . . 108 misc. drive control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
buffer overruns (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 137 modbus actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
normal operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
C overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
cable requirements parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
input power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 PID control setpoint source, activate . . . . . . 163
motor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
capacitor profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
charge maintenance interval. . . . . . . . . . . . 253 protocol, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 reference scaling, ABB drives profile . . . . . . 186
relay output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
CISPR11 class A start/stop control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
radiation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 state diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
CISPR11 class B status word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
radiation limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
com (EFB)
baud rate, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
control profile, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
CRC errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 138
ok messages (count), parameter . . . . . . . . 138
parity, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
protocol id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
station id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
UART errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . 138
comm
fault function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
fault time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
protocol select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
relay output word, data parameter . . . . . . . . 64
values, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Index
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 297

comm (FBA) control panel

actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 backup, drive parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
analog output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . 229 cable requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
comm fault response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 changed parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
config file CPI firmware revision, parameter 136 clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
config file id revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . 136 comm error, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
config file revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 136 contrast. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 display contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
control interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 display decimal point (form), parameters . . . 115
control word. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 display max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
control word, ABB drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 display min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 display process variables, parameter group. 115
drive feedback. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 display selection, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 115
fieldbus control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 display units, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
fieldbus CPI firmware revision, parameter . 136 features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
fieldbus parameter refresh, parameter . . . . 136 i/o settings mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
fieldbus parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 maintenance interval, battery . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
fieldbus status, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
fieldbus type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
input ref. sel., activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 operating the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 parameter editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 parameter lock, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 parameters mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
PID control setpoint source, activate. . . . . . 230 pass code, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 reference control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
protocol listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 signal max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 signal min., parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
relay output control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 start-up assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
start/stop control, activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 start-up assistant mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
state diagram, ABB drives. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 status information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
status word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 control panel (Assistant)
status word, ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 battery maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . 260
compression lugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272 fault logger mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
conduit parameter backup mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 control word
config file ABB drives, FBA, description . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
CPI firmware revision, parameter . . . . . . . . 136 comm (EFB), description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
id revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 FBA generic profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
revision, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
connections fan maintenance triggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 correction source (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 135
FBA module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 cover
constant speed remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
see speed, constant replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
construction code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 CRC errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
contamination levels critical speeds (avoiding)
environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 high, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 low, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
contrast, control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
control select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
connection specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
location, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 current
terminal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
control cable data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
measurement, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
rating code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

D
DC brake time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
DC bus voltage, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62

Index
298 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

DC current ref., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 E

DC magnetizing time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 earth fault
DC overvoltage, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
DC undervoltage, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
DDL file (N2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194 earthing
deceleration see ground
at aux. start (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 151 efficiency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
emergency time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 EM3 screw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 embedded field bus
ramp select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 see comm (EFB)
ramp shape, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
EMC
ramp time (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
ramp zero select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
motor cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
default macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
emergency
derating deceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 stop devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
single phase supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 stop select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
switching frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 EN 61800-3 first environment
restricted distribution radiation limits . . . . . . 276
derivation time (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 unrestricted distribution radiation limits . . . . 278
derivation time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 enclosure protection class code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
device overtemperature, fault code . . . . . . . . . . 244 enclosure, UL type 12
device type (N2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 air filter maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166 encoder err, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 encoder, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
differences list, downloads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 environment
digital cable first, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280 second, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
digital input error value inversion (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . 127
at fault, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 exception codes, EFB modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 external comm module, parameter group. . . . . . 136
status, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 external commands selection, parameter. . . . . . . 71
digital output external control selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 73
connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281 external fault
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
dimensions fault codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285 parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
outside, enclosure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 external reference, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 62
direction
control, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72 F
display format (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 fan, drive module
download maintenance interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
handling inexact transfers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 fan, enclosure
parameter sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 filter maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
drive UL type 12, replacement procedure. . . . . . . 255
control terminal descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
device type (N2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
EFB comm installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
fan replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
FBA module installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
id, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
proper lifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
rating, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
temperature, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
drive on time, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
du/dt filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Index
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 299

fault flux optimization, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 force trip, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
comm failure (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 frame errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
comm (FBA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 frame size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
current at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 free fall
digital input status at, history parameter . . . . 70 stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
frequency at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . 70 free space
functions, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 for access, R7/R8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
for cooling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
history, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
last, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 frequency
listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
previous, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 min. limit, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
reset select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 motor, resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
speed at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 motor, specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
status at, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 switching, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
time of, history parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
torque at, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 208...240 volt drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
voltage at, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 380...480 volt drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 500...600 volt drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
fault code
28 serial 1 err . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 G
fault logging (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 gain (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
features generic profile
N2 fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 actual value mapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
feedback multiplier (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . 130 actual value scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
feedback select (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 129 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
field weakening point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 reference scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
fieldbus technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
see comm gland kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
command words, data parameters . . . . . . . . 66 ground
CPI firmware revision, parameter . . . . . . . . 136 cable/wire requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
parameter refresh, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 136 ground fault protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 grounding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
status words, data parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 67
status, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 H
type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
heat loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
fieldbus termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
heatsink
filter, enclosure maintenance interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
R7/R8, exhaust, maintenance interval . . . . 253 maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
R7/R8, exhaust, maintenance procedure . . 258
R7/R8, inlet, maintenance interval . . . . . . . 253
R7/R8, inlet, maintenance procedure . . . . . 257 I
filter, enclosure air id run fail, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
maintenance procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 IEC ratings
firmware test date, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 see ratings
firmware version, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 impedance grounded network
first environment, definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 see floating network
FLN fieldbus incomp swtype, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
also see comm (EFB) information
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
loop gains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 input power
point database. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 branch circuit protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
point descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 cable/wire requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
floating network input power connection
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 floating networks
warning about filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278 lugs for R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
warning about screws at EM1, EM3 . . . . . . . 17 terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
warning about screws at F1, F2 . . . . . . . . . . 18 torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
flux braking, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104

Index
300 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

installation mailbox, EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 mains
environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 see input power
flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 maintenance
location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 capacitors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 control panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 drive module fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 enclosure air filter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
insulation enclosure fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 heatsink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
integration time (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 127 intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
integration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 R7/R8 enclosure exhaust filter . . . . . . . . . . . 258
interlocks R7/R8 enclosure inlet filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 triggers, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
internal setpoint (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 129 manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
IP 21 mapping
see UL type 1 actual value, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . 242
IP 54 EFB modbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
see UL type 12 materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
IR compensation maximum
frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 torque limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
voltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 torque select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
IT network metasys
see floating network connection diagram (companion). . . . . . . . . 191
connection diagram (system) . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
K integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
minimum
keypad reference select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 73 frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
kWh counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 torque limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
torque select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
L modbus
label EFB addressing, convention . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
serial number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 EFB coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
type code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 EFB discrete inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
language, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 EFB holding registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
liability limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294 EFB input registers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
limits, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 EFB mapping details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
EFB mapping summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
load package version, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 114 EFB supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
local mode EFB technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
lock, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
low frequency (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 142
lugs for R6 power cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271

M
macros
booster pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
condenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
cooling tower fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
dual setpoint w/ PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
dual setpoint w/ PID & const. speeds . . . . . . 57
e-bypass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
floating point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
hand control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
HVAC default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
internal timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
internal timer w/constant speeds . . . . . . . . . 54
listing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
pump alternation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
return fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
supply fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
to select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Index
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 301

motor network control unit

aux. start delay (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . 142 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
aux. stop delay (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . 142 N2 DDL file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
checking insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 noise
compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 random sw. freq. parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
connection specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 NPN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
control mode, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
id run, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 O
load curve break point frequency . . . . . . . . 108
load curve max., fault parameter. . . . . . . . . 108 object
load curve zero speed load . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108 virtual, description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
maintenance triggers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 offset (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
nominal current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 ok messages (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
nominal frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 61 operating data, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
nominal power, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 OPEX link, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
nominal speed, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 OPEX power, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
nominal voltage, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 options, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
number of aux., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 output frequency, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
phase, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
output voltage, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
stall, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
temperature alarm limit, parameter . . . . . . . 120 output wiring
temperature fault limit, parameter . . . . . . . . 120 fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
temperature measure, parameter group . . . 118 overcurrent
temperature sensor selection, parameter . . 120 automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
temperature sensor type, parameter. . . . . . 119 fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
temperature, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 overspeed, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
thermal protection, fault parameter . . . . . . . 107
thermal time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 108 P
motor cable panel display variables, parameter group . . . . . . 115
checking insulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 panel loss, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
max. length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 par override pars, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
max. length, 1st environment (class A) . . . . 277
max. length, 1st environment (class B) . . . . 278 par pfa override, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 parameter
requirements, EMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 analog input scale, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . 248
analog output scale, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . 248
motor connection
lugs for R6. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 change lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 external relay output, fault code . . . . . . . . . . 248
fieldbus, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
hz rpm, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
motor control PCU 1 (power control unit), fault code . 233, 249
IR compensation, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 104 PCU 2 (power control unit), fault code . . . . . 248
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 PFC mode, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
motor temperature PFC ref. neg., fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
overtemperature, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 restore (Assistant panel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
motor, NEMA MG1 part 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 save changes, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
MWh counter, data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 parameters
editing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
N view changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
N2 fieldbus parity errors (count), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
also see comm (EFB) parity (RS232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 PE earth
node limit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 earth fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
supported features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 PE earth connection
NCU terminal size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
see network control unit torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
NEMA 1
see UL type 1
NEMA 12
see UL type 12
NEMA ratings
see ratings

Index
302 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

PFA power
acceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 150 data parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
aux. motor start delay, parameter . . . . . . . . 142 first applied. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
aux. motor stop delay, parameter . . . . . . . . 142 previous faults, history parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . 70
control, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 process PID sets, parameter groups . . . . . . . . . 125
deceleration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 151 process variables, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
enable, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 profiles
low frequency, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 abb drives, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
number of aux. motors, parameter . . . . . . . 143 comm (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
reference step, parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 dcu, overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
start delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 proportional gain, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
start frequency, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
protection
PFC (pump fan control) branch circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
see PFA (pump fan alternation)
enclosure standard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
PID environmental. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
0% (actual signal), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 128
protocol
100% (actual signal), parameter . . . . . . . . . 128 BACnet, technical data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
actual input select, parameters . . . . . . . . . . 130
actual value max., parameters . . . . . . . . . . 130 protocol implementation conformance statement
actual value min., parameters. . . . . . . . . . . 130 see BACnet, pics
adjustment procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 PT100 temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
correction source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 135 PTC temperature sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
decimal point (actual signal), parameter . . . 127
derivation filter, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 R
derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 radiation limits, conducted
deviation, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 EN 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
error feedback inversion, parameter . . . . . . 127 ramp pair (accel/decel), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . 99
external source activate, parameter . . . . . . 134
external / trimming, parameter group . . . . . 134 ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
feedback multiplier, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 130 r-c snubber, drive input protection . . . . . . . . . . . 280
feedback select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 reference
feedback, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 analog input corrections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
gain, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 corrections for parameter values . . . . . . . . . . 75
integration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 keypad control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
internal setpoint, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 maximum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
offset, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 minimum, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
output, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 select source, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
parameter set select, parameter . . . . . . . . . 132 select, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
process sets, parameter groups . . . . . . . . . 125 reference scaling
scaling (0%...100%), parameters . . . . . . . . 128 EFB, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
setpoint maximum, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 129 FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
setpoint minimum, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 129 FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
setpoint select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 reference step (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 140
setpoint source, EFB comm activate . . . . . 163 regulator by-pass control, parameter . . . . . . . . . 149
setpoint source, FBA comm, activate . . . . . 230 relative humidity
setpoint, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 environment limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
sleep delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 shipping limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
sleep level, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 relay output
sleep selection, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 activation condition parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 82
trim mode, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 off-delay, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
trim scale, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 on-delay, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
units (actual signal), parameter. . . . . . . . . . 127 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
wake-up delay, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 status, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
wake-up deviation, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 132 relays, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
PID controller remove cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
advanced set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 reports, FLN fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
basic set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
planning
EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
FBA comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
plenum rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
PNP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Index
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 303

reset, automatic specifications

analog input less than min., parameter . . . . 111 control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
delay time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
external fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 input power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
number of trials, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 mains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
overcurrent, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 motor connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
parameter group speed
trial time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 at fault, history parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
undervoltage, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
resonance (avoiding) max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 min. limit, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
revolution counter, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 64 speed control
ring lugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 acceleration compensation, parameter . . . . 102
RS232 automatic tuning, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
baud rate, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 derivation time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
panel, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 integration time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
parity, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
station id, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 proportional gain, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
RS232 counts speed, constant
buffer overruns, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 digital input selection parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 77
CRC errors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
frame errors, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
ok messages, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 stall
parity errors, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 frequency, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
RS485 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 function, fault parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
RS485 comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
run enable time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
source select, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
run time, data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62, 64 CE marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
CSA C22.2 No. 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
CSA marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
S C-Tick marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 EN 50178 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
scalar control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 EN 60204-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
scaling EN 60529 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
actual values, EFB comm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 EN 61800-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292, 293
actual value, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . 240 IEC 60664-1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
actual value, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . 242 UL 508C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
FLN actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 UL marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
reference (EFB, ABB drives profile) . . . . . . 186 start
reference, FBA, ABB drives profile . . . . . . . 237 aux. motor delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
reference, FBA, generic profile . . . . . . . . . . 241 aux. motor (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . 141
s-curve ramp, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 control, EFB comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
sensor type, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 control, FBA comm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
sensorless vector control mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 DC magnetizing time, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 97
serial 1 error (fault code 28) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 delay (PFA), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
frequency (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
serial 1 error, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
serial communication inhibit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
see comm parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 torque boost current, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . 98
setpoint maximum (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . 129 start mode
setpoint minimum (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . 129 automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
setpoint select (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 automatic torque boost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
shock DC magnetizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 flying start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
short circuit, fault code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 starting order counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
single phase supply start-up
connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 motor data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
sleep selection (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
slip compensation ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . 105 start-up assistant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
soft keys, control panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 start-up data, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Index
304 ACH550-UH User’s Manual

start/stop, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 U

start/stop/dir, parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 UL type 1
state diagram code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
comm (EFB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
comm, ABB drives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 UL type 12
station id (RS232), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
status at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
status word UL/CSA markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
ABB drives, FBA, description . . . . . . . . . . . 235 underload
comm (EFB), definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 curve, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
FBA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
FBA generic profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 function, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
stop time, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
aux. motor delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 undervoltage
aux. motor (PFA), parameters . . . . . . . . . . 142 automatic reset, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
DC brake time, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 control enable, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
DC current ref., parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 ungrounded network
emergency devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 see floating network
emergency select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
units (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
flux braking, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
function, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 unsymmetrically grounded networks . . . . . . . . . 269
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 user parameter set
supervision change control, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
parameter low limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . 112 U/f ratio, parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
parameter selection, parameters . . . . . . . . 112
supply phase, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 V
switching frequency. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 vibration
switching frequency control, parameter. . . . . . . 105 stress testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
switching frequency derating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 virtual object, N2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
switching frequency, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 VND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
symmetrically grounded network. . . . . . . . . . . . 269 voltage
system controls, parameter group. . . . . . . . . . . . 87 at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
rating code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
T voltage/frequency ratio, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . 104
temperature derating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
terminals
W
location diagram, R5/R6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 wake-up delay (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
location diagram, R7/R8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 wake-up deviation (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . 132
termination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 warning
test date, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 automatic start up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3, 25
thermal fail, fault code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 dangerous voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
timers floating networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
boost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 high temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
enable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
parameter group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 parallel control connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 qualified installer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
start/stop time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 wiring
torque fault, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
at fault, history parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
boost current, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
data parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
max. limit select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
max. limit, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 XYZ
min. limit select, parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 zero speed load, fault parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
min. limit, parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
triac, drive inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
trim mode (PID), parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
trim scale (PID), parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
type code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Index
ACH550-UH User’s Manual 305

Index
 SUPERSEDES: MAR. 10, 2005
3AUA0000004092 Rev E / EN
EFFECTIVE: JUN 5, 2006
ACH550-US-04

ABB Oy ABB Inc.

AC Drives Automation Technologies
P.O. Box 184 Drives & Machines
FIN-00381 HELSINKI 16250 West Glendale Drive
FINLAND New Berlin, WI 53151
Telephone +358 10 22 11 USA
Telefax +358 10 22 22681 Telephone +1 262 785-3200
Internet http://www.abb.com +1 800 HELP-365
Telefax +1 262 780-5135
Internet http://www.abb-drives.com